Home

View - Daystar Software, Inc.

1. Import Configurations Import parameters tor Dat File Default Maxsurt Cancel Default Multitranie l CN ve Right ee en 9 E Ap Units fe C mm Up o te ht ve Ce om ME i metres feet Ce tye Front Cet yy tf 2 inches ye Dat Import Options Arc Segment Length 200 000 Defaut Wultitrame Add Delete gt Set the XYZ orientation of the data in the file You can use the radio buttons in the middle of the dialog to specify the orientation of the points in the file relative to the Multiframe coordinate system gt Set the units of the data in the file Click on the radio button corresponding to the units of the data in the file gt Optionally set the arc segment length If you are importing arcs from the file these will be stored as line segments with bulge factors gt Optionally save the configuration You can use the Add button at the bottom left of the dialog to add a configuration and save the setting for future usage For example if you frequently import from AutoCAD you might like to set up a configuration named AutoCAD to save your import settings gt Click OK to import the data When Multiframe imports a DWG DXF file as model each line in the file is used to specify a member in the frame A common problem of importing models from CAD programs is that the each line in the DWG DXF file does not represent a member but rather a number of members A typical example is a column in a multi st
2. units units gt Select Normal of Patch Load Panel gt Choose Patch or Load Panel from the drop down box Page 56 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe gt Enter the Patch If you select a patch or load panel as well as a member s before opening the Member Orientation dialog these last fields will already be populated It is still possible for you to change them The member will be orientated perpendicular to the patch on the same side as the patch normal If you wish to align the member opposite the patch normal then do the above and then click Flip X X and the section will be rotated by 180 degrees Any offset that the member has will also be reversed Automatically Align and Offset Member to Patch Load Panel The Member Align and Offset to Patch Load Panel command will automatically align a member to be perpendicular to a patch or load panel An offset is applied so that the bottom of the section is flush with the patch gt Select one or more members that are attached to gt Choose Member Align and Offset to Patch Load Panel from the Frame menu The following dialog will appear Opposite Patch 1 Normal Select the side of the patch load panel to orientate the member to If more than one patch load panel is selected the selected members will be aligned to the first patch load panel ie lowest number If a patch and a load panel is selected the members wil
3. gt Click on End 1 and or the End 2 check boxes to specify the ends of the member which are to be modelled using end springs And for each end gt Select the model used to determine the spring stiffness gt Specify the value of the parameter s used by the selected model gt Click on the OK button Three linear models are available for modelling the stiffness of the end springs Each model defines a different method for specifying the stiffness of the spring The models are as follows 1 Spring Stiffness Sc The stiffness of the end spring is specified directly 2 Rigidity Index r The linear model of Lightfoot and LeMessurier 1974 This model computes the spring stiffness is direct proportion to the member stiffness according to the relationship Sc r 4EI L The value of r ranges from zero for a pinned or free connected to infinity for a rigid connection 3 Fixity Factor n Another linear model for spring stiffness was suggested by Romstad and Subramanian 1970 and Yu and Shanmugam 1986 The model uses the fixity factor n to define the spring stiffness using the following relationship Sc nd l n 4EI L Chapter 2 Using Multiframe The value o the fixity factor ranges from 0 0 to 1 0 where a value of 0 0 represents a pinned or free connection and value of 1 0 a rigid connection The last two methods were derived for modelling moment connections However they have been generalised within Multifra
4. x Result ID Time History Case Step Case 1 hMaximum Envelope tee OE dy d E By ZC in in in deg deg deg A 1 om oof o00 Am om oo 2z 2 000 oo 003 oo 001 0 00 3 3 om oo ooo ooo ooo 000 4 4 om oo ooo oo omj om Bo s5 oo am 003 ooo 001 000 eE 6 oo oo ooo ooo 001 0 00 Zz om oo ooo ooo 001 002 ae a om om ooo ooo opp 000 AHI Displacements A Reactions 4 Plot Window fF Four different types of diagrams of forces and deflections can be viewed in the Plot window These are diagrams of the whole structure diagrams for an individual member reactions at a joint and deflections at a joint Page 207 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 208 The results for one load case at time can be viewed in the Plot window You can control which load case is currently on display by using the load case items at the bottom of the Case menu The current load case is indicated with a check mark to the left of its name in the menu The name of the current load case is also displayed at the bottom left hand corner of the Plot window When displaying diagrams of the whole structure or an individual member you can use the items from the Diagram sub menu under the Display menu to control which variable is to be displayed at any time The variable currently being displayed will be indicated with a check mark to the left of the item in the menu and will also be shown at th
5. Center H Center Radius Start Angle End Angle No of members JE M Connect to existing Cancel degrees degrees gt Type the coordinates of the centre of the arc radius and angle of sweep using the Tab key to move from number to number gt Type in the number of members you would like to use to approximate the curve gt Click the OK button Frame Bie Es Multiframe will automatically generate the assembly of members with the dimensions you have specified The direction of the arc will depend on the current view in the Frame window The arc will always be generated about the axis that is perpendicular to the screen or in the case of the 3D view about the axis that is most perpendicular to the direction of view This axis is not drawn in bold on the axis indicator Page 86 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Normally you will want the new members to connect with any existing members in the structure If you do not want this to happen uncheck the check box at the bottom of the dialog It is probably a good idea for you to test the accuracy of this approximation to a curve by generating arcs with different numbers of members and examining the effect this has on the results of analysis Generating a Regular Frame Multiframe allows you to quickly generate a regular frame that 1s made up of a number of evenly spaced similarly shaped sub structures Typical examples of this would be high rise buildings
6. GE el a El Is ES TERE rte 8 g waj gla Uj g LPE aule E vol c gt i Bloc fe a Fal ei h OP Al 3 Copy selection Opening Mirror Multiframe allows openings to be mirrored in structural designing Mirror command is available from the Geometry menu or from the Geometry toolbar To mirror an opening gt Select openings button icon gt Choose Mirror from the Geometry menu or Page 61 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe a Multiframe4D Fr File Edit View Select Geometry Group Frame Load Display Case Analyse Time Design Window Help Debug Jos a smelge St 19Q4 6 BAA eil DEI Er 6 III e 0 OH Elte De Grou Set 1 D als yaar elja OEMs Bacaa ad a A A AA A KSE EE JZ a7 AIS 319 wd Jp n e alo O a a aad daly E ei ei el e a 1s OD 27 A Ka a m Mirror selection Mirror about CE 2 901 6 671 0 000 V Connect to existing V Duplicate selection E MukromeaD Berg R ee File Edit View Select Geometry Group Frame Load Display Case Analyse Time Design Window Help Debug D sa eels Oee 4 Ml AA He B LEI z E lt a D T R Bs Pe E eh m e lles J a s yaar eja meos fo og e aaa No RAB ow m A J IZZIE VF t a p ovipaoel peoddja daddalutedda Opening Move Multiframe allows openings to be moved in structural designing Move command is available fr
7. Patch Release Allows you to release one or all edges of the selected patches Patch Colours Allows you to edit colours of the selected patches Patch Labels Allows you to edit labels of the selected patches Patch Thickness Allows you to edit thickness of the selected patches Patch Materials Allows you to edit materials of the selected patches Rotate Patch Axes Allows you to rotate patch axes anti clockwise Flip Patch z axis Allows you to flip patch z axis Patch Reference Axes Allows you to set a reference axes for all selected patches Plate Release Allows you to release one or all edges of the selected plates Plate Colours Allows you to edit colours of the selected plates Plate Labels Allows you to edit labels of the selected plates Plate Thickness Allows you to edit thickness of the selected plates Plate Materials Allows you to edit materials of the selected plates Chapter 3 Multiframe Reference Load Menu All commands available in the Load menu act on the current load case Unload Joint Remove all loads from the selected joints in the Load window Global Joint Load Add a point load to each of the selected joints in the Load window The load will be aligned with the global coordinate system A dialog box will appear allowing you to specify a direction and magnitude for the load Global Joint Moment Add a point moment to each of the selected joints in the Load windo
8. gt Choose Move from the Geometry menu A dialog box will appear with fields for the distance you wish to move the joints in each direction The Selection radio button will be selected indicating that you wish to move the selected joints rather than the origin Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Hove fo KEN f Selection C Origin EK y jo O00 tt jo UU tt Cancel Ip gt Enter the distance the joints are to be moved in each direction gt Click on the OK button Multiframe will create a connection between joints that you superimpose on top of each other using this command You can also move a single joint using this command Simply select one joint before using the command Moving a Member You can only move members in the Frame window Before moving a member make sure that there are no members selected in the frame To move a member gt Point to the member away from its ends and press the mouse button Frame gt Drag the member to its new position Page 95 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 96 gt Release the mouse button to fix the new position of the member Flame i el The slope and length of the member will remain constant as you move the member You can only move members in the two dimensional views Holding down the shift key while dragging will constrain movement vertically horizontally or to 45 degrees The coordinates of the pointer will be displayed in the bottom lef
9. o Is dw A e a E Multiframe4D Frame amp File Edit View Select Geometry Group Frame Load Display Case Analyse Time Design Window Help Debug Dsa seeloe Set eaeeR FA Be B OS S t til E OB Oy Co pt et m Gost S VA AD a If a aqaaaqadM a AA 633 30 A oo me J 14 18 7 Vs Clos i peondd ddda utecaa Generate N sided Patch amp Opening Multiframe allows N sided patches amp openings to be generated in structural designing based on the member selections Auto generate Patches amp Auto generate Openings commands are available from the Geometry menu or from the patch toolbar To generate a N sided patch gt Select a list of members that form a N sided patch gt Choose Auto generate Patches from the Geometry menu or icon button Page 65 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 66 e Multiframe4D Frame File Edit View Select Geometry Group Frame Load Display Case Analyse Time Design Window Help Debug l jOsa smeloe Se 9QeeR ARA E G S F 2 6 D T S E Bam o l e S FAA FA JS mAs 02 gees aa Aaa3 A 5n RAE m am A EHNEN VIP EE jn ov ao Patch 7 i Hodleleeeeagel Zei A a e ts do w d Be geg pen E een File Edit View Select Geometry Group Frame Load Display Case Analyse Time Design Window Help Debug osm Reest DI a
10. Global Moment Add a point moment to each of the selected members in the Load window A dialog box will appear which allows you to specify the magnitude direction and position of the load for the members selected A global moment acts about one of the global x y or z axes Local Dist d Load Add a local distributed load to each of the selected members in the Load window A dialog box will appear which allows you to specify the magnitude direction and position of the load A local distributed load acts parallel to one of the local x y or z member axes Page 283 Chapter 3 Multiframe Reference Page 284 Local Point Load Add a local point load to each of the selected members in the Load window A dialog box will appear which allows you to specify the magnitude direction and position of the load A local point load acts parallel to one of the local x y or z member axes Local Moment Add a local point moment to each of the selected members in the Load window A dialog box will appear which allows you to specify the magnitude direction and position of the load A local moment acts about one of the local x y or z member axes Thermal Load Add a thermal load to each of the selected members in the Load window A dialog box will appear which allows you to specify the temperature thermal coefficient depth and direction of the load A thermal load may either be uniform or a linear variation of temperature through th
11. Member Type Allows you to choose whether a member is standard tension only or compression only Member Offsets Multiframe 3D and 4D only Allows you specify the size of rigid offset connections at the ends of the member Member Masses Multiframe 4D only Specify whether the mass of the selected members should be included when a dynamic analysis is performed This does not affect the inclusion of a member s weight when a static analysis is carried out using self weight That is controlled by the Member Self Weight item from the Load menu Member Labels Allows you to edit the user defined label associated with each member Member Component Allows you to specify what type of component in the model that the member represents Member End Springs This command is used to specify semi rigid behaviour at the ends of the member Any of the members degrees of freedom may be specified as semi rigid and a suitable stiffness spring stiffness associated with the connection Page 281 Chapter 3 Multiframe Reference Page 282 Spring Member Stiffness Sets the stiffness of the spring members selected in the Frame Window Load Panel Colours Allows you to edit colours of the selected load panels Load Panel Labels Allows you to edit labels of the selected load panels Load Panel Supports Allows you to edit supports of the selected load panels Patch Meshing Allows you to change mesh densities of the selected patches
12. Multiframe Advanced Frame File Edit View Select Geometry Group Frame Load Display Case Analyse Time Design Window Help Debug EE ESCH IO OO ds amp e r B DI zz AE zg Load Case OB Ti Ce Es es wD sv aar e a J S If gt o mA Em m Am Je emia Seis J eg dreift ee Auto generate Patch Stiffeners Multiframe supports patch stiffeners to be auto generated Patch stiffeners will be defined by its in plane design members Auto generate Patch Stiffeners command is available from the Geometry menu or from the right click shortcut menu gt Select patch in which stiffeners will be generated in the Frame window and gt gt Choose Auto generate Patch Stiffeners mouse right click Patch Properties Patch Materials Patch Thickness Patch Meshing Patch Colors Patch Labels Rotate Patch Axes Flip Patch z Axis Split Patch Merge Patch Auto generate Patch Stiffeners Auto generate Patch Hot Spots Patch Reference Axes Mask To Selection Ctrl M Mask Out Selection Ctrl Shift M gt A dialog box will appear with a field for the number of stiffeners stiffener types direction amp section orientations etc Page 70 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Generate Stiffeners on Patch 1 W Flip ve C Align Opposite Patch Normal gt Click OK a
13. 19 4 10 0 045 0 925 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 221 1 023 1 067 20 4 g 0 780 0 943 0 000 0 001 0 001 0 099 0 890 0 990 21 5 16 0 045 0 925 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 221 1 023 1 067 29 S AF n 7AN naa nanan A TH A NAN nnaq naan naan a5 DD End Spring Actions A Patch Internal Forces Apatch Stresses A Nal lt mM gt The table of patch stresses is similar to the table of patch actions It displays the number of each patch the patch label and the joints within the patch in the leftmost columns The remaining columns display the stresses of all joints according to the local patch coordinate system The patch stresses displayed in the Result window are shown in the diagram below The stresses at all joints within its patch follow the same sign convention as the stresses at joint 1 Page 189 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 190 Joint 1 Transverse shear stresses follow the right hand rule 1 e if the axis is from left to right and the thumb on your right hand points in the direction towards to you Positive shear stress Negative shear stress Positive axis Nonlinear Results on page 201 Lifting Analysis A new type of analysis has been added for analysing frames which are used for lifting calculations Typical examples would be lifting of baskets and skids with slings which are attached to a crane Such models are typified by a lack of restraint in the horizontal plane which allows the frame to either rotate or swing freely If
14. 252 254 255 T ET 6 Table Dairena 245 Tables Analysis Settings ccccssssssssssseeeeeeeees 288 Jont Eoad E 286 Joint MASSES eee 287 VOWS satis setae N sat a Seta Maecenas 286 Lioked JONS EE 286 Load C as oara E dinate 287 Member End Dropertes 286 Member End Smngs 286 Member OGeometrw 286 287 288 Member Loads arsine 286 Member Dropertes 286 Prescribed Displacements 00008 286 Rest AUIS eege 286 Eege 288 EE 287 Spring Member e 287 EIERE 286 Se BE 287 inermal Loads E 286 EMSC SX oada ue aaa eiecael ss 290 Page 347 Index TextFile Formationen 319 TEE OS ee 260 Thermal Load ariran 149 282 Thermal Loads Table 286 Tile FI OPiZOMtal EE 294 RT GUC EE 294 Time History Ctrl CH 294 Time History Analys 193 Time History Envelope Cases 006 205 Time History Load Case 160 293 Time History Results 203 Time History Results Text Files EE 242 Time History ResultsText File 261 Time Memik conse e 294 TOO EE 267 ACHON EE 250 VID EE 254 255 DFA Watt ieee astra eet 248 E ee 248 s E 252 Generi eea 248 EE Ey sone ash tote E A D as 249 Cire e EE 253 E ee 250 erer 251 Load Cases cinciicatiiniecn um a 251 Membe ee 249 e en ee rere ren nee 253 SVMDONS ieia 252 254 255 KE 250 Kee D EE 253 Ee 253 Ree 270 TORUS KEE 289 Troubleshooting 00oeeeeeoeeeeneeesessssssssssse 309 Page 348 d Kat GE 315 EEN 158 U Be re EE 261 Be
15. A Area m Mass per unit length Io polar moment of inertia Ix Iy L Length The mass matrix for a distributed mass model also known as the consistent mass matrix in some texts is as follows 140mL 0 0 0 0 0 70mL 0 0 0 0 0 420 A420 0 156mL 0 0 0 22mtT2 0 5 Amt 0 0 0 420 420 420 1 3mL2 420 0 0 156mL 0 saam 0 0 0 5 Amt 0 key nee 0 420 420 420 A420 0 0 0 140mLI 0 0 0 0 0 70mLI 0 0 O O ZOOM A20A Page 305 Chapter 4 Multiframe Analysis 70mL 420 A Area m Mass per unit length Page 306 O 22mL O Amt O O O 13mL2 0 3mL2 O 420 420 AZO 420 22mL2 0 0 0 Amt 0 1 3mL2 0 0 0 3mL2 420 420 420 420 O O O O 140mL O O O O O 420 5 4mL O O O 13m2 O Loomis O O O 420 420 420 22mL2 420 O 54mL O 13mL2 O O O 156mL O 22m 2 O 420 ADU A20 AZ O O 7OmLIo O O O O O 140mL O O 420A To 420A 0 1 3mL2 0 3mL2 0 0 0 22mL2 0 AmL3 0 A420 420 420 420 13mL 0 0 0 3mL2 O 22mL2 0 0 0 Amt 420 420 420 420 Io polar moment of inertia Ix Iy L Length In general a distributed mass matrix will give a more accurate result However in some circumstances the distributed mass approach may not converge In this case use the lumped mass approach If in doubt use both methods and compare the results between the two Capacity The absolute maximum capacities for Multiframe are as follows Number of joints No limit N
16. B Breadth width of section tf Flange thickness tw Web thickness If you wish to carry out analysis taking into account deflection due to shear effects you should also fill in the following fields ASX Shear area in x direction Asy Shear area in y direction Be careful to ensure that the units of the values you enter match those of the fields shown in the table on screen Only the groups in the library that are not locked will be shown in the list of groups If you wish to store the section in the library and have it available for use in other structures store the section in one of the groups other than the group named Frame Sections stored in the Frame group will be stored with the structure and will not appear in the list unless you are using this structure You will probably find it convenient to store most of your sections in the Frame group to avoid cluttering up your library with sections that are only used in one or two structures Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Each time Multiframe starts up it will look for the default section library c program files multiframe sectionslibrary slb file Any changes to the sections library will automatically be saved to this file Removing a Section To remove a custom section from the library gt Choose Delete Section from the Sections menu under the Edit menu A dialog box will appear with a list of groups and sections Select Section Group Section Double Angle Fipe
17. Cancel gt Choose how section names in Microstran are to be matched with those currently loaded into Multiframe Section names may be mapped automatically in which case Multiframe will use some simple rules regarding the naming conventions used in Microstran and attempt to modify the names to match a Multiframe section name Section names may also be mapped using a mapping file that contains a list of Multiframe sections names and an alternative name for that section Refer to Appendix C for a full description of section mapping files gt Choose if the user is to be prompted to manually locate sections within the Microstran file that cannot be resolved to a section with the Multiframe library gt Choose if sections from the Microstran file that are not resolved to a Multiframe section are to be added to the Frame group within the sections library gt Click the OK button The Microstran file will now be imported into Multiframe It is important to note that the data used to describe a frame in Microstran is slightly different in structure to that used in Multiframe As such some feature and data used within Microstran might be lost when importing into Multiframe While not all the features in Multiframe and Microstran are compatible the majority of the geometry topology and loading can be exchanged via this file format The nodes and members in Multiframe are labelled with the original Microstran numbering Space Gass Text
18. Data Submenu Results See the Results Submenu Actions See the Actions Submenu Stresses 3 See the Stresses Submenw Patch Internal Forces See the Patch Internal Force Submenu Patch Stresses See the Patch Stresses Deflection Display the deflection for the current load case in the Plot window If the current load case is a dynamic case the deflection will represent a mode shape of the structure Animate Animate the diagram in the front window In the Frame and Load windows this command only operates in the 3D view and will display views of the structure at a range of viewing angles Once the diagrams have been displayed you can animate the range of views by moving the mouse back and forth In the Plot window this command will compute a series of diagrams showing the change as loading increases from zero to its prescribed level If you turn on the Save To Animation File check box in the Animate dialog the animation will be saved into an AVI movie file The movie is displayed in the window with the standard AVI controller and you can play it if you wish using the standard Windows Media Player program QuickTime Render Display the frame complete with web and flange details This display will help you visualise the orientation and section types for the frame The rendering is not an exact display of the actual shape of the members in the structure but more a visual guide to the rel
19. This data includes panel numbers label side elements and colour etc Load Panel Loads Display a table of load panel data describing the loads of the load panels This data includes panel numbers label load shape direction and magnitude etc Patch Geometry Display a table of patch data describing the geometry of the patches in the frame This data includes patch numbers label mesh type material thickness and colour etc Patch Edge Release Display a table of patch data describing the edge releases of the patches This data includes patch numbers label sides and release details Patch Loads Display a table of patch data describing the loads of the patches This data includes patch numbers label load shape direction and magnitude etc Patch Openings Display a table of patch opening data describing the geometry of the openings in the frame This data includes patch opening numbers label corner nodes patch belonging to etc Patch Constrains Display a table of patch line constrains This data includes constrain numbers label patch belonging to nodes type of constrain amp line constrain from etc Plate Geometry Display a table of plate data describing the geometry of the plates in the frame This data includes plate numbers label material thickness and colour etc Page 289 Chapter 3 Multiframe Reference Page 290 Plate Release Display a table of plate data describing the edge releases of the
20. Tick the check box to flood any hollow SHS RHS tubes members If this button is un checked the buoyancy of such members is taken to be that of their total enclosed volume Member Buoyancy Individual member buoyancy factors can be edited by using the Member Buoyancy dialog To edit the member buoyancy gt Select one or more members gt Choose Member Buoyancy from the Case menu The following dialog will be displayed Member Buoyancy Flooded Apply to all Buoyancy load cases Members can be completely ignored no buoyancy load applied or their flooded status Set Page 177 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 178 Patch Buoyancy Individual patch buoyancy factors can be edited by using the Patch Buoyancy dialog To edit the patch buoyancy gt Select one or more patches gt Choose Patch Buoyancy from the Case menu The following dialog will be displayed Patch Buoyancy Apply to all Buoyancy load cases Patches can be completely ignored no buoyancy load applied Plate Buoyancy A dialog similar to that for patch buoyancy can be used to edit individual plate buoyancy factors Plate selection must be turned on and one or more plate selected to access this dialog Hydrostatic Load Case Multiframe allows you to add a Hydrostatic load case which automates the applying of fluid hydrostatic loads to the structure To create a Hydrostatic Load Case gt Choose Hydrostatic from the Add Case menu in t
21. Typical examples would be lifting of baskets and skids with slings which are attached to a crane Such models are typified by a lack of restraint in the horizontal plane which allows the frame to either rotate or swing freely If you model a frame like this you will often get the error message Solution does not make sense The lifting analysis function automatically adds additional spring restraints to the model to provide sufficient horizontal restraint to allow the model to be analysed This eliminates the need for you to apply your own manual spring restraints The stiffness of these restraints is automatically set by Multiframe so as to have a minimal effect on the actions within the frame They are set at a small proportion of the other stiffnesses in the frame While you are creating your structural model you should review the location of the centre of mass and ensure that the lifting point is located as near as possible to a location directly above the centre of mass of the structure and its loads Note also that when modelling slings or lifting cables you should release both moments and torsion at the ends of those members If you release all of the sling members connecting to the lifting point be sure to applied a fixed restraint to the lifting point to prevent that node from rotating A lifting analysis is performed via the Lifting command in the Analysis menu A lifting analysis is in fact a special type of linear analysis
22. dz z deflection at the crosshair x2 rotation of joint 2 about the x axis y2 rotation of joint 2 about the y axis GES rotation of joint 2 about the z axis Mz bending moment about z at crosshair My bending moment about v at crosshair Vy shear force through v at crosshair Vz shear force through z at crosshair Px axial force at crosshair Tx torque at crosshair Length Length of member Slope Slope of member XI x coordinate of joint 1 Y1 y coordinate of joint 1 Z1 z coordinate of joint 1 X2 x coordinate of joint 2 Ke y coordinate of joint 2 Z2 z coordinate of joint 2 Dist distance to the crosshair MaxMz Absolute value of the max Mz Chapter 2 Using Multiframe MaxMy Absolute value of the max My MaxVy Absolute value of the max Vy MaxVz Absolute value of the max Vz MaxAT Absolute value of the max axial tension MaxAC Absolute value of the max axial compression MaxTx Absolute value of the max torque Maxdx Absolute value of the max x deflection Maxdy Absolute value of the max y deflection Maxdz Absolute value of the max z deflection Pi 3 14159 The pre defined variables in the CalcSheet will be in the units currently specified using the Units item from the View menu See Units below Section Properties Variables Multiframe will automatically extract all the section properties for the section used for the member from the Sections Library These properties will be stored in variables with the same names as the pro
23. ie File Edt View Select Geomety Group Frame Load Display Case Analyse Time Design Window Help Debug 7 x Deng eloe Se T 29e2RB AA E else S T gI o vac Pu BT ey TE E Ile D Ah Gasca D SV4AP 2 j va CO RAD Am 4 N EERDE lge D gt a i mes es Aa eC a z AJE a E SR A l i View ps B59 yoS 441 290 000 dx 1 742 dy 1 400 dz 0 000 L 2234 Gs A8 787 Ready caps NUM gt Input corner radius and click OK button Radius Kafe mm Convert Opening to Patch Multiframe allows openings to be converted to patches in structural designing based on the selections of openings Convert Opening to Patch commands is available from the Geometry menu or from the patch toolbar To convert openings to patches gt Select openings gt Choose Convert Opening to Patch Command from the Geometry menu or icon button Page 59 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe in Anae O File Edit View Select Geometry Group Frame Load Display Case Analyse Time Design Window Help Debug Dsn ee i sO QQeeH AA HOM A0 B F 5 T R Ce E e OO Cows S T IAD e Al S mAs o f leodeieaia all a aa a A KSE OUER J 14 18 AIDS zl wl ul D sl HOnd d d dd dale tea a i Multiframe4D Frame file Edit View Select Geometry Group Frame Load Display Case Analyse Time Design Window Help Debug EEES TERE lO aqe
24. labels materials thickness patch loads and plate axes numbers labels materials thickness and loads etc Actions Toolbar Makes the Actions toolbar visible or invisible in the Plot Window The Actions Toolbar allows you to view results of an analysis such as the Ma and Deflection Load Case Toolbar Makes the Load Case toolbar visible or invisible The Loadcase toolbar provides a simple way to transverse the different load cases Page 273 Chapter 3 Multiframe Reference Page 274 Load Toolbar Makes the Load toolbar visible or invisible The Load Toolbar provides common loading options Select Menu The Select menu has commands for automatically selecting parts of the structure All Ctrl A Automatically selects all the members in the frame Joints Allows you to select a joint by number Joint Labels Selecting a member using the joint label Linked Joints Selects the members in specified linked joint groups Sections Allows you to select all the members in the Frame window which have a given section type You can choose the section type to be selected from a list of sections in the Sections Library Members Allows you to select a member by number Member Labels Selecting a member using the member label Member Slope The Member Slope menu contains commands to select members aligned in various directions e Horizontal Automatically selects all the horizontal members beams in the fram
25. trusses or multiple bay portal frames Multiframe also allows you to duplicate shapes in cylindrical and spherical coordinates Duplicate To duplicate a structure gt Draw or generate the sub structure you wish to duplicate Frame B lel View gt Select the sub structure to be duplicated Frame 0 a gt Choose Duplicate from the Geometry menu Page 87 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 88 Duplicate El Spacing on ft RSC UK y spacing en o ft be Cancel z spacing o 0 ft Lancel Number of Times 4 GG Linear Cylindrical Spherical I Connect to Existing A dialog box will appear allowing you to specify the type of duplication the spacing in each direction the number of times the selection is to be duplicated and whether the duplicated members should be connected with the existing structure gt gt gt Choose which type of duplication you require Enter the spacing for your sub structure Enter the number of times you wish to repeat the sub structure Click the OK Button Frame _ oI If you do not want connections to be generated between adjacent members then switch off the check box connect to existing Normally you will want this option left on A connection will be made between generated members and existing members if the end joints are within 0 2 inches 5 mm of each other An example of the use of the Duplicate command to generate a multiple
26. zooming panning or shrinking as it returns you to a viewing scale that just fits the frame inside the window Size To Fit Frame fits the whole frame inside the window Size To Fit Selection fits the selected members and joints inside the window Size To Fit Clipping fits the range of clipping inside the window The Home key can be used as a short cut to the Size to Fit command Clipping and Masking Multiframe allows you to control how much of the structure you wish to view at one time by use of two techniques named clipping and masking Clipping allows you to define a three dimensional box which encloses the part of the structure you wish to work with while masking allows you to selectively show or hide any member or group of members in the structure For example suppose you wish to view the bending moment diagram for a given column line in a frame Without clipping the diagram is very difficult to decipher However if you select the column line and then choose Clip to Selection from the Clipping sub menu under the Edit menu the diagram is made much clearer Masking may be used ma similar way When a member is grey or hidden because of clipping or masking it cannot be selected or moved with the mouse Clipping You can control the clipping of the structure in any of the two dimensional views in a window The clipping affects the display of graphics in the Frame Load and Plot windows This means that you can use the clipping controls in
27. 0 0000 0 0000 LOADS 2 LOAD CASE Load Case 1 JOINT LOAD 2 1 3 0 0 0000 0 0000 2 8 0 0 0000 0 0000 MEMBER LOAD 0 THERMAL LOAD O LOAD CASE Load Case 2 JOINT LOAD 0 MEMBER LOAD 6 d 2 14 2 3 14 3 6 14 4 7 14 5 4 4 6 8 4 THERMAL LOAD 0 RESULTS LOAD CASE Load Case 1 DISPLACEMENTS AND REACTIONS 1 2 2274 2 0 0000 3 0 0000 0 0309 2 lt L622 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 9 BN L19300 0 0000 2 5446 0 033 0 0 0000 0 0014 0 0000 0 0309 0 0000 0 0000 2 4827 0 4120 1 4778 aa Ot es 0 0000 0 3696 0 0000 0 s1930 0 0000 5 5704 OOOO OC CH 3 1597 129 9905 1 1 1 1 0 0000 1 1 1 1 0 0000 1 1 1 1 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0 0000 0000 0 0000 0000 0 0000 0000 0 0000 0000 0 0000 0000 0 0000 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0426 0 4825 0 0009 0 1492 0 0000 0 0000 0 1716 0 1358 0 0000 0 0000 0 0009 0 0089 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 E Q L002 14000 0 2251 0 0000 0 0000 100 05 0 1492 0 0000 0 0000 0 8375 0 1358 0 0000 0 0000 0 0013 0 0089 0 0000 0 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 2 5000 2 5000 2 5000 2 5000 4 0000 4 0000 0000 0035 1749 0000 1272 0000 OOOO OC CH 0011 0000 0000 0010 1986 OOOO CH 0 0000 0 1986 0 0000 RR T272 0 0000
28. 000 0 001 0 001 0 099 0 890 0 990 dE 3 6 0 045 0 925 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 221 1 023 1 067 16 4 14 0 789 1 525 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 065 1 326 1 530 17 4 15 0 009 1 368 0 000 0 001 0 001 0 058 1 368 1 371 18 4 29 0 383 1 190 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 071 1 060 1 197 19 4 10 0 045 0 925 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 221 1 023 1 067 20 4 g 0 780 0 943 0 000 0 001 0 001 0 099 0 890 0 990 21 5 16 0 045 0 925 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 221 1 023 1 067 29 S AF n 7AN naa nanan A TH A NAN nnaq naan naan a5 DD End Spring Actions A Patch Internal Forces Apatch Stresses A Nal lt mM gt The table of patch stresses is similar to the table of patch actions It displays the number of each patch the patch label and the joints within the patch in the leftmost columns The remaining columns display the stresses of all joints according to the local patch coordinate system The patch stresses displayed in the Result window are shown in the diagram below The stresses at all joints within its patch follow the same sign convention as the stresses at joint 1 Page 203 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 204 Joint 1 Transverse shear stresses follow the right hand rule 1 e if the axis is from left to right and the thumb on your right hand points in the direction towards to you Positive shear stress Negative shear stress Positive axis _ _ _ A _ Nonlinear Results For each static load case Multiframe stores the result
29. 2 Using Multiframe Page 216 Plot Overlay Settings Overlay Acton koment Mai e Color Precision S peed Line Thickness C Low Fast C Medium Medium Ge HigherSlower Highest Slowest Overlay Scale Ge Absolute C Signed Diagram Settings Scale 1 0 Cancel gt Type Tab to move to the field containing the maximum threshold value gt Type in anew maximum threshold value to be used with red to indicate the highest actions or stresses gt Select the Overlay Colour Scale either absolute or signed gt Click the OK button If the overlay is displayed using the Absolute colour scale every part of the structure with an action of magnitude greater than or equal to the value you specified will be coloured red Other parts of the structure will be coloured in an even gradient down to blue for those parts of the frame with an action of zero When the Signed overlay colour scale is selected the overlay plot will show positive values in shades of red and negative values in shades of blue You can change the scale of deflected diagram plots by changing the value in the Diagram Settings Scale field The scale is a value relative to the default exaggeration of the diagram Eg setting this value to 3 will result in an exaggerated plot 3 times the default scale Setting this value to 1 0 will result in a deflection plot at true scale Stresses You can display stresses as well as forces and deflecti
30. A global point load is a concentrated load that acts at a position part way along a member and acts in a direction parallel to one of the reference x y or z axes To apply a global point load to a member gt Select the member or members to be loaded gt Choose Global Point Load from the Load menu or the short cut menu A dialog box will appear with icons to indicate the direction of loading Page 145 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 146 Global Point Load Me E3 Global Point Load r cea Magnitude D kN Left Distance IL m Cancel In a two dimensional view there will be four icons indicating the four possible loading directions In the 3D view all six possible icons will be displayed with the direction of the arrows in the icons showing the direction of the action of the loads as they will be displayed in the current view gt Click on the icon which shows the direction in which the load is to act gt Type in the value for the magnitude of the load gt Press Tab and type in the position of the load measured from joint 1 gt Click on the OK button There is no need to enter or signs for your load magnitudes The directions are determined from the icon that you select When you enter positions of loads in the member loading dialogs or the Data window you can enter calculation expressions for the position For example if you want a load to be at mid span you can enter L 2 for its position If you enter this in
31. Area Non uniform tio 8 BHine gt 8 Bi line 8 Node 2 ElsiSegs i 3 8 3 Cem 1 4 6 3 H 3 g 4 H Displaying a Patch or Plate Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Patch 1 Properties Label Bending Thickness 10 000 Membrane Thickness 10 000 Additional Mass Per Area Material 0 000 Group No Material Material No Material Mass Per Area 0 000 Non uniform Mesh Size 1 016 Patch 1 Properties Patch Properties Label Bending Thickness 10 000 Membrane Thickness 10 000 Additional Mass Per Area Material 0 000 Group No Material Material ep Material Mass Per Area kg m Non uniform Mesh Size 1 016 Uniform Multiframe allows control of the display of a range of symbols associated with patches and plates These options are available via the Symbols command in the Display menu or more commonly via the icons in the Patch Plate Symbols toolbar Page 53 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 54 Patch Plate Symbols Toile oO eillelei gei a a a a aad aa amp These icons control visibility of e patches patch meshes edge nodes internal nodes e patch colour fill patch outline patch axes patch numbers patch labels patch materials patch thickness patch loads e plate axes plate numbers plate labels plate materials plate thickness plate loads Attach Member Patch to Patch Multiframe allows members patches t
32. Bending Moment about the local z axis Shear forces in the local y axis Axial forces for the current load case Display Deflection Display force reactions Display moment reactions Bending Moment about the local y axis Shear forces in the local z axis Torque about the local x axis Load Case Toolbar E Load Case 2 Gei o gt FH The Load Case toolbar can be used as a shortcut for changing the current load case You can select a load case from the drop down list or click the right and left arrows to go to the next or previous load case The first button on the toolbar provides access to a Re analyse command which analyses the model using the settings last input via the Analyse dialog The button on the far right of the toolbar is used to switch between the linear and nonlinear results for the current load case Load Toolbar PW Pole boje a 5 SS bev The Load Toolbar is found in the Load Window and provides shortcuts to command associated with loads From left to right the buttons perform the following functions Display load labels Joint Load Joint Moment Global member distributed load Global member point load Global member point moment Local member distributed load Page 253 Chapter 3 Multiframe Reference Page 254 Local member point load Local member point moment Global load panel distributed load Local load panel distributed load Global patch point load Local patch point load Glo
33. Bentley analysis design or detailing packages such as Staad Pro Staad x amp Sacs etc To export a frame saved in the ISM format gt Choose ISM from the Export sub menu gt Specify the name and location of the file to be exported using the Save File dialog Graphics The image in any of Multiframe graphical windows can be copied to the clipboard using the Copy command in the Edit menu or by pressing Ctrl C This provides a simple means for using pictures of your model or plots of member actions into other applications Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Table Data Tables of numbers can be copied directly from the Data and Results windows onto the clipboard using the Copy command from the Edit menu or via the Ctrl C key combination If you hold down the Shift key in the Data or Result window while choosing the Copy command from the Edit menu the column titles will be included in the text placed on the clipboard This information is in a format that allows it to be pasted directly into a spreadsheet or used for constructing a table in a word processor A discussion on how a spreadsheet can be using in conjunction with Multiframe is described in Appendix E You can paste tables of numbers into Multiframe in the data window by preparing a table of data in a spreadsheet and then pasting it into the selected cells in the Data window When pasting in numbers make sure that the numbers to be pasted have the same number of rows and columns as the
34. E le E 96 PRES 21110 Ee 97 ESC alin the STUIC MC EE 97 Rotatino Members EE 98 Exirudin Beams or COWS EE 99 kee ert Ee 99 Sheann WICIMB CLS eresien 100 Editing Coordinates Numerical y sii eendeiteg 101 Jomteand Member N mMDErS aissis a atelier a T 103 deele 104 IS AMINO ce ale cee eeben 104 dek RESIN ee 105 Eege 106 Editing Restraints Brell 107 GEO EN 107 Linking Joints Or Master Slave meoin n 110 Joint E 112 Member EE 112 Section Orientation ccccceccececcececcececccceccececcscececeeccescecescecscecesesccesees 113 Automatically Align and Offset Member to Patch ssnesoeneeenensssesssssee 114 EE EE 115 lee EE 115 Addins a CUSTOMISE CMON RE 117 Removing a pecol as sia 119 EE ee E 119 SEENEN Ee 120 DY MERU E EE 120 Member IV Ee 121 Patch Orthotropic Nal 121 PRC E EE 122 Editing and Deletine Materials sieeieg ebe ENe eebe 123 Working with the Sections Library 123 JOLI YPO an N N NOS 124 erg SE e E 125 Member Releases entice unnatural wenn 126 MVS T Ypo Gast Shas Maecenas vache eeh 127 Member OHS E 128 Member EE ee ee 129 leegen 131 STG AIS EE 131 APPIN E EE 132 TOn By SE 133 enke e e er EE 133 reselen deet deet 134 Global Distributed Loa E 135 Local Distributed ead ee 137 Glo Bat Panel TO EE 138 kocal Panel EE 138 Global Patch Distributed Load 139 Local Patch Distributed Lodd preiei ariin 141 Global Pateh Pont ele 141 local Patchy ee EE 142 Patch ee Wad EE 143 Global POMmil OA EE 145 Local
35. EE 84 Convergence Tolerance sunekin 186 Convert Member to Ac 78 274 COOPCINAUES striai eiaa 101 EE 261 Create Design Member 278 Creatine a SUCUT E 29 ORC eeben 6 TCIM an Satta A EE vate eats 6 CULVEC EE 85 CUSTOM SCC EE 117 Customize EE et e 212 285 Ee 261 Cylindrical Coordinates ccccccesseseeeeeees 89 D Eeer 295 Data Ee EE 230 Data Sub Men 284 286 Data tee 247 Day SHAG Ter EEN 260 Daystar Text Files EE 240 DeflecHo Nia 284 DE Eee tre Tener ncee eT rer are 6 SG CLO EE AE ERA OA ecient 119 Dielete JeentMloeeee eege 112 Delete C Ien 157 293 Delete GL OUD a 278 Delete Group Set cine essen ee 278 ele eelere Ee R 265 Delete Member 80 220 274 D lele e gl EE 119 265 Page 342 Deleting a load case cccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeees 157 Dep EE 33 Design Member RE 278 EIER 278 Disconnect Members 276 Disconnecting Membere 96 Displacements Table 288 Display MICO Wrest ssisucecienttacss Seca tinadattatints 283 Eelere 193 COU DIC SCHICK sr N tate 6 double PLE CISION EE 184 B sy spender Eer 6 DENN Ss ge EE 29 Drawing Rn EE 33 266 Drawing EEN 35 276 Drawing TOON E 248 271 rte EE 87 275 Duplicate current load case 155 EE 231 259 DOLE gege 239 Dynamic Line Constraints sseeeeeeeee 34 271 Dynamic Loll issiron nnnanns arena 282 E Edit SEON E 119 EE 268 Bet e EEN 156 292 EE 278 Edit Group Sel eg 278 Edit Load Library cc0008 158 262 EE 265 Edit Wen E
36. Files A Space Gass text file txt can be opened within Multiframe To import a Space Gass text file gt Choose Space Gass Text from the Import sub menu Page 239 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 240 If a frame is already open within Multiframe you will be asked if you wish to append the file to the existing frame You may also be prompted to save the existing frame gt Select the file to be imported using the Open File dialog Upon choosing a file the Import Export Options dialog will be displayed Complete the settings in this dialog as described above and click OK The Space Gass file will now be imported into Multiframe It is important to note that the data used to describe a frame in Space Gass is slightly different in structure to that used in Multiframe As such some feature and data used within Microstran might be lost when importing into Multiframe While not all the features in Multiframe and Space Gass are compatible the majority of the geometry topology and loading can be exchanged via this file format The nodes and members in Multiframe are labelled with the original Space Gass numbering SDNF Multiframe can import files in the Steel Detailing Neutral File format SDNF This can be used to import models generated in other analysis design or detailing software into Multiframe To import an SDNF file gt Choose SDNF from the Import sub menu If a frame is already open within Multiframe you
37. Iteration Typically values for the convergence error of 10 3 will give adequate results Maximum Iterations The number of iterations carried out before the analysis fails The number must be greater than 0 Options Multiframe 4D provides two additional options for performing buckling analysis of 3D models When selected these options utilise an enhanced formulation for the geometric stiffness matrix that accounts for the interaction of torsion and flexure Full details of this formulation can be found in the text by McGuire Gallagher and Ziemian Also see Buckling Results on page 224 Modal Analysis Modal Analysis Concepts In Multiframe4D you can carry out a modal analysis of a structure and calculate up to the first 20 natural frequencies and mode shapes Mode shapes are generated from the lowest natural frequency upwards Modal Analysis Procedures To perform Modal Analysis in Multiframe 4D e Select Modal from the Analyse menu This brings up the following dialog Modal Analysis Modal Modal Analysis Method Subspace Iteration BR Mo of Modes 10 Convergence 1 000e 003 KC Max Iterations EE Mode Shape Scaling Max Displacement Mass Matrix Type Angels Type C Lumped 2 e Distributed e 30 Analysis Page 193 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Method Two methods are provided Subspace iteration is the default and should be used in most cases In cases where the subspace method does not conve
38. Load Makes the Load window visible and brings it to the front Result Makes the Result window visible and brings it to the front Plot Makes the Plot window visible and brings it to the front CalcSheet Makes the CalcSheet window visible and brings it to the front Report Makes the Report window visible and brings it to the front Help Menu Provides access to an on line help system Multiframe Help This command launches the Multiframe help file Automation Help This command launches the Multiframe Automation help file Automation Reference This command launches the Multiframe Automation Reference file Steel Designer Help This command launches the Steel Designer help file Online Support This command starts up your web browser and opens the support page on the Formation Design Systems web site This web page includes online version of the manual release notes knowledge base and more Chapter 3 Multiframe Reference Check For Updates This command opens the web browser and opens the web page on the Formation Design Systems web site where the latest version of Multiframe are listed Users with current subscription can log in to the website and download the latest update Learn Multiframe This command starts the Learning Multiframe introductory training document After clicking on this command in the Help menu Multiframe will check for a Learning Multiframe installation on your computer and if detec
39. Load Case 1 Design Classification E trength S ery Cancel gt Type ina name for the load case or leave the default name if you wish The name you give to the load case must not contain any of the following characters lt gt Enter the load factors for the existing load cases gt Select Design classification This information will be used in future when doing design using Steel Designer gt Click on the OK button Adding a Envelope Load Case To add a new load case gt Choose Add Case from the Case menu gt Select Envelope from the Add Case sub menu Page 155 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 156 gt gt gt gt Envelope Load Case Biel x Mame Envelope Load Case 1 Load Factors emm Envelope SERERRREEEERRRRREEREREREEERREEREEEERREEERRREREEREERREEEERREEREEEEEREREREERREEREEREREREE E RRE ERERRREEERERREEREEEREREE ERR RR ERR ERR N I Envelope Type Ge Linear Cases Non linear Cases canal Type in a name for the load case or leave the default name if you wish Select load cases the load cases to be enveloped Select the results to be enveloped either Linear or Nonlinear Click on the OK button Editing a Load Case To change the name or load factors of a load case gt Choose Edit Case from the Case menu gt Type in anew name for the load case if required gt If the current load case is a factored case then type in the new load factors if desired
40. Multiframe v7 This will export your Multiframe file in a previous file format which can be read into Multiframe for Windows versions prior to version 7 5 and Multiframe for Macintosh version 4 0 and later Time History Results This will export the results of the current Time History load case to a text file Bitmap Image This will export a bitmap image of the active graphical window This option is only available when OpenGL rendering is active NavisWorks Exports an OpenGL rendering of the model in one of the NavisWorks file formats for use in real time walk throughs and inspections of large CAD models The export of a model in one of these formats requires that a licensed version of either NavisWorks Roamer or NavisWorks Publisher to be installed on your computer Edit Menu The Edit menu contains commands for copying and pasting data and working in tables Undo Ctrl Z Undo the last action you carried out The name of this item will change to reflect the command that can be undone Windows users If your frame as less than 500 members you can undo up to 10 steps Redo Ctrl Y Return to the last action you carried out before selecting Undo from the Edit menu Cut Ctrl X Remove the current selection and place it on the clipboard Copy Ctrl C In the Data Result or Graphics window this command copies the current selection to the Clipboard If you hold down the Shift key in the Data or Result window while
41. My 15 Mz 25 Mz 25 Load conventions and coordinate systems z axis come out of page moments are ve anti clockwise Page 325 Appendix D Text File Format Right Magnitude Left Magnitude Joint 2 Le Right Distance Lett Distance Joint 1 Multiframe Text Example File M 12x 10 a M12x1 W12x19 W12x19 M 12x10 W12x19 12x35 M12x1 12x35 AC eg 12x35 Page 326 Appendix D Text File Format 5 000 TextFileFrame Load Case 1 TextFileFrame Load Case 2 TextFileFrame text Fri Apr 24 1992 IMPERIAL JOINTS 10 1 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 2 0 0000 9 0000 0 0000 3 10 0000 abs Bra ee no 0 0000 4 20 0000 9 0000 0 0000 5 20 0000 0 0000 0 0000 6 0 0000 0 0000 25 0000 7 0 0000 9 0000 25 0000 8 10 0000 11 1256 25 0000 9 20 0000 9 0000 25 0000 10 20 0000 0 0000 25 0000 MEMBERS 11 1 1 2 3 16 0 0000 2 2 3 2 4 0 0000 3 3 4 2 4 0 0000 4 5 4 3 16 0 0000 5 6 7 3 16 0 0000 6 7 8 2 4 0 0000 7 8 9 2 4 0 0000 8 10 9 3 16 0 0000 9 7 2 L 253 0 0000 10 8 3 L 253 0 0000 11 9 4 E 259 0 0000 SECTIONS 3 S12x35 3 16 114 8156 10 3007 228 9832 9 8693 1 0799 29000 6935 11150 2663 M12x10 2 4 32 8044 2 9402 EE 03939 0 0300 29000 6935 11150 2663 W12x19 den 233 Page 327 Appendix D Text File Format Page 328 O28 5 200 11150 2663 RESTRAINTS 4 1 1 1 0 0000 0 0000 2 5 1 0 0000 0 0000 3 10 1 0 0000 0 0000 4 6 O 0 0000 0 0000 SPRINGS 2 1 4 1 0 0000 0 0000 2 9 1
42. Natural Frequencies K Buckling H Design le el Ready E Auto test examples GDIplus bug mfd NUM The table of patch internal forces displays the number of each patch its label all joint numbers within the patch and the five plate bending transverse shear forces plus the max amp min bending moments along the principal axes and three membrane direct forces shear force plus max amp min membrane forces along the principal axes Patch Stresses To display the patch stresses Choose Patch Stresses from the Results sub menu under the Display menu Result SEE A z Tresca S Sxx Syy Szz Shear Syz Shear Szx Shear Sxy Von Mises foo SE MPa MPa MPa MPa MPa MPa MPa oe 1 1 6 0 096 0 973 0 000 0 002 0 002 0 319 1 081 1 085 2 1 7 0 850 0 850 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 089 0 864 0 939 3 1 26 0 450 0 450 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 369 0 782 0 820 4 1 2 0 973 0 096 0 000 0 002 0 002 0 319 1 081 1085 5 1 1 0 117 0 117 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 549 0 957 1 097 6 2 g 0 850 0 850 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 089 0 664 0 939 7 2 10 0 096 0 973 0 000 0 002 0 002 0 319 1 081 1 085 8 2 27 0 450 0 450 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 369 0 782 0 820 9 2 5 0 117 0 117 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 549 0 957 1 097 10 2 4 0 973 0 096 0 000 0 002 0 002 0 319 1 081 1 085 11 3 11 0 009 1 368 0 000 0 001 0 001 0 058 1 368 1 371 12 3 12 0 789 1 525 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 065 1 326 1 530 dE 3 28 0 383 1 190 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 071 1 060 1 197 14 3 7 0 780 0 943 0
43. PATA ele E 230 PN Ex e E 230 lke ran EE 230 Ee 232 Impor Construction Et 234 PHE Expo EE 239 GEA MICS a ee ee ee 244 KE RE 245 ENEE 245 Chapter 3M ulttiraine RCCrenCe ai ccsceceeacn ale cies ch ceca ils teed tenel th eetania 247 Ke TEE 247 Eege MO 247 Data ue EEN 247 Eoad WW LING OW EE 247 FR SUE Vy TINO Wyse ot a eat Oe oun as en acetate 247 OU ee EE 247 CalcSheet WING OW EE 247 REPO VV te EE 247 Keele e 248 Ee he ee 248 Generate Keel e EE 248 Drawing Toolbar EE 248 Geometry TOO ID Ai steaks epee sited atc n E OS 249 Member POO Dar EE 249 POMC Keele 250 View E leie EE 250 AcHons LOO DAN EE 250 ENT ASE Kee EE 251 Eer Re EE 251 Formaatin TOON EE 252 Symbols Leet ee eee Ee 252 Windonws Kee Al iscsi en acd een eta ee a 253 NASW SID OO MOAN EE 253 Render Ke ele 253 Gio 1 Eed 253 Chippine Pool baienn a n a a 254 Load Panel Keel EE 254 Load Panel Symbols E reese ee ee 254 Ke e EE 255 Patch Symbols ee ee ee 255 IVI EE 259 Patch Stiesses HERE 237 Pie E EE 257 apor SDM E 259 EELER 259 G e E EE 261 SEC ULONS SUD MNS IU EEN 265 Maternal SUDEN EE 265 Mew Memi EE 265 SZE PO Fil SUM EE 267 CHP pee SuUDMEN e 268 EE 269 EREECHEN 269 Keele we let EE 270 NS LE CEI CLM EEN 212 Geome ny En EE 273 Sour nn EE 278 Fame E EE 278 e e 210 EE 281 Display EE 283 TE AGA SOIC EEN 286 FRE SUIS SUDEN EE 288 ACHOS 35 WIM OU ascitic costes eatodedcaecieca les eneccuesedens eat igsensdenasolounee oasiadsaseabdaes 289 stesse E
44. Page 228 Calculations are evaluated by choosing the Calculate command from the Analyse menu The results of the calculations are displayed in the Value column The value shown is the value of the expression evaluated at each line You can the change the equations in the CalcSheet at any time and then re evaluate the expressions using the Calculate command Pre defined CalcSheet Variables Multiframe provides you with a number of pre defined variables for use within the CalcSheet These variables relate to a single member in the structure at a time You specify which member in the structure to use by clicking on that member in the Plot window and displaying its member diagram Multiframe will automatically extract the appropriate data from that member and store it in the variables in the CalcSheet The pre defined variables include the length slope moments forces displacements and section properties Remember that these variables are only available if there 1s a member diagram on display in the Plot window A complete list of the variables is Name Description dx x displacement of joint 1 dyl y displacement of joint 1 d z displacement of joint 1 Ox1 rotation of joint 1 about the x axis Oy1 rotation of joint 1 about the y axis GEI rotation of joint 1 about the z axis dx2 x displacement of joint 2 dy2 y displacement of joint 2 dz2 z displacement of joint 2 dx x deflection at the crosshair dy y deflection at the crosshair
45. Pomni oO aC poses ais tiene aot ici aia ese linia nacelle ates 146 Globa MOMED EE 147 eege ya etter ener nee Tr 148 Thermal Odd cb a wie sace nti ea cateancates iota saeco caer eet setae 149 Editing Loads tte 150 SGI Mee ee Ee Eeer 151 LOE EE 154 eege 158 Sed Motion Eet 163 Wind Load E 166 Waiter Current Load EE 172 Buoyancy ele RE 176 Fly drostatic Load E 178 Evaluatie E EE 181 E 183 Linear FA EE 184 Nonlinear EE 184 e E 187 PATTI TV EE 189 vii vill EE 190 IVI OCA IATA Si esna 192 Prive Ee A Maly E 193 Bac AAV GUS aeea EE 194 MWACW IS EE 195 Re EAN ON Sree ene et a nS ee CUNT Neon ETON RSTO RR AC 195 Jont KT 196 WOT RR ACEO EE 196 eege 197 Maxim E e 198 Member Sies Sennen T 198 EE Eeer 199 Member De tails EE 199 SE 201 End Spino A CHON Senna 201 Pateh tee 201 Pite E 201 regard Ee Eege 203 Natura ee 203 Member E 203 Time History Re ee 203 Viewing Time History Envelope Case 205 See TEN LO E 206 SLUG HIS TIA OT ANNS eege eege 207 E 214 Membr DAT E 215 Plate EE 215 Rendering Patch Resul Sezai cowea Tonal nhadeeoes net eitecmegsiaseaaee 218 Add Pateh ee EE 219 Deletne a Cross SCCHON EE 220 Envelope Case PIOUS ege e Ee 222 VOUT Le E 223 JOmt Displacements E 224 Buckin Ee 224 Modal Resul E 224 EE E E 225 Cale OAL Oil Ee EE 225 Pre defined CaleSheet Ee ebe 226 Section Properties EE 22 Save CALCUL AMONG cnt tae ies Ahi aetna sas 228 EEN 228 Pae S CU EE 228 SEITEN Ce gr 228 Stee E 228 Pettitte EE 229
46. Presentation Reporting View Licensing Moment Symbals Draw Moments Ce Draw arcs Ce On tension face C Draw vectors On compression face Diagrams Draw Axial Draw filled C Draw lines Tension ve Compression ve Ce Tension ve Compression ve Member Details 3D Graphics Calculate at E locations Use Perspective M Node and Member tips Lancel gt Type in the number of points you want to display detailed information gt Click the OK button The number of locations must be between 2 and 64 Page 201 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 202 You can also change the location of any intermediate point by clicking in the first or second column in the table and typing in a new distance or a proportional distance respectively The first column in the table displays the distance of the point from joint 1 of the member as a proportion of the length of the member For example a value of 0 333 indicates the point is approximately one third of the distance along the member The second column in the table shows the actual distance of the point from joint 1 To change the position of a point as a proportion of the member s length gt Click on the number in the first column of the point s row gt Type in a new proportion of the distance gt Press the Enter key The row s values will be re calculated and re displayed to show the values at the new location To change the distance of a point fr
47. Raphson solution scheme The user may control the solution process by adjusting the number of load increments the maximum and minimum number of iterations the convergence tolerance and the type of convergence norm Shear deflections Shear deflections are not considered in a nonlinear analysis Page 307 Chapter 4 Multiframe Analysis Plate Analysis Multiframe now includes functions to perform flat shell finite element analysis also called plate analysis in Multiframe The plate elements included in the release are 3 noded 6 degree of freedom per node elements They are designed to handle both thin and thick plate structures The formulation is compatible with the 6 degree of freedom formulation of the beam elements in Multiframe As such plate analysis can be used in both pure plate structures or in combined plate beam structures Patches and Plates Plate elements are managed in Multiframe by way of patches A patch is a planar collection of connected plate elements Typically you will use a patch to model a slab shear wall or plate field of some kind You can change the mesh density inside a patch to increase of decrease the number of plates within the patch Material properties and loads are usually managed by modifying those properties of the patch If you change the mesh within a patch the plates in the patch will continue to inherit their properties and loads from the patch However it is also possible to override the prope
48. See Current View Submenu Drawing Depth Set the depth that drawing will occur in the two dimensional views not available in 2D Size Set the maximum and minimum coordinates available in the Frame window Use this to set up the overall coordinates before you begin creating a structure Grid Sets the properties of the geometric grid that is projected onto the current drawing plane in the Frame Window to constrain drawing and dragging Structural Grids Opens the Structural Grid Manager dialog that controls the definition display and interaction of 3 dimensional grids in the Frame Window Axes Turn on or off the display of axes in the front window Font Set the font size and style for the text in the front window Chapter 3 Multiframe Reference Units Multiframe allows you to work in a range of units Related sets of units are conveniently grouped together under a country name You can switch from one country setting to another and or change the units used for any particular item To change the units used for display gt Choose Units from the View menu DCS E Unit Set E DJ Tors Spring kNemirad e EE Fixed Decimal 16 Thermal Coert Tors Spring io Cu gt Click on the name of the set of units you wish to use or change gt Use the pop up menus beside each type of unit to set its units type gt Specify the numeric format to be used for each unit type by specifying the nu
49. Sq Tube Rect Tube H55 Round HS5 Square H55 Rectangular K Cancel gt Click on the group and section to be deleted gt Click on the Delete button Editing a Section To change the section properties of a custom section gt Choose Edit Section from the Sections menu under the Edit menu A dialog box will appear with a list of groups and sections gt Click on the group and section to be edited gt Click on the Edit button A dialog box will appear with the data for the section shown in a table Page 119 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 120 Edit Section x Name 610016125 Properties Group UE qa J i ASP AAA Amm gt Enter the information you wish to change using the Tab key to move from field to field gt Click on the OK button You can also use this procedure to look at the actual values stored in the library for any section without changing them Simply click the Cancel button after viewing the properties of interest to you If the OK button is drawn in grey this indicates that the group this section is stored in is locked and the section properties cannot be changed Section Type You can review the sections used in a structure by displaying the Sections Table in the Data window Choose Sections from the Data sub menu under the Display menu to display this table The table of sections displays details all of the sections used in the frame It contains information about the secti
50. Steps Cat E Save to Guick time movie This will show you an animation including all the time steps When an increment in a Dynamic or Seismic load case is active you are able to view all results exactly as for a Static load case In addition if you select a joint in the Plot window you get a graph of the behaviour of the x y z degrees of freedom over the entire analysis fe 0 000 mm Time DUDU seconds 0 000 mum UO Dract 3 UO Dract A O25 2 rack 3 Viewing Time History Envelope Cases Envelope cases are created for the Time History analysis if Calculate Envelope Cases check box is selected in the Dynamic or Seismic case edit dialogs The range of cases to envelope can also be input Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Dynamic Load Case JOf ES Name Step Case 2 Analysts Time Mo of steps 20 Start Time 0 0 seconds Increment 0100 seconds End Time 2 000 seconds i Calculate Envelope Cases First Step Last Step T GE GE RS De Rayleigh D amping Alpha 0 000 os Beta 0 000 Cancel The envelope cases store the absolute maximum displacement values in all cases along with the maximum minimum and absolute values for the end forces You can use the envelope cases to view the range of values encompassed by a dynamic or seismic analysis When viewing the results in the Results data window the title bar will identify the current joint degree of freedom and the step increment that the value is associated with
51. Table E1 Defaults to 1 0 e K Inclination factor As defined by AS1170 Appendix E2 1 Defaults to 1 0 e Cr Drag force coefficients As defined by AS11170 Appendix E3 Defaults to 1 5 Plate Load Panel Factors AS1170 Wind pressure loads on plates and load panels can be calculated based on Australian Standard AS1170 2 2002 To use this method select the AS1170 radio button and the following options will be made available External Pressure External pressure loads are applied with the following settings Tick the check boxes to define which plate and load panel factors are automatically calculated If the boxes are not ticked the default value is applied The plate laod panel factors are K Area reduction factor As defined by AS1170 Table 5 4 Defaults to 1 0 C External pressure coefficient As defined by AS1170 Chapter 5 4 Defaults to 0 8 h Average roof height Define the average roof height of the structure at which the wind velocity for all patches load panels will be taken Cp values 1 2 column choose between the External Pressure coefficients defined in Column 1 or 2 in Tables 5 3 A 5 3 B and Table D8 Please note currently Multiframe only supports stepped loads on patches but not load panels Therefore when calculating the External Pressure Coefficients for Side Walls and Roofs with a slope less than 10 degrees on load panels a weighted average pressure coefficient is calculated for the w
52. To sort the load cases gt Choose Reorder Cases from the Case menu A dialog box will appear with the current load cases in a list Page 157 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 158 Reorder Load Cases Cancel Selt Ponding E SWS Click and drag on a load case name to drag it to a different location in the list Load cases which are used in a factored load case must appear before the factored case in the list Dynamic Loads Multiframe allows you to apply dynamic loads to the structure which are used to perform a time history analysis Load Library Multiframe4D includes a Load Library which contains commonly used dynamic loads These loads may be spectra from earthquake measurements several common earthquakes are provided acceleration spectra from measured vibrations and may also be dynamically varying forces which can be applied at joints in the structure When Multiframe4D starts up it will look for a file called Load Library or Load Library llb in the same way that Multiframe looks for Sections Library first looking in the same directory as Multiframe4D then looking on the current volume Then if the Load Library is not found Multiframe4D will prompt you for the location of the current load library The Load Library shipping with Multiframe4D contains 9 earthquake spectra taken from 3 well known earthquakes This includes accelerations in 3 orthogonal directions for each earthquake The earthquakes
53. Truss n Sections x Triangular Truss Howe Triangular Truss Fink kl Triangular Truss Mono slope Li s Ln Cancel gt Click on the continuous beam icon and click OK A dialog box will appear with a table in it Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Generate Continuous Beam gt Type the number of spans in the beam gt Click on the first length value in the table to select it gt Enter the lengths for each of the spans using the Down Arrow key to move down the table gt Select the restraints to be applied to internal joints along the continuous beam gt Select the restraints to be applied to the joints at the ends of continuous beam gt Click the OK button a Frame View x 14 011 y 0 921 z 0 000 dx 16 011 dy 20 079 dz 0 000 L 25 681 EI Multiframe will automatically generate the beam with the dimensions you have specified Generating a Curved Member Multiframe allows you to quickly generate an approximation to a curved member by generating a number of short straight members To generate a curved member gt Choose Generate from the Geometry menu A dialog box will appear with the various generation icons in it Page 85 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Biel Es Generate Generate ES CH FA Lea Cancel gt Click on the curved beam icon and click OK A dialog box will appear allowing you to enter the angles and radius of the beam Generate Arc E
54. and as such the results of the lifting analysis are stored as the results of a linear analysis If your sling members are set to Tension Only then a dialog will appear allowing you to take those effects into account during analysis You are no longer required to use a NonLinear analysis for Tension Only effects Some care must be taken in performing a lifting analysis as the additional spring restraints added for the analysis will also help to suppress structural mechanisms After analysis is complete you will notice that all nodes in the model will have reactions You should see normal reactions at any nodes where you have applied a restraint and at other nodes where automatic springs have been applied you should see reactions with a small value These small reactions are a consequence of the automatically applied springs If you see unacceptably large reactions at any of these nodes then you should use manual spring restraints and carry out a normal linear analysis Buckling Analysis Chapter 3 Multiframe Reference Modal Modal Analysis Time History Time History Analysis Batch Analysis Batch Analysis Calculate Alt Calculate the value of the expressions in the CalcSheet Time Menu Multiframe 4D The items in the Time menu control which increment is selected in a time history analysis Maximum Envelope Displays a Maximum Envelope of all increments in the current time history analysis case Minimum Envelope Displ
55. appear with the a list of structures that can be generated Standard Structures Multi bay Building Frame Trestle Pratt Truss Howe Truss Waren Truss Triangular Truss Howe Triangular Truss Fink Triangular Truss Mono slope Cancel gt Select 2D portal item from the list and click OK A dialog box will appear allowing you to enter the dimensions of the frame Generate 7D Portal E x Dimensions width ha Column Height H1 5 000 m Apes Height ia E000 m Rafter Slope piao deg Number of Bays i Page 81 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe gt Enter the values for the width column height and the slope of the rafters gt Enter the values number of portal bays gt Select the type of restraint to be applied to the joints at the base of the columns gt Click the OK button The pitched portal frame you generate will be shown in the Frame window Frame 0 Generating a Multi story Frame gt Choose Generate from the Geometry menu A dialog box will appear with the various generation icons in it Standard Structures Ei Howe Fink Triangular Truss Mono slope Triangular Truss Fan Triangular Truss Scissor Cancel gt Click on the multi bay frame icon and click OK A dialog box will appear with fields for the spacing in each direction Bays run in the x direction stories in the y direction and frames in the z direction Page 82 Chapter
56. are El Centro Kobe Osaka and Izmir Turkey Editing the Load Library All dynamic loads are stored in the Load Library as either a force series or acceleration series You can add edit or delete loads m the Load Library gt Choose Edit Load Library from the Edit menu The Load Library dialog will appear which displays the load and acceleration series currently stored in the library Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Load Library Bm ES Edit Load Library LoadLibrary lib Step Series KOBE North South Time History Series Initial Values ee eae SS ae seconds inis KOBE N ZE outh Vel o 0000 G a ooo O02 Disp 0 0000 in SI om 0m2 3 e PR oww oma El Centro SOE 5 ooo omz Ei Cento S30E J E ar Import Series i DE KOBE North South 0 012 wem omz Add Delete 0 012 0 012 o2200 0m2 a oam omz a wem omz Gl ozo om2 ae osoo ooo a oam oom aaf osoo oom aaf osso om2 20 osso 0m2 Acceleration ints I D z nam omz GJ nom ooo 0 4400 0 012 Time seconda KOBE North South 0 012 mies Time 0 000 seconds Cancel The list at the top left of the dialog lists all of the series stored in the Load Library The name of the currently selected series is displayed below the list and may be edited there Each series has a number of attributes including start velocity and displacement number of points and type of series either force or acceleratio
57. assumed to be zero The three in plane stresses are assumed to be constant through the element thickness The two transverse shear stresses are assumed to be constant through the thickness The actual shear stress distribution is parabolic being zero at the top and bottom surfaces and taking a maximum or minimum value at the mid surface of the element The plate element internal forces also called stress resultants are the forces and moments that result from integrating the stresses over the element thickness These internal forces are e Plate bending moments Mxx and Myy e Plate twisting moment Mxy e Transverse shear forces Vxz and Vyz These stress resultants are forces and moments per unit of in plane length They are present at every point on the mid surface of the element The sign conventions for the stresses and internal forces are illustrated in Figure below Stresses acting on a positive face are oriented in the positive direction of the element local coordinate axes Stresses acting on a negative face are oriented in the negative direction of the element local coordinate axes A positive face is one whose outward normal is in the positive local x or y direction Positive internal forces correspond to a state of positive stress that is constant through the thickness Positive internal moments correspond to a state of stress that varies linearly through the thickness and is positive at the plate bottom Mmin g
58. axis ly Moment of inertia of the section about its weak axis J St Venant torsion constant E Elastic or Young s Modulus G Shear Modulus 2 Check for mechanisms If you use member releases or pinned members or pinned joints in your structure there is a possibility that you can create a failure mechanism that allows the structure to deflect using a rigid body mode of deformation The simplest example is a portal frame with pinned restraint at the base of the columns under a lateral load If all the members are rigid no member release analysis can proceed with no problems and the frame deforms by flexure of the columns Page 313 Appendix A Troubleshooting Page 314 However if we put member releases at the top of the columns the frame is free to deflect by a mechanism allowing infinite lateral movement by rotation at the released ends of the columns In this case Multiframe will report the error LIZ The solution is either to restrain the tops of the columns laterally or to use rigid members for the columns More subtle rigid body modes of deformation can develop if you release torsion Tx as well as bending moments My and Mz when you specify the member releases This means that it is possible to develop a torsional rigid mode of deformation in a structure The simplest case of this is a member with torsional releases at both ends and a moment applied in the middle In this case there is no torsional restraint on
59. bay portal frame is Shown below Chapter 2 Using Multiframe The portal frame is generated and the sub structure to be duplicated is selected Duplicate 5 spacing 30 0 ft H spacing ft on z spacing on ft Lancel Humber of Times E Linea Cylindrical Spherical I Connect to Existing Frame el TTT The resulting multibay portal structure Cylindrical Coordinates If you wish to generate a structure in cylindrical coordinates you can select the cylindrical option This then allows you to space the duplication radially from the y axis angularly about the y axis or linearly along the y axis As an example to generate a circular staircase you would first draw half of one step and then duplicate it to form the other half Page 89 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Duplicate OFX I spacing on d Se v spacing on P o Alu spacing iso deg Cancel Number of Times fi Linear Ce Cylindrical Spherical I Connect to Existing This would form one step of the staircase Frame el Duplicate Jo I spacing op ft 0 y spacing li bh ft Ay spacing 15 0 deg Cancel Number of Times fi 5 Linear Ce Cylindrical Spherical lM Connect to Existing Then you would select the whole step and duplicate it to form the entire staircase Page 90 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Spherical Coordinates If you wish to generate a structure in spherical coordinates you can select
60. be edited via the Patch Wind Factors dialog To edit the patch wind factors gt Select one or more patches gt Choose Patch Wind Factors from the Case menu The following dialog will be displayed Patch Wind Factors Current Load Case External Pressure coeffiecient Cp e Calculated User defined Wall Roof Type Windward Wall W Gable roof E Leeward Wall L GE Side Wall 5 Hip Roof H Upwind Slope DU Awning A Downwind Slope D Hoarding Di All Load Cases Area Reduction Factor Ka 0 863 User Coefficient 1 000 Friction Drag Coefficient Cf 0 010 Apply to all wind load cases The wall roof type for the selected patch is indicated by the radio buttons and diagram If Multiframe has incorrectly identified a wall it is possible to overwrite the selection by clicking one of the other wall types If the External Pressure coefficient selection is set to Calculated the value of C will be automatically updated Please note Multiframe is unable to automatically identify Awnings or Hoardings These must be manually identified using this dialog Load Panel Wind Factors The load panel wind factors can be edited via the load panel wind factors dialog To edit the load panel wind factors gt Select one or more load panels gt Choose Load Panel Wind Factors from the Case menu A similar dialog to the Patch Wind Factors will be displayed Display Load Panel Patch Wind Pressur
61. calculations see the matrix on the next page These comprise three displacements along the axes and three rotations about the axes at each joint The local element stiffness matrix K used by Multiframe 1s as follows AE 0 0 0 0 0 AF 0 0 0 0 0 L L QO 12EIz 0 0 0 6EIz 0 0 0 0 6EIz Ee L2 12EIz 2 L3 0 0 12EIly 0 6EIy 0 0 0 St 0 be 0 L L2 12ELy 6ELy L gt L2 0 0 0 GJ 0 0 0 0 0 GJ 0 0 L D 0 0 6EIy 0 4EIy 0 0 0 6ELy 0 2ELy 0 L2 L L2 L 0 6EIz 0 0 0 AFIz 0 6EIz 0 0 0O 2EIz L2 jit L2 L AE 0 0 0 0 0 AE 0 0 0 0 0 L L Page 302 O O O LZ Be Ze L O O 6EIy 12EIy L2 L3 O O J 0 L O 6EIy O Zb L L ORIZ O O O LZ Area E Young s Modulus Moment of Inertia 6EIz O G Shear Modulus Chapter 4 Multiframe Analysis 0 I2EIZ 0 O s O O ZBL O IT 0 0 0 GJ L 0 0 G6EIy 0 Lz O ss bb O 0 LZ 0 Ste T CELY O PZ O O 4EIy O L O AR LZ L L Length J Torsion Constant Where each element behaves according to the equation F Kx Where F is the vector of applied loads K is the stiffness matrix above and x is a vector of calculated displacements F Px1 Pyl Pal Mx1 My1 Mal Px2 Py2 Pz2 Mx2 My2 Mai x dxl dyl dzl Ost y1 Oz1 dx2 dy2 dz2 Ox2 y2 Oz2 All relative to the local member coordinate system Note that the Iz and Iy above refer to the moment of inertia with respect to the local coordinate system Since comm
62. can be exchanged via this file format SDNF Text This command will import a file written using the Steel Detailing Neutral File format SDNF Export Submenu Data can be exported from Multiframe in file formats compatible with other programs Page 261 Chapter 3 Multiframe Reference Page 262 2D DXF This is to allow compatibility with older CAD programs which only accept 2D DXF The members in the frame are saved as LINE entities Otherwise all data is the same as 1s described in the next section 3D DXF If you do not have rendering turned on in the front window when you save in 3D DXF format the lines representing the frame will be saved as 3DLINE entities If rendering is turned on 3DFACE entities will be saved in the file This is useful for input to rendering or 3D presentation or modelling programs When exporting only active members e not clipped or masked are included in the exported data In addition node and member labels will be written to the DXF file if they are visible within Multiframe When the Member Legend is visible the DXF export will utilise a separate layer for each item in the legend Members associated with each legend item will exported within to corresponding layer VRML The VRML export option is only available when the frame is rendered in the active window VRML is a format used to view 3D models in an Internet web browser You can also embed these models in web pages to provide onlin
63. case the combined case will be automatically updated Note that a factored load case can be a factored combination of a factored load case but cannot include a factored combination of a load case higher in the load case list For example load case 3 can include combinations of load cases 1 and 2 but could not include load case 4 Adding a Static Load Case To add a new load case gt Choose Add Case from the Case menu gt Select Static from the Add Case sub menu Static Load Case x Static Load Case Name Loading Type Live Imposed z Design Classification E trangth S ery ud Cancel Duplicate current load case gt Type ina name for the load case The name you give to the load case must not contain any of the following characters lt Page 154 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe gt Select a Loading Type and the Design classification This information will be used in future when doing design using Steel Designer gt Click on the OK button If you turn on the Duplicate current load case check box the new load case will initially contain the loads in the current load case This is useful if you have two load cases that are very similar and one can be made from a small variation on the other Adding a Factored Load Case To add a new load case gt Choose Add Case from the Case menu gt Select Static Combined from the Add Case sub menu 2101 x Name Load Case 5 Load Factors ae ae
64. choosing the Copy command from the Edit menu the column titles will be included in the text placed on the clipboard If you hold down the Shift key in a graphics window while choosing the Copy command from the Edit menu you will be presented with a dialog offering options to copy to a Pict DXF Renderman or Postscript File to a specified scale Page 263 Chapter 3 Multiframe Reference Page 264 Paste Ctrl V Paste the contents of the clipboard into the current selection Clear Remove the current selection without placing it on the clipboard Sections See Sections Submenu Materials See Materials Submenu Edit Load Library Multiframe 4D only Allows you to view edit and add data in the load library Preferences The Preferences command controls a number of optional settings within Multiframe Preferences EE resentation Reporting view Licensing Numerics Save Moment Symbols Draw Moments On tension Face E Draw wectors O On compression Face Diagrams Draw Axial Draw Filled Tension ve Compression ve O Draw lines Gei Tension we Compression e Plate internal Forces stresses Gei On bottom Face On top face Member Details 3D Graphics Calculate at EN locations Use Perspective Node and Member tips Presentation The Presentation tab allows you to set how moment diagrams are drawn and what type of moment symbols to use You can also set the sign conve
65. click and then so on position the next joint to do the next mouse click and then position the last joint to do the last mouse click Generate Patches To automatically add Patches between all of the members in a planar region eg a floor or frame in the Frame window select the members which define the planar region and then choose auto generate patches command from the Geometry menu Chapter 3 Multiframe Reference Rotate Patch Axes Allow you to rotate the patch axes anti clockwise Flip Patch z axis Allow you to flip patch z axis Convert Load Panels to Patches To automatically convert load panels to patches in the Frame window select load panels and then choose auto convert patches command from the Geometry menu Deleted Patch Delete the selected patches in the Frame window from the structure Deleted Plate Delete the selected plates in the Frame window from the structure Duplicate Ctrl D Duplicates all the selected members in the frame a given number of times in a specified direction A dialog allows you to enter the spacing in each direction and whether the duplicated members should be connected to the existing frame Rotate Rotates all the selected joints in the frame a specified number of degrees about a specified axis A dialog allows you to enter the number of degrees and the centre of rotation Rescale Multiplies the coordinates of all the selected joints in the frame by a specified scaling
66. dialog will appear Time History Analysis Time History Mass Matrix Type Analysis Type Lumped f 2D Analysis Distributed Ce 3D Analysis The options for Mass Matrix Type and Analysis Type are the same as for Modal Analysis see page 192 Batch Analysis Batch Analysis Concepts As described in the Analysis section on page 183 Multiframe has a range of different analysis types Batch Analysis allows you to run different analysis types and adjust the analysis settings in one dialog e Specify which analyses you wish to run e Set the analysis settings for each analysis type Batch Analysis is not available for Multiframe 2D Batch Analysis Procedures To perform a Batch Analysis e Select Batch Analysis from the Analyse menu This brings up the following dialog Page 195 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 196 Batch Analysis Analyse Linear Nonlinear Buckling Modal Time History Select which Analyses you wish to perform 2 1 Linear 1st order elastic Nonlinear 2nd Order Elastic Modal w Time History cancel The dialog is designed to work in a 3 step process 1 Specify which analyses you wish to run 2 Set the analysis settings for each analysis type 3 Press OK Buckling is only enabled when either e Linear or Nonlinear Analysis have been selected e d have previously been run Viewing Results Multiframe carries out a stiffness matrix analysis to determine the for
67. dragging the existing selection will be extended with the additional unselected items A second technique for performing a drag selection is to use a line selection When the line selection tool is chosen the user drags the end of a straight line across the screen All plates that intersect this line and all joints connected to these plates are selected Selecting Patch Openings There are several techniques and commands that are used to select openings within a graphical window The most common way of selecting items is by using the mouse To select a single item gt Click on the item The selected opening is drawn in a darker colour A different colour for depicting the selection can be set via the Colour command in the View menu To extend or reduce the selection Chapter 2 Using Multiframe gt Shift click on an unselected opening to add it to the current selection gt Shift click on a selected opening to remove it from the current selection gt Shift drag to invert the selection in the selection rectangle To select a group of items gt Drag from left to right a rectangle which encloses the openings to be selected gt Drag from right to left to select all openings which intersect or are contained inside the selection rectangle If the rectangle is defined by dragging the cursor from the left to the right a bounding selection will be performed Only the items within the rectangle will be selected If the rectangle is de
68. dynamic loads This has a twofold benefit Firstly it allows you to simulate rigid structural elements such as a floor slab and secondly it significantly reduces the size of the stiffness matrix resulting in lower memory requirements and faster analysis times Joints can be linked together on a degree of freedom basis This means some degrees of freedom can be linked together and others left independent In the case of a rigid floor slab for example all the joints on that level could have their x z and y deflections linked together to simulate the rigid translation and rotation of the slab while still allowing bending of the floor When linking a rotational degree of freedom Multiframe automatically selects the corresponding displacement degrees of freedom that must also be imposed to enforce rigid body motion in the plane of the rotation To rigidly link a group of joints gt Select the joints to be linked in the Frame window gt Choose Joints Linking from the Frame menu Linked Joints Jomt Linking Delete Joint Links Linked Degrees of Freedom y Huy Wu fez oof of Cancel gt Select a master joint In most cases the default master joint selected by Multiframe will be adequate It is only when linked group intersect that the Master Joint would have to be changed to a joint contained in both linked groups of joints gt Type ina name for the group and select the degrees of freedom to be linked Th
69. each member and the Joint table to find out the coordinates of these joints Start by pasting these two tables into different areas of your spreadsheet and defining arrays that refer to these two tables Appendix E Using Spreadsheets With Multiframe LAP OSES Pee ee Member Joint Joint woo On h H a e JOO in OA Oh H H h Com J oo PO P FA ON Next add a column to the Member array and put a formula in it to look up the y coordinates of the joints and use them to find out the height of the mid point of the member Then add another column and put a formula in it to calculate the load magnitude from the member midpoints calculated values are shown in the illustrations below in italics VLOOKUP RC 2 JointData 3 VLOOKUP RC 1 JointData 3 2 n Formula to look up LoadCalcs joint coordinates from the JointData Height array and calculate Max Load the member Ge mid point so OD J OO P tH Ph ca 0 On CA Oh CH Oo P ca This last column of the Member Data array now contains the required load magnitude for each member in the structure The next step is to apply the distributed load to all of the appropriate members in Multiframe and then copy and paste the Member Load table from the Data window in Multiframe into a new array in your spreadsheet fees You can now put a formula for the load magnitude into the last two columns of the load array by looking up the required load magnitude that you have calculated for e
70. existing i Duplicate selection gt Choose the radio button of the plane about which mirroring will occur gt Enter the location of the plane along that axis gt Click the OK button If you leave the Connect to existing check box checked Multiframe will automatically create a connection between the selected joints and the mirrored members If you leave the Duplicate Selection check box checked Multiframe will duplicate the selected members otherwise the existing members will be moved Shearing Members When you wish to create a structure which has a sheared shape such as a bridge deck you can use the Shear command to transform and rectangular structure into a sheared shape To shear a group of members in a frame gt Select the members to be sheared gt Choose Shear from the Geometry menu A dialog box will appear with fields for the origin from which the shear angle will be measured the direction to shear and the angle of the shear SS t i Xt Shear relative to f Cancel y og D z op ft Shear Angle op deg Shear Direction e T Cu C 3 gt Click OK to shear the members Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Editing Coordinates Numerically Multiframe allows you to change the positions of joints in the structure numerically rather than graphically You will find this option useful for fine tuning the coordinates of your structure after drawing it Each joint in the structure is identified
71. existing patch operation commands to create 3D and or curved patches For example To create a 3D amp curved patch gt Create a planar patch with member on their sides D I wi gt gt Select side members and choose Convert member to Arc command Page 45 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe 2 500 Users can also use Add Patch command to click on the a list of patch corner nodes to create a 3D patch gt Create a list of patch corner nodes Page 46 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe gt Sketch node to node of the above patch corners D I Multiframe Advanced SJ File Edit View Select Geometry Group Frame Load Display Case Analyse Time Design Window Help Debug D su reels hee tt Al FA BB r O 2 7 A CB T R Co E ot e D El sst ee S VO AD oll FHL 0 AB om Aml l Jill Z AIDS a jneadjdddda xteada anata no lays RN gt Mesh the patch and get Page 47 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Multiframe Advanced Frame eem File Edit View Select Geometry Group Frame Load Display Case Analyse Time Design Window Help Debug PEETELI AENA ECE leg es fy D ey E E b e DEI Gorse a ltsaAtelm Inn RAB wD al oan A Il l t 7 VS t a jn noadlddddalytecad Edit Patch Openings To change the properties of a patch opening gt Double click on the patch opening in the Frame window Patch Opening 1 Properties You can enter a labe
72. factor This has the effect of rescaling the structure by the specified amount Extrude Creates new members from all the selected joints in the frame in a specified direction Usually used to generate columns from a drawn floor plan or to generate beams out from an existing column line Move Ctrl M Allows you to either move the selected joints in the frame a specified distance or to move the origin to a new location Mirror Allows you to mirror the selected members in the Frame window about a specified axis Shear Allows you to shear the selected members in the Frame window in a specified direction and to a specified angle Generate Allows you to automatically generate a continuous beam portal frame bay and story frame or curved beam Page 277 Chapter 3 Multiframe Reference Page 278 Renumber Allows you to automatically renumber the joints and or members in the structure This is convenient for sorting joint and member numbers by direction after you have been making modifications to the frame s geometry Advanced The Advanced menu contains the following infrequently used commands e Add Joint Adds a node at a specified location e Merge Close Joints Scans through the selected nodes in the Frame window and joins together any members which end at coincident nodes e Align Joints Aligns the nodes selected nodes in the Frame window to a specified position e Intersect Members Subdivides and connects a
73. fete D lt L CT e EE a ger ele Ge E BEzSssssb GJ TC lt T TEE gt Choose Auto generate Patches from the Geometry menu El raat et p SS mama ae TA S ll eT te Page 40 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe To automatically convert load panels to Patches gt Select a group of load panels to be converted in the Frame window gt Choose Convert Load Panel to Patch from the Geometry menu Editing a Patch To change the properties of a patch gt Double click on the patch in the Frame window Page 41 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 42 Patch 1 Properties Patch Properties Label Bending Thickness Membrane Thickness Mass Per Area Material Group Material No Material No Material Mesh type and spacing Non uniform Uniform Side Number 1 2 2 E O User Defined Mesh Type To edit patch mesh densities enter a label and thickness for the patch and also edit the material and user colour of the patch are as shown in the diagram below The numbers of the nodes and sides of the patch 4 Side 3 3 Side 4 Side 2 l Side 1 2 To edit the patch node sequence by using the Rotate Patch Axes icon in the Patch toolbar Rotate patch axes This will rotate the patch nodes so that they all move one place anti clockwise This is most useful when used several times to change the local axes and dir
74. for presentations and for checking very large models The model exported not only contains the correct geometry and colours from the Multiframe model it also contains member attributes such as section name length etc More information on NavisWorks can be found at www navisworks com The export of a model in the format requires that a licensed version of either NavisWorks Roamer or NavisWorks Publisher to be installed on your computer To export a NavisWorks model gt Choose Navisworks from the Export sub menu gt In the Save As dialog choose to export either a nwc file or a nwd file gt Click OK A NWC file requires only a NavisWorks Roamer licence and the resulting nwc files can be read by NavisWorks Roamer on any machine An NWD file export requires that you have a NavisWorks Publisher licence installed on your computer but the resulting nwd file can be read by anyone who has the free NavisWorks Freedom viewer This is a very good way to distribute a viewable model to any other person Struclink It is possible to export Multiframe models to the Struclink format that is compatible with STAAD and Prosteel To export to Struclink gt Choose Struclink from the Export sub menu After selecting a file name a dialog will appear to choose if the export is to Prosteel or to STAAD After clicking OK the export will start ISM Multiframe can export a frame in Bentley ISM format This can be used to import the frame in to other
75. graphical window The most common way of selecting items is by using the mouse To select a single item gt Click on the item The selected panel is draw with dark pink colour to make it appear highlighted but a different colour for drawing the selection can be set via the Colour command in the View menu Chapter 2 Using Multiframe To extend or reduce the selection gt Shift click on an unselected panel to add it to the current selection gt Shift click on a selected panel to remove it from the current selection gt Shift drag to invert the selection in the selection rectangle To select a group of items gt Drag from left to right a rectangle which encloses the panels to be selected gt Drag from right to left to select all load panels which intersect or are contained inside the selection rectangle If the rectangle is defined by dragging the cursor from the left to the right a bounding selection will be performed and only the items within the rectangle will be selected If shift is held down while dragging the existing selection will be extended with the additional unselected items that are contained within or intersect the rectangle When performing a drag selection there are two techniques for items The first is by using a rectangular box as described above An alternative to this is to use a line selection in which the user drags the end of a straight line across the screen In this case all members that intersect this line
76. groups of patches in a floor or frame The commands to add these are available from the Geometry menu or from the patch toolbar They are similar to the corresponding commands for adding load panels To add a rectangular patch gt Choose Add rectangle Patch from the Geometry menu gt Click on two points nodes at diagonally opposite corners of the patch Multiframe4D Frame a Fie Edt View Select Geometry Group Frame Losd Display Case Analyse Time Design Window Help Og Dlapie CJ a 8 AR Ty BT TR GE ae D i Group ser v gjajda geleed AAAAAA ca BB een Am Ai Page 39 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe To add a quadrilateral patch gt Choose Add N node Patch from the Geometry menu gt Click in anti clockwise order the four points or nodes that define the corners of the patch Multiframe4D Frame DER X Fie Edit View Select Geometry Group Frame Load Display Case Analyse Time Design Window Help Den mees l EOS e amp Bl gp amp eel 4 A se 2 fl E E Ill ocase A AD TR M GIE ot m S Group Set 1 J alls vaar o m ojo 5 2 meda ogeeagaia ABDADA l SORA Bw m Am 7 Ile iA N EE aa loov e ol View x 0 863 y 6 177 z 0 000 dx 0 807 dy 3 859 dz 0 000 L 3 942 78 185 Ready To automatically add Patches between all of the members in a planar region eg a floor or frame gt Select the members which define the planar region Fs fe
77. gt Choose Align Joints from the Advanced submenu in the Geometry menu A dialog box will appear prompting for the axis and position along that axis to which all the selected joints will be reposition to Page 93 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 94 Align Joints iim n ty ong i Oaz 0 000 it canoe gt Select axis to which along which the joints will be aligned gt Type in the values for the new coordinate gt Click the OK button Upon successful exit from the dialog all the selected joints will be have the specified coordinate set to the new value Moving a Group of Joints Multiframe also allows you to move a group of joints together either by dragging with the mouse or by typing in a distance to move To move a group of joints with the mouse gt Select the joints to be moved gt Point to any of the selected joints and press the mouse button gt Drag the joints to the new location gt Release the mouse button Multiframe will connect together any members that share a common end point after you have dragged the joints Holding down the shift key while dragging will constrain movement vertically horizontally or to 45 degrees The coordinates of the pointer will be displayed in the bottom left hand corner of the window as you drag If you have turned on the Grid option the joints will move in increments of the grid spacing as you move To move a group of joints numerically gt Select the joints to be moved
78. gt Click on the OK button The name you give to the load case must not contain any of the following characters lt If you use the Edit Case command to change the name of a load case after analysis your results will not be lost if you only change the name and not any load factors Editing Load Cases Numerically You can edit the names and factors of load cases numerically in the Load Case table that may be displayed in the Data window This table displays load case names and load case factors To change a load case name or factor gt Click on the value to be changed gt Type in the new value Chapter 2 Using Multiframe gt Press the enter key Deleting a Load Case You can remove a load case from the structure This will remove the case and all its loads To delete a load case gt Choose Delete Case from the Case menu A dialog box will appear with the current load cases in a list Delete Case fo Delete Case Load Case 1 Cancel Load Case 3 gt Select the load case you wish to remove gt Click the Delete button You select a load case in the list by clicking on its name If you wish to remove more than one load case hold down the shift key while clicking on the names Holding down the shift key while clicking in the list adds the name to the selection or removes it if it is already selected Sorting Load Cases You can change the order that the load cases appear in the list of cases
79. inconvenient having so many restraints displayed in the Frame window you can always turn them off by using the Symbols command from the Display menu Page 320 Appendix C Section Map File Format Appendix C Section Map File Format This appendix describes the format of text files that may be used to map the names of sections used in Multiframe to those used by other applications The user may select a mapping file when importing selected file formats used other applications section Map Format The format of a Multiframe section map file is described below This section describes version of the file format The first line of the file must contain the text Multiframe Section Map File The second line describes the file format version of the file This line contains the text Version followed by an integer value For the current file format this line should contain the text Version 1 Any line after the first two lines beginning with an asterisk is a comment line and is ignore when the file is read All other lines in the file maps a section name used within Multiframe to an alternative naming convention Each of these lines contains up to four 4 comma or tab delimited entries The first two entries identify a section used within Multiframe by firstly specifying the name of a sections group and then the name of the section The 3 entry on this line is the name of the section used within another application T
80. left of each row and the reactions in the direction of each global axis appear in the six columns A sum of the three force components appears at the bottom of the table The units for each variable are shown underneath the title of the column in the table The reactions in this table are displayed in the directions of the local degree of freedoms at each joint These are defined by the orientation of the joint Member Actions To display the member actions gt Choose Member Actions from the Results sub menu under the Display menu Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Static Case 1 25DL 1 5LL ET Sane Memb Label Joint Va kip Tx kip ft My kip ft Member Actions 4 The table of member actions displays the number of each member it s label and the joints in the first three columns and the six end forces in each of the six remaining columns The member actions displayed in the Result window are shown in the diagram below The actions at joint 2 follow the same sign convention as the actions at joint 1 Moments follow the right hand rule 1 e if the thumb on your right hand points in the direction of the positive axis the direction of curl of your fingers will indicate the direction of positive moment Maximum Actions zis Mz Fx NM IEN To display the member stresses Loo 2 Bo A E ISS IR 9 E mo mo bi SS J A My vit e 2 gt Choose Maximum Actions from the Resu
81. line spaning the height of the building When this occurs it is necessary for the user to subdivide members in the model to ensure intersecting members are connected at a joint This is readily done in Multiframe using the Intersect Member command When importing DXF files new members imported from the file will be labelled using the drawing layer from which the member originated RealDWG Multiframe can read in 2D and 3D DWG DXF files This means you can create the geometry for a frame in a CAD program and then save it in DWG DXF format to be read into Multiframe When reading a DWG DXF file as a background construction lines or a model Multiframe will extract all of the LINE LINE3D and POLYLINE entities from the file and store each line segment as a Multiframe construction line or member Lines that are within 0 2 inches Smm of each other will be connected together Chapter 2 Using Multiframe To import a DWG DXF file dwg or dxf gt Choose Background DWG DXF from the Import sub menu or gt Choose Construct line DWG DXF from the Import sub menu or gt Choose Model DWG DXF from the Import sub menu If a frame is already open within Multiframe you will be asked if you wish to append the DWG DXF file to the existing frame You may also be prompted to save the existing frame gt Select the file to be imported using the Open File dialog Upon choosing a file the DWG DXF Import Options dialog will be displayed
82. member To apply a thermal load to a member gt Select the member or members to be loaded gt Choose Thermal Load from the Load menu or the short cut menu A dialog box will appear with fields for the magnitude and depth of the thermal load Page 149 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 150 Member Temperature Me ES Top Temperature if ck Bottom Temperature 100 Sg Thermal Coefficient 6 s500 uE TE i Cancel Member Depth 0 304 Iri _Cancel_ Axis te C gt Choose whether the temperature varies through the depth web or v axis direction or the breadth flange or z axis direction of the member gt Type in the temperatures at the top and bottom of the member These two temperatures will be the same if the member is at a constant temperature If the load is applied in the z direction top refers to the positive z side while bottom refers to the negative 3 side gt Type in a value for the thermal coefficient for the member material The thermal coefficient is entered in units of microstrain per degree gt Type in a value for the depth of the thermal load gt Click on the OK button All the temperature values are variations in degrees from the ambient temperature For example a bridge deck with the top of the beams at 45 and the bottom of the beams at an ambient of 20 would have top and bottom temperatures of 25 and 0 respectively The thermal gradient is assumed to be symmetric about the neutral axis of the me
83. member to the patch normal then do the above and then open the Member Orientation Dialog Frame gt Member Orientation and click Flip X X and the section will be rotated by 180 degrees If one or more of the selected members are not attached to a patch then a warning message will be shown If a member is attached to more than one patch ie it is on the edge where two patches join it will be aligned to the first patch detected Please note that the member will be offset to its base plus half the bending thickness of the patch In the render mode the patch thickness is not drawn so the member will appear a small distance from the patch Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Section Properties To compute the deflections in the structure it is necessary to know the geometric and material properties of the members that make up the structure Multiframe has a library of pre defined section properties for the most commonly used steel sections If you wish to use structural sections other than those pre defined in the Sections Library see Adding a custom section below Note that Multiframe uses the word Member to describe a geometric component of a structure such as a beam column or strut and the word Section to describe a particular structural shape or section with its own material and geometric properties Each member of the structure is constructed using a particular section To specify the section for a member gt Select the member or member
84. menu A dialog box will appear with icons to indicate the direction of the moments relative to the member Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Local Moment mfe Local Moment Magnitude 10 kip ft Left Distance A3 ft gt Click on the icon which shows the direction in which the moment is to act gt Type in the value for the magnitude of the moment gt Press Tab and type in the position of the moment measured from joint 1 gt Click on the OK button When you enter positions of loads in the member loading dialogs or the Data window you can enter calculation expressions for the position For example if you want a load to be at mid span you can enter L 2 for its position If you enter this in a load dialog this expression will be calculated for all the selected members This means you can apply this load to a number of members of different lengths simultaneously You can also enter more complicated expressions such as 2 L 3 or 1 35 L 4 2 The variable L is always available and contains the length of the member the syntax of the expressions is the same as that used in the CalcSheet Multiple loads of the same magnitude and direction may be added to the members by entering a comma separated list of load positions Thermal Load A thermal load is a load resulting from a temperature differential in the structure between a member and the ambient temperature A thermal load may also result from a temperature gradient through the depth of a
85. o o0000000 m DE lo OOOO0000 m Cancel o o0000000 m J Connect to existing frame gt Type the location at which the origin of the imported frame is to be located gt Choose if the imported frame is to be connected to the existing frame at common nodal points gt Click the OK button DXF Multiframe can read in 2D and 3D DXF files Multiframe2D can only read 2D files This means you can create the geometry for a frame in a CAD program and then save it in DXF format to be read into Multiframe When reading a DXF file Multiframe will extract all of the LINE LINE3D and POLYLINE entities from the file and treat each line segment as a Multiframe member Lines that are within 0 2 inches Smm of each other will be connected together To import a DXF file dxf gt Choose DXF from the Import sub menu If a frame is already open within Multiframe you will be asked if you wish to append the DXF file to the existing frame You may also be prompted to save the existing frame gt Select the file to be imported using the Open File dialog Upon choosing a file the DXF Import Options dialog will be displayed Page 233 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 234 Import Configurations Import parameters for Dat File Default Maxsur Cancel Default Multifrane CX live Right EE an e ve Units fe C mm Up e o e Ce om we z C metres feet aye Front fief fiz inches ye Dat Import Options A
86. one or more members gt Choose Member Water Current Factors from the Case menu The following dialog will be displayed Member Water Current Factors This load case Major Axis Shape Factors Minor Axis Shape Factors CF 2 050 Ce 0 500 Cry 9 000 Cry 0 900 User Coeffident 1 000 Apply to all Water Current load cases Page 174 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe As well as allowing the factors to be changed the orientation of the section is displayed Water Currents are resolved into local member loads Thus major and minor axis loads are applied in the directions shown in the dialog Each of these loads has a pair of shape factors associated with them Please note that for symmetrical sections the transverse shape factor for each direction ie Cry for Major axis loading and Cr for Minor axis loading is set to zero instead of applying two transverse loads in opposing directions which would cancel each other out Patch Water Current Factors The automatically calculated patch water current factors for each individual patch can be edited via the Patch Water Current Factors dialog To edit the patch water current factors gt Select one or more patches gt Choose Patch Water Current Factors from the Case menu The following dialog will be displayed Patch Water Current Factors Current Load Case External Pressure coeffiecient Cp e Calculated User defined Wall Roof Type Up Current Slope U O Le
87. patch toolbar To detach a member patch to patch gt Select members and patches that wish to be detached each other gt Choose Detach from Patch Command from the Geometry menu or icon button e Multiframe4D Frame File Edit View Select Geometry Group Frame Load Display Case Analyse Time Design Window Help Debug CESES TEGE ans pnn oa D I Are A D CE R Bs Pe E le m Gro et J alls Vaap olla g mAsa ama a a aAA A gt n AB EOF J ll NEE El a C eE E Oddaja dadada Ei eda i ao Vi d A aT Cl Page 55 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe amer ie mm eg Em Deh Bian Se A D w R M EE lt File Edit View Select Geometry Group Frame Load Display Case Analyse Time Design Window Help Debug Onee MARA EDM OS S F e B D Gowsert J a s yaar ejja a mAs a ma ad a aaaea AA Hov soe HOodd d dddalete ala Align Member to Patch or Load Panel SOAR EOEEN el Ill 7 AIS lo el Detach from Patch It is possible to align a member so that it is perpendicular to the patch that it is attached to gt Select one or more members gt Choose Member Orientation from the Frame menu The following dialog will be displayed Member Orientation Advanced Node 0 Global Axis C Point From the Member Orientation dialog gt Select Advanced omits
88. selected area in the Data window Animations Multiframe provides a capability for creating a movie from any animation that can then be inserted into any AVI aware program This is useful for keeping a record of an analysis or for linking up with a post processing program that could be used for visualization To save a movie turn on the Save Animation File option in the Animate dialog Multiframe will create and play the animation as usual but will also save a movie which can then be placed or played in any AVI aware application Page 247 Chapter 3 Multiframe Reference Chapter 3 Multiframe Reference This chapter summarises the overall structure windows toolbars and menu commands of Multiframe e Windows e Toolbars e Menus Windows Multiframe uses a range of graphical tabular graph and report windows Frame Window This window is used for preparing a physical description of the structure This includes geometry connections section types section orientation and restraints You can also modify joint and member masses for dynamic analysis Data Window This window is used for viewing and editing the data describing the structure and its loading It allows you to edit data numerically rather than graphically A number of different tables of data can be displayed describing joints member geometry member properties joint loads member loads restraints and prescribed displacements springs sections and load cases Loa
89. submenu in the View menu Page 15 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 16 E Zone Manager a x Mame sr Floor Zone Ranges mmm Maximum A 0 060 4 047 rm Ee 3 475 m Z 0 248 0 248 m el e Cancel Clipping zones are particularly useful when working with 3D models as separate zones can be defined for each of the 2D frames that make up the model Each of these frames can then be quickly accessed by simply clipping to each of the zones Masking Masking allows you to control the visibility of the structure by selecting members and then choosing to show or hide them If you use the Mask To Selection command in the Masking menu this will hide all of the members in the structure except those which are selected If you choose Mask Out Selection the selected members will be hidden and the remaining visible members will remain visible Like clipping masking affects the display of graphics in the Frame Load and Plot windows and can also be used in a view of one window to make it easier to see the graphics in a different view of another window Masking can also be grey or invisible however Multiframe will always ensure that clipping and masking both use the same display method 1 e either both will display in grey or both will make hidden members invisible Masking is useful for situations where the area you wish to view is not rectangular in shape and therefore is not suitable for clipping Rendering Mult
90. the Case menu The following dialog will be displayed Page 169 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Wind Shielding Factor Shielding Factor Member Wind Factors The automatically calculated member wind factors for each individual member can be edited via the Member Wind Factors dialog To edit the member wind factors gt Select one or more members gt Choose Member Wind Factors from the Case menu The following dialog will be displayed Member Wind Factors Current load case Incination factor Ki 1 000 Major Axis Shape Factors Minor Axis Shape Factors C F x 7 050 C Fx 0 000 Ce 0 000 Ce 0 900 sY All load cases Aspect ratio correction factor Kar o g49 User Coefiident 1 000 Apply to all wind load cases As well as allowing the factors to be changed the orientation of the section to the wind is displayed The Wind force is resolved into local member loads Thus major and minor axis loads are applied in the directions shown in the dialog Each of these loads has a pair of shape factors associated with them Please note that for symmetrical sections the transverse shape factor for each direction ie Cry for Major axis loading and Cr for Minor axis loading is set to zero instead of applying two transverse loads in opposing directions which would cancel each other out Page 170 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Patch Wind Factors The automatically calculated patch wind factors for each individual patch can
91. the commands used Chapter 4 Multiframe Analysis Discusses the numerical methods used by Multiframe It is important for you to understand these methods and their limitations before using Multiframe for structural analysis and design The chapter ends with a summary of the capabilities and limitations of Multiframe This manual describes the three versions of Multiframe 2D 3D and 4D Where appropriate the manual will indicate features that are only available in the 3D and 4D versions Page 1 Chapter 1 Getting Started Chapter 1 Getting Started This chapter briefly describes where to find the relevant resources to e Installing Multiframe e Learning Multiframe Installing Multiframe Instructions on installing and starting Multiframe can be found in the Installation Guide included in the package you received with the installation CD and copy protection device Alternatively you can also consult the installation guide online http www formsys com installation Learning Multiframe The best way to learn to use Multiframe is going through the Learning Multiframe tutorials These take you through all the basics of working with Multiframe from starting the application to modelling a simple 2D or 3D structure The tutorials are supported by videos These videos can be installed by installing Learning Multiframe from the installation CD or after downloading the installer from the web Alternatively the entire train
92. the direction of a global axis or element a small arrow will be drawn at the cursor pointing in the direction of the line of the constraint The colour of the arrow indicates is the constraint is in the direction of a global axis or a member Chapter 2 Using Multiframe The drawing constraint will be deactivated if the cursor is moved to far away from the direction of the constraint This can be avoided by holding down the shift key and this will force the current restraint to remain active Dynamic line constrains can be disabled via the new Drawing Settings dialog Drawing Settings The Drawing Setting dialog from the Geometry menu allows you to modify options associated with snapping to objects in the model the use of dynamic line constraints and other options associated with graphically interacting with the model Drawing Settings x Options MW Dynamic line constraints Members M Show snap tips Joint snap tolerance 4 pixels Member quarter points Member snap tolerance 4 pixels Custom member points Humber of divisions 5 Perpendicular point Constrain drawing to working plane T Lock Geometry Cancel The Lock Geometry option in this dialog provides a means for stopping the geometry and topology of the frame from being modified This includes disabling all drawing dragging and generation of structural members Page 35 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 36 This dialog also prov
93. the member and so the applied moment will cause an infinite torsional rotation A more complex case can develop where a group of members are connected to the rest of the structure by pin ended members and so the whole group is free to rotate to an infinite angle of rotation A common example of this would be the top chord of a truss where the top chord is considered to be rigid but the rest of the members are pinned together In this case because the top chord of the truss is pinned at its left hand end pinned to the intermediate members along the truss and also pinned at its right hand end the whole of the top chord is free to rotate about its longitudinal axis This results in an infinite rotation of the top joints of the truss There are three solutions to this problem Either restrain these top joints against rotation by using a custom restraint to restrain x to zero Appendix A Troubleshooting Restraints lo Restraints Restrained displacements Wu Wu z E E RSR Cancel Or use a member release that does not free the torsional moment Tx or use the pinned joint type available in Multiframe3D version 1 6 and later The pinned joint type sets all of the rotations of the joint to zero This will prevent these infinite torsional rotations without affecting the rest of the analysis 3 Check for bad restraints When analysing a structure it is necessary to ensure that the whole structure cannot move in a single r
94. the mouse button at the position of the first joint Chapter 2 Using Multiframe gt Press the mouse button and drag to the position of the second joint Windows users have the option of just clicking on the first joint instead of dragging Frame Existing member in the frame gt Release the mouse button You also have the option of just clicking on the second joint to complete the new member Frame New member is drawn here Members will be connected at this joint Holding down the shift key while drawing a member constrains the new member to be either vertical or horizontal or at 45 degrees When you draw the new member the coordinates of the mouse will be displayed in the bottom left corner of the window Also the distance and slope of the current position of the mouse from the last point will be displayed View x 2 705 y 0 058 2 0 000 dx 10 361 dy 13 123 dz 0 000 L 16 720 51 7410 When drawing in the 3D view you can only draw a member between two existing joints If the grid is turned on while you draw the member the position of the joints will snap to the grid The depth of the member will depend on the setting of the depth for the current view See Depth above for an explanation of how to set this depth Adding a Load Panel There are several ways for users to add a load panel to the structure From Geometry Menu a user can gt Choose Add rectangle Load Panel from the Geometr
95. the spherical option This then allows you to space the duplication radially from the origin angularly about the z axis and angularly about the y axis As an example to generate a cylindrical vault you could first draw a continuous beam parallel to the z axis and then duplicate it angularly about z to form the vault Moving a Joint You can only move joints in the Frame window Before moving a joint be sure that there are no joints selected in the frame To move a joint gt Point to the joint press the mouse button and hold it down Frame 0 Wiew x 5 y 6 z 0 dx 0 dy 0 dz 0 L 0 45 W gt Drag to the new position of the joint Frame Wiew Iech y 9 Ze dx 0 dy 0 dz 0 Let Gei W Page 91 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe gt Release the mouse button to fix the new location Frame B lel Holding down the shift key while dragging will constrain movement vertically horizontally or to 45 degrees The coordinates of the joint will be displayed in the bottom left hand corner of the window as you drag If you have turned on the Grid option the joint will align with the grid as you move it If you drag a joint on top of an existing joint Multiframe will create a connection between the members that meet at the common point You can only drag joints in two dimensional views When you drag a joint Multiframe will not change the depth of the joint Typing Joint Coordinates You can also move a joint b
96. two dimensional view there will be four icons indicating the four possible load directions In the 3D view all six possible icons will be displayed with the icons pointing in the direction of the appropriate axes in the current view gt Click on the icon which shows the direction in which the load is to act gt Type in a value for the pressure gt Click on the OK button There is no need to enter or signs for your load values The directions are determined from the icon that you select If you wish to remove the panel loads from a panel select the panel and choose Unload panel from the Load menu You can also double click on a panel to view a table of all the loads on the panel The axis of the load determines how the load is projected in the panel areas With Global axes the magnitude of a global panel load refers to its load per square meters where the area is measured perpendicular to the direction of the load This means a vertical distributed load applied to an inclined panel will apply a total load equivalent to the magnitude of the load times the horizontal projected area of the panel For loads applied in local axes the magnitude of the distributed load refers to its load per square meters where the area is the actual area of the load measured along the panel plane gt Click on the OK button Local Panel Load A local panel load is a load which is distributed along full area of the panel and acts in a direction either
97. with a single group within the group set so that members are exclusive to a single group within the set By default all frames contain a single group set Only a single group set is active within the user interface at any time The user can select which group set is active from the Current Group Set submenu contained within the Group menu Alternatively it can be selected using the Group toolbar When a new group set is added to the model it is set as the current group set To add a group set gt Choose Add Group Set from the Group menu Page 107 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Group Set Properties Eo Ei Name Exclusive Member Grouping W eg gt Type in the name of the group set gt Select the Exclusive Member Grouping checkbox if members are only allowed to be contained within a single group within the group set gt Click on the OK button Groups within the current group set can be displayed within the Frame Window by choosing to draw members using group colours All grouped elements will be displayed in the colour of the group in which they are contained Any ungrouped members will be displayed in black The choice to draw members using group colours is specified via the Symbols dialog A group set may be edited to change its names the member exclusivity and the properties of the groups contained within the set To edit a group set gt Choose Edit Group Set from the Group menu The Group Set properti
98. with different numbers of members and examining the effect this has on the results of analysis Merge Members The Merge Member command is used to automatically join members to create a single member This command can be used to merge more than a single member at a time Members to be joined into a single member are found by searching the current selection for all members that are of the same section type a collinear are rigidly connected and are off the same component type To join members in a structure gt Select the members to be merged gt Choose Merge Members from the Advanced submenu in the Geometry menu Groups of members that meet the above requirements will then be merged into a single member In most cases the distributed loads applied to the merged member will also be merged to form continuous loads along the member The user should carefully review the design properties of the merged members Intersect Members The Intersect Member command is used to automatically subdivide members and connect members where they intersect To join intersecting member in the structure gt Select the members to be joined at there intersections gt Choose Intersect Members from the Advanced submenu in the Geometry menu Page 79 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe A number of new members connected end to end will be generated to replace each of the selected members This command is particularly useful for generating continuous beams or for s
99. you are using This is Summarised in the table below Click on the links on the left for more information about the specific analysis type Multiframe Multiframe Multifrai 2D 3D 4D Linear Analysis af af d Nonlinear Analysis af of wi A new type of analysis has been added for analysing Ka af of frames which are used for lifting calculations Typical examples would be lifting of baskets and skids with slings which are attached to a crane Page 183 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 184 Such models are typified by a lack of restraint in the horizontal plane which allows the frame to either rotate or swing freely If you model a frame like this you will often get the error message Solution does not make sense The lifting analysis function automatically adds additional spring restraints to the model to provide sufficient horizontal restraint to allow the model to be analysed This eliminates the need for you to apply your own manual spring restraints The stiffness of these restraints is automatically set by Multiframe so as to have a minimal effect on the actions within the frame They are set at a small proportion of the other stiffnesses in the frame While you are creating your structural model you should review the location of the centre of mass and ensure that the lifting point 1s located as near as possible to a location directly above the centre of mass of the structure and its loads Note also that when modell
100. 0 0011 0 0000 0 1800 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 1 0000 0 0000 0 0000 5 s0000 5 0000 BBM NHN DN 5000 5000 5000 5000 0000 0000 0 0000 9 88 63 0 0213 0 0000 0 0086 0 0000 0 0062 0 0000 0 0000 9 4208 0 0202 0 0000 0 0202 0 0000 0 0079 0 0000 0 0064 0 0000 29000 6935 0 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0015 0005 0035 0000 0411 0411 3139 2085 Appendix D Text File Format 10 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 2273 3 4949 0 20215 0 1002 0 0010 17 6279 MEMBER ACTIONS 1 2 5446 2 2214 0 0426 0 0035 0 4825 9 8863 2 5446 2 2274 0 0426 200035 0 8659 10 1601 2 2 6910 1 9920 0 0210 0 0002 0 1149 10 1598 2 6910 1 9920 0 0210 0 0002 0 0996 10 2054 3 2 6723 1 9797 0 0213 0 0005 0 1010 10 2023 2 6723 1 9797 bt 02 T3 0 0005 St TS 10 0368 4 2 4827 2 1622 0 0010 0 1002 9 4208 2 4827 2 1622 0 0213 0 0010 0 0915 10 0388 5 1 4778 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 1 4778 0 0000 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 6 0 3240 1 4794 0 0216 0 0003 0 1196 0 0004 0 3240 1 4794 0 0216 0 0003 0 1013 15 1241 7 0 7492 3 4042 0 0212 0 0005 0 1001 15 1272 0 7492 3 4042 let 0212 0 0005 0 1170 19 6751 8 3 4949 0 2273 cb E 0 0010 0 1002 17 6279 3 4949 Za ZL TT 0 0213 0 0010 0 0915 19 6731 9 0 0216 0 0366 0 0093 0 0004 0 1169 0 0251 0 0216 0 0366 0 0
101. 093 0 0004 0 1158 0 8899 10 0 0004 0 0000 0 0157 0 0031 0 1971 0 0005 0 0004 0 0000 0 0157 0 0031 0 1964 0 0000 11 0 0001 0 0093 0 0092 0 0020 0 1154 0 1163 0 0001 0 0093 0 0092 0 0020 0 1156 0 1163 LOAD CASE Load Case 2 DISPLACEMENTS AND REACTIONS 1 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 8 1758 23 9131 0 0503 0 9305 0 0332 13 4469 2 0 1168 0 0086 0 1907 0 1827 0 2050 0 2610 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 3 0 2978 0 9501 0073 0 2147 0 0999 0 0842 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 4 0 4781 0 0094 0 0106 0 20015 0 0782 0 0770 0 4781 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 5 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 43 6556 260 0598 0 0251 0 1189 0 0127 149 3328 6 GR 1 0000 0 1786 0 1959 0 2213 2 5272 0 0000 20 0706 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 7 1 2501 0 9927 0 1907 0 1959 0 2213 E 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 8 0 6043 2 0743 0 0073 0 2146 0 0974 0 1494 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 9 Oe E 0 0108 0 0106 0 0015 0 0789 0 4912 0 1750 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 10 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 36 2179 29 9577 0 0251 0 1189 0 0128 65 0523 MEMBER ACTIONS 1 23 9131 C2 L758 0 0503 0 0332 0 9305 13 4469 23 9131 8 1758 0 0503 020332 0 4782 60 1356 2 12 9606 21 7098 0 0241 0 0016 0 1299 60 1136 12 9606 3 8490 0 0241 0 0016 0 1161 31 1856 3 13 3874 eebe 040253 0 0008 OS EZS 31 1849 13 3874 23 8075 0 0253 0 0008 0 1373
102. 2 Using Multiframe Generate Frame Primary Structure Number of bays Number of stones Number of frames Bay spacing Story height Frame spacing Secondary Structure Number of Secondary Beams fo fo Number of Tertiary Beams Secondary Beam Direction rasis sl Cancel TYPICAL BAY gt Enter the values for the number of structural elements and the dimensions in each direction gt Enter the values for the number of secondary and tertiary beams in each bay of the frame gt Select the direction of secondary beams gt Click the OK button The frame you generate will be shown in the Frame window Biel Es Fi Sg F Taras pe t FRE E ll ll el Lt m Wd Ach n Mr Ee Vi You may also find this command useful for generating the initial geometry for other structures such as trusses You can start by generating the appropriate number of bays 1 frame and story Page 83 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 84 You can then use the other drawing and duplication tools to create the structure you Frame 0 require e g Generating a Continuous Beam Multiframe allows you to quickly generate a continuous beam which is made up of a number of even or varying length spans To generate a continuous beam gt Choose Generate from the Geometry menu A dialog box will appear with the various generation icons in it Standard Structures Fa A oo T a E e OA Waren
103. 213 Select From W INOW E 273 Select Design Member eelere Ga Select Design Member 273 Select EE 212 SCICCHINS Te E 75 Geesse lege 75 Del Weri eege 151 Self Weight Load Case cswcscevesveicresainenesverenss 293 Self Weight Loade 153 Semi rigid connection cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 129 Setting up the prmter 228 SMe EE 100 275 EE 131 Shear NET EE 303 SHE AE OY Ee 290 DMC AI E 290 SGA E 289 SHCA NEE 289 SiG OF Ctl Key Sena cee la iit 6 SDC e 6 e UR EE 11 266 SIONC ONEN OM E 297 Suel e WE 184 EE 29 266 SIZE Kr NN E EEN 12 266 Size To Fit Sub men 267 DMAP PING see eet 33 Snapping to Ta 34 Snapping to Members 34 sorting load cases ocenenie 157 Space Gass Ee 259 260 Space Gass Text Files ecccceeeeeeeeeees 237 EDO Tenian 241 Spherical Coordinates ccccssssssseeeeeeeeeees 91 Spreadsheet Text EE ed 240 SPlCadSHeCelS ebe 327 SPAN EE 201 Spring Member Actions Table 288 289 Spring Member Stiffness c cc ceeeeeeeeeeees 280 Spring Member Table 287 SPIN S cles trestle a eae 106 Spins Tee 286 Standard SEC OM ee ee 116 Static load case teste ee 154 Static Load Caserne gets 293 SE 267 Steel Desioner ICIP E 295 Step Loads Tallen 287 BEER 298 EE 214 EE 214 Stresses Sub Men 284 290 SIC CIT aly GIG ee 30 Structural Gd Seese 266 Structure Diagrams ssssssseeeoeoeeeeeeesssssse 207 Subdivide Member 76 274 SubSpace EIERE Ee 192 AE 23 206 283 Symbols Toolbar
104. 650 7 sl IILE ID The Member Toolbar is found in the Frame Window and performs some of the functions found in the Frame and Geometry menus From left to right the buttons perform the following functions Delete Member Sub divide Member Select section type from most recently used sections Section Type dialog Pinned Pinned Member Release Rigid Rigid Member Release Page 251 Chapter 3 Multiframe Reference Page 252 Member Orientation Joint Toolbar The Joint Toolbar is found in the Frame Window and performs some of the functions found in the Frame menu From left to right the buttons perform the following functions Fixed Joint Restraint Pinned Joint Restraint Horizontal Roller Restraint Vertical Roller Restraint Free Joint Restraint Rigid Joint Type Pinned Joint Type View Toolbar The View Toolbar is found in the Frame Load and Plot Windows and performs some of the functions found in the View menu From left to right the buttons perform the following functions Select rectangular selection tool Select linear selection tool Zoom Shrink Pan Size To Fit Toggle Clipping Toggle Masking Toggle Drawing Grid Toggle Structural Grid Toggle Axes Actions Toolbar Chapter 3 Multiframe Reference The Actions Toolbar is found in the Plot Window and performs some of the functions found in the Display menu From left to right the buttons perform the following functions Display plot values
105. 81 5601 4 260 0598 43 6556 0 0251 0 0127 0 1189 149 3328 26 0598 7 6552 0 0251 0 0127 0 1072 81 5656 5 20 0706 0 0000 0 0000 0 20000 0 0000 0 0000 20 0706 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 6 4 1813 19 6129 0 0262 0 0017 0 1462 0 0220 4 1813 5 9459 0 0262 0 0017 0 1217 69 8395 7 6 2564 Sele 0 0250 0 0008 0 1186 69 8402 6 2564 29 2859 0 0250 0 0008 0 1365 98 9126 8 29 9577 36 2179 0 0251 0 0128 0 1189 65 0523 29 9577 Oa 2 LTS 0 0251 0 0128 0 T073 98 9071 Page 329 Appendix D Text File Format 9 0 0262 0 0170 0 0122 0 0220 0 1434 0 0287 0 0262 0 0170 0 0122 0 0220 0 1606 U 4328 10 0 0013 0 0002 BER E 0 0006 O 2549 0 0031 0 0013 0 0002 zat OE Oro Er 0 0006 0 2322 0 0013 11 0 0002 0 0109 Oe OLLY 0 0055 0 1461 u 1365 0 0002 0 0109 Q Oks By 0055 0 1468 0 1366 END Page 330 Appendix E Using Spreadsheets With Multiframe Appendix E Using Spreadsheets With Multiframe This appendix explains how you can effectively use spreadsheets with Multiframe to simplify the generation of frames and interpretation of the results of a Multiframe analysis Multiframe Automation Note that you can also automatically insert data into a spreadsheet by using Multiframe s Automation capability See the Multiframe Automation manual for more information Spreadsheets with Multiframe You are probably aware that you can choose Copy from the Edit menu to copy a Multiframe picture into a word proce
106. Custom1 Custom2 Custom3 and Frame These groups are designed to be used to store special sections in To add a standard section gt Choose Add Standard Section from the Sections submenu under the Edit menu A dialog box will appear with a list of group names a field for the section s name a list of icons to indicate the sections shape and a number of fields in which to input the material properties and dimensions of the section x Name Yew Sectio Group Custom Shape I section Material Properties E 200000 MPa EI oIa OFF MPa imensions Depth Di 500 000 mm 0 000 mm Width Bi 100 000 mm 0 000 mm 50 000 mm 0 000 mm 0 000 mm 0 000 mm 0 000 mm Taper 0 000 deg 0 000 mm Spacing s 0 000 mm Cancel gt Type ina name for the section gt Choose the name of the group you wish to store the member in from the Group pop up menu gt Choose the shape of the custom section from the shape pop up menu gt Fill in the fields in the Material Properties group with the value of Young s modulus and the Shear Modulus gt Fill in the active fields in the Dimensions group to specify the size of the shape If your section does not have one of the shapes shown in the list leave the Unknown section options selected gt Click on the OK button Page 116 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Multiframe will now add the section to the library the properties of
107. E 261 Bak EE 119 265 Editing lees 156 Editing Coordinates cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 101 Ed ns Ay ee eege 295 Editing Load Cases 0 sseeeeeeeeeeees 156 Editing Loads Numerically c00 150 Editing Restraints Numerically 107 ELC OOc 158 elastic critical toad sissioni s 190 elastic stiffness matrix cceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 190 End Spring Actnonsg 201 Stee 129 Envelope load case e E 155 Envelope Load Case eeennennnsssssssserseseeee 293 Evaluating Rxpresgiong 181 Ee ee 259 ee cree err en tern eerste 258 ZI DX EEN 260 DDA E o 260 Bitmap RE 243 261 Day Star KE E 260 Day star Lext PIES asn 240 EE 239 Microstran Arche 260 Multitrame Text be eeS egggeetee eege 239 Multiframe vi 242 261 Navisworks cccsccccecceeeeeeeeeaeaeseeeeeeees 244 IN IVS ed Soci Siatarsacieede adutweae taeda 261 SDNE E 242 SDNP Wedd EE 261 Space Gass EE tege 260 Space Gass Text Files eee 241 Spreadsheet TCX E 240 Text EE 260 Text E 260 Time History Results Text Files 242 Time History ResultsText File 261 TAT 239 260 Ex DOCS UDINE Ieo 259 ExportMicrostran Archive Files 240 ES dr et 6 EE 99 275 F Pactored Kleed ates 154 elt Kole ab 4 eebe 239 eer mien mare me mene ncn EE 230 Pre WIC EE 257 File VT OGD aL EE 248 270 Fixed Fime tele 160 PONU ege EE 266 EE 214 Format TF GOD E 270 Formatting Toolbar cccccesesss
108. EE 267 Unload Joint 133 138 139 142 143 145 281 282 283 Unload Member 281 user defined maternal 122 V Variable Time ccccsccecoscescsceecesees 160 View PRETEEN COS ae ee 263 View ER EE 265 266 View Sub Men 266 269 View Jelli 250 270 View3D keelen Ces 253 270 Viewing Applied Time History Load 161 LOW Seen ioscan stan ese A 7 NAST Cross Gh net S AAA AE E 30 NRM EEN 260 e 010 ee 239 W Window Men 294 Window Toolbar erasa E 270 Windows Toolbar ccceccecescesceccscescess 253 Z Zones GN EE 268 Save Clipping Zone cccccccesessseeeeeeees 268 POO ee 8 266
109. ER Vis ae EE Zi 0 0 10 3mm 3 Cancel e a EE E gt Type ina name for the section gt Choose the name of the group you wish to store the member in from the Group pop up menu gt Fill in the fields in the table with appropriate values using the down arrow key to move from field to field gt Choose the shape of the custom section from the shape pop up menu If your section does not have one of the shapes shown in the list leave the Unknown section options selected Page 117 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 118 gt Click on the OK button Note that it is not necessary to fill in all the fields if you do not wish to use the variables later in the CalcSheet However the following fields must be filled in Mass Weight Mass per unit length if using Self Weight A Cross sectional area Ix moment of inertia about the major x x axis ly moment of inertia about the minor y y axis J Torsion constant E Young s Modulus G Shear Modulus If you which to view stresses on your members you should also fill in the following fields Sxt Zxt Elastic section modulus about x at top side of section Sxb Zxb Elastic section modulus about x at bottom side of section Syl Zyl Elastic section modulus about y at left side of section Syr Zyr Elastic section modulus about y at right side of section If you wish to view rendered shapes of your section you should also fill in the following fields D Depth of section
110. Flip Direction 0 000 0 000 0 000 A dialog box will appear which displays the section s shape The view of the section shape in the dialog is the view you would see if your eye was at joint 2 and you were looking down the member towards joint 1 gt Click and drag on the shape to rotate it to a new orientation or type ina new orientation angle gt Click OK to set the new orientation When you set the orientation you are effectively defining the direction of the local y axis of the member The angle you type is the angle between the y axis and a vertical plane passing through both ends of the member As the angle increases the y axis will rotate towards the z axis A number of parametric options are also available for specifying the orientation of members Instead of specifying an angle the user can choose a number of advanced options that define the plane containing either the member s y axis or z axis The plane is defined by the local x axis of a member and either a point in space or a direction The orientation point can be defined by its coordinates or by specifying a joint Similarly the direction may be defined as either a vector or by specifying a global axis direction Care must be taken to ensure that the point or direction define a valid plane As such the orientation point should not lie along the line of the x axis and the orientation direction should not be parallel to the members x axis Page 113 C
111. Multiftrame Windows Version 16 User Manual Bentley Systems Incorporated 2013 License amp Copyright Multiframe Program amp User Manual 2013 Bentley Systems Incorporated Table of Contents IAG CMS EC Oy E E iii TOLO ON en O E E E N V ee r E CHE l Chapter EE Stared ceciren senessecoissauseavasaraunandss 3 tee Eege 3 IR Ee ae e 3 Chaper Csr eene 5 Toc Da E 5 Summary of Mouse Techniques ccccccsssssssssssseeeeececceeeeeeeeaeaaeaesessseeseees 5 Summary of Keyboard Techniques ccccccsssssssssssseeeeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeaaeaeeeeeees 6 US TE 7 EEN 7 IG ND VCs ee 8 COND ROW e ciate eats ctesecinaeee E E 8 Zoom Pan Shrink and Si e To Bit E 8 Gio oy re Er 12 Pone E 16 Selecting Joints and Members 18 EE 18 De CC ORI PARC ee 19 Be CCIM EE 20 Selectine Pateh Openings geegent eene 20 Select EE 21 Select Open EE 22 At 23 eege 24 Como Ol OLCAN iy EE 27 DIFEN OUN eer E E 28 Canne a SUBIC ONS sraa aa Ea ara 29 DEN ee E E E O 29 EE 0 Eeer 29 Draw me ri eesis 30 enie abir EE a EE 30 IK et Dep ere A E E AEA O 33 Snapping to Joints and Members 33 Dynamic Line E E E 34 DT EE 35 DC CNM AAG e 36 ee EE ae 36 Adding a Load PAGE sassasscdeotnrascscnasacce va iocidcvosacdeoeatacaienasaceauasiocidspeteedeseavadens 37 Addn AE EE 39 RS CIN AT A E 4 Add N sided Patches amp Openings cccccsseeeeeccceeeececeeeeaaessessseseeeeeeeeeess 43 3D amp CUPVEd Patch SUPPOMN EE 45 Edit Pa
112. N Mx 0 000 kN m My 0 000 kN m Mz 0 000 KM m Static Case Load Case 1 Joint Reactions KN KM mi Joint 7 The original position is marked by the point where the grey lines of the members connecting at the joint meet The diagram of the structure will be replaced by a diagram of the joint reactions Click on the drawing at the bottom right of the window to return to a diagram of the whole structure Page 225 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 226 Joint Displacements The diagram of a joint s displacements indicates the vertical horizontal and rotational displacements of the joint To display the displacements for a joint gt Choose Deflection from the Display menu gt Double click on the original position of the joint in the structure diagram a Plot LI Static Case Load Case 3 Joint Displaceme Click on the drawing at the bottom right of the window to return to a diagram of the whole structure Buckling Results After a buckling analysis has been completed successfully each buckling mode is stored as a Separate case The mode shapes are normalised and stored in the same way as displacements in a static analysis To view the load factors and mode shapes gt Choose the buckling mode from the Buckling Modes menu in the Case menu The load factor is printed in the bottom left corner of the Plot window To view the mode shape gt Select the Plot window gt Choose Deflection from the Display menu The
113. NEE 290 Pateh Internal Ereegnes een 291 Patch Stresses EE 292 ASS Men E 292 Kee KE rn EE 293 EE eee nent Oe EERE NDT re STOR NR RC 293 Time IV EE 294 Windoy E 294 e oo OMY Lela E 295 Chapter erh 297 Method of Analys EE 297 Matix SUE MESS de Le E 297 AXeS and Sign Conventio seese a aeaaea aa a iaei reana 297 Member ACHOU dee 299 Modal Analys E 300 Capaci iy acetate oe N 302 Nonlinear ANdlyS iSense a S 303 PIG eebe Ee Eege 304 Rer Na hace ee 308 EECHER 309 TOM DISS tee EE 309 Appendix B Analysis EHS ee e ee 315 JENA ACS EE Eeer 315 Appendix C Section Map File Ott etien Eee e ge eieg e gege eege det 317 EEGENEN 317 Appendix RSX Pile er 319 Text E e EE 319 ferdeg Pext Example File ee 322 Appendix E Using Spreadsheets With Multiframe cc cccccssssssesesseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeaaas 327 Spreadsheets with Muloframe 327 Appendix F Quality Assurance eege EE ee EE 335 Qal A SUT ANOS ea N E 335 About this Manual About this Manual This manual is about Multiframe a software system for structural analysis and design Chapter 1 Getting Started Directs you to sources for installing and learning to use Multiframe Chapter 2 Using Multiframe This chapter includes step by step instructions in using the program This will explain most of the tasks you will carry out in defining analysing and designing a structure Chapter 3 Multiframe Reference Gives an overview of the operations of Multiframe and a summary of
114. Patch Split Patch Merge Patch L T ED EECH Sib pn ees aie lee VIBE L a la jn o sdOda unteeeal EE D I Multiframe Advanced Fre CROC SS ee e Den reels O ea etA ARB ke el e B 2 B F 6 IIIe A D T ey Cy mm a Gerster Alt V4 AD oll F J 0 0e a IESSE JI 7B VPM clam a o Ye a pend dddda ytecaa aap ILESI EEN 9 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Patch Merge Multiframe allows patches to be merged into one planar patch Patch merge command is available from the Geometry menu or from the right click shortcut menu To merge two patches gt Select a list of adjacent patches in the same plane that will be merged Multiframe Advanced Frame File Edit View Select Geometry Group Frame Load Display Case Analyse Time Design Window Help Debug Dae st eel ve S ET eaagqehR FA amp amp ty life GJ E E Load Case 1 A D E R CEs e m aleet asap oll L AR ow mls Il li ANI flag b ov ese HOodnddl ddddalsytecadaa go S MASS i R 8D be gt Choose Merge Patch command Patch Properties Patch Materials Patch Thickness Patch Meshing Patch Colours Patch Labels Rotate Patch Axes Flip Patch z Axis Split Patch Merge Patch Patch Reference Axes Mask To Selection Ctrl M Mask Out Selection Ctrl Shitt M Page 69 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe
115. Report Wumdow 247 Page 346 Reporting G EE 263 PLC LCL e ee 263 Repeat Table Headers nnnn00000000000 263 Shade Alternate ROWS cccccceecceeecceees 263 Using Microsoft Word 263 EE 97 275 Resizing a Member 97 eh E 104 R str mts Table eat eg 286 Re EE 295 Result TG Ay EE 295 Result Window cc cece eeceeeceeceeeeees 195 247 tee eebe 195 ET e EE 203 K NN Une 203 Eege 203 Kar 195 Results Sub Men 284 288 ResultsNonlinear ccceeeeeeeeeeeeee 188 203 Reverse MICINDEIS sn nes NEE 276 ROTO EE 98 275 Rotated Ee 8 S EE 258 EE 258 Saving Calculations ccccccssssseseeeeeeeeees 228 SDNF EE 242 IMPOR EE 238 SONET GE 259 261 EE 115 DCC MINS sasaki A 119 GEIER ee eg 265 Section Map Format 317 Section Orientation ccccceecceeccseesceeeceeees 113 SECUN POPETI S eege 115 Section Properties Varables 221 SE CUO SCE eh 17 Section Sub Men 265 SECHON Type sao 115 120 279 Sections EE 119 Sections Libar 115 117 123 Sections Table jcooicsssccccasccsecsdeavadenseesses 120 287 Seismic Load Case 162 293 Select Member EEN 212 E E EE 262 DEE es Se ieEe et CR 212 e e ieee cs er ee te 212 eko NB 242 EE age a 212 leegen ee ee 212 DG OL FO EE 212 SODNE ere oe ee een mene ee erent 212 K EE 272 Select Ebbe 212 Select Jont Labe eeen 212 Select Ee 213 Select Joint Labels E 213 Select dE 273 Select Joint E TE 213 Select TOOP EE
116. The maximum values for each member are displayed on three rows each of the row displays the maximum absolute values the maximum positive values and the maximum negative values of the actions in the member Member Stresses To display the member stresses gt Choose Member Stresses from the Results sub menu under the Display menu The table of member stresses is similar to the table of member actions It displays the number of each member the member label and the joints at each end of the member in the leftmost columns The remaining columns display the stresses at the ends of the member The table of member actions displays the number of each member and the joints in the first two columns and the six end forces in each of the six remaining columns The member actions displayed in the Result window are shown in the diagram below The actions at joint 2 follow the same sign convention as the actions at joint 1 Moments follow the right hand rule e if the thumb on your right hand points in the direction of the positive axis the direction of curl of your fingers will indicate the direction of positive moment Yal Mz ee A ei d My Va e 2 Z Maximum Stresses To display the member stresses gt Choose Maximum Stresses from the Results sub menu under the Display menu The table of maximum member stresses is similar to the table of maximum member actions It displays the number of each member and the member label in t
117. a apinp ab e DEI LEIT AE A DTR pt e m Gost es FA ol Je mAs o oe aal A AAA EE EES Ip OD v E a F h es kino y E A EI ene To generate a N sided opening gt Select a list of members that form a N sided opening gt Choose Auto generate Openings Command from the Geometry menu or icon button Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Multiframe4D E 4 0 sm rees Oeae etal AR 2 8B e G AP JADE K OE E es m Gost S VA e UDO o le a ei ei ei il a A A A3 A NOR AB ae An 4 A 1 7718 NIE a janvye a d adad Zei is e Generate Openings Paolo rate JOsa seelve S M aQaeeR 4F 2 B eB 7 O S S e 6 EI e A D E R E lo D i EECH Taare GBa alleiogeeaieal l aa aa A KSC J 14 1 NEEDE l a a JEn sl a 4 ZR ep lt 7 SAO AE Hee Gs V4 OK 73 KRG GT GE A NAVAN N PPO Patch Split Multiframe allows patches to be split into multiple sub patches Patch split command is available from the Geometry menu or from the right click shortcut menu To split a patch Page 67 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 68 gt Choose Split Patch command Add Node Add Member Add Connected Members Add Spring Member Draw Rectangular Load Panel Draw 4 sided Load Panel Draw 3 sided Load Panel Add
118. a load dialog this expression will be calculated for all the selected members This means you can apply this load to a number of members of different lengths simultaneously You can also enter more complicated expressions such as 2 L 3 or 1 35 L 4 2 The variable L is always available and contains the length of the member the syntax of the expressions is the same as that used in the CalcSheet Multiple loads of the same magnitude and direction may be added to the members by entering a comma separated list of load positions Local Point Load A local point load is a concentrated load that acts part way along a member and acts in a direction normal shear or parallel axial to the member To apply a local point load to a member gt Select the member or members to be loaded gt Choose Local Point Load from the Load menu or the short cut menu A dialog box will appear with icons to indicate the direction of loading relative to the member Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Local Point Load el FS Local Point Load fe Py C Px we C Ps ag 2 a H CP C Py Cancel Magnitude 1 0 kip Lett Distance Lu ft gt Click on the icon which shows the direction in which the load is to act gt Type in the value for the magnitude of the load gt Press Tab and type in the position of the load measured from joint 1 gt Click on the OK button When you enter positions of loads in the member loading dialogs or the Data window you can en
119. a view of one window to make it easier to see the graphics in a different view of another window There are two types of clipping clipping which draws the clipped out part of the frame in grey and clipping which makes the clipped out members completely invisible When clipping is turned on the clipping bars are displayed as dotted lines in the two dimensional view These dotted lines represent the boundaries of the clipping box Chapter 2 Using Multiframe y rear plane N NS front 8 e top plane plane S Top ee I5 View a N xyr Front 1 Right EH View View Plane 7 i L X left plane right plane To change the boundaries of the clipping box and therefore change which members in the structure are visible you can press and drag on the bars with the mouse Frame 10 If you want to move two bars simultaneously you can press and drag on the intersection between the two bars and drag them at the same time Page 13 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 14 View al The small triangles located between the clipping bar on the edges of the window indicate the drawing depth These can also be dragged using the mouse and to help align the drawing depth accurately the mouse will snap to objects and grids Clip To Frame Usually you will find it convenient to start by choosing Clip To Frame from the Clipping menu This positions the clipping bars so that they lie just outside the outer boundar
120. ach member Page 335 Appendix E Using Spreadsheets With Multiframe Page 336 s MLDDEUPORBCT Ai Hemberfata 5 This formula looks up the Loadlales required lead foreach member a F vd from the Load Value columan in the MemberTi ta array ee ee ee S Atel bie 1 D d 2 A 4 A s 4 E 3 d 7 i 6 T a vi ON sl Ch OH D Cu bi Once you have done that you can copy and paste the load magnitudes from the load array back into the magnitude columns of the Member Load table in Multiframe This will update the member loads you have applied to their required values Keep in mind the direction of these loads you may need to use a negative sign in your spreadsheet to ensure that the magnitudes pasted into Multiframe point in the right direction View Load Case 1 E This may sound like a rather long process but once you have set it up once you can adapt the spreadsheet for use with other structures Also once you get used to using the VLOOKUP command in your spreadsheet you will find it useful for many other operations see quantities example below Example 3 Calculating Quantities amp Costs Appendix E Using Spreadsheets With Multiframe When you generate a structure in Multiframe it displays a table of the sections you have used in the Sections table in the Data window section Group SE No Used ae Mass L Total Mass kg m kg g T5858 1 2 Go Tube S OO Co O37 T2 689 21583 3566 Ra carre
121. ad Caze 1 Left Dist Right Dist Left Mag Right Mag O a mtr Add Delete All of these values can be edited in this table and you can also add and delete loads using the buttons in the dialog Loads on joints can be changed in a similar way by double clicking on the joint Self Weight Multiframe allows you to automatically include the self weight of the structure as a separate load case gt Choose Self Weight from the Load menu or the short cut menu A dialog will be displayed which allows you to enter the acceleration to be applied to the mass of the structure to convert it into a load Page 151 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 152 self Weight Load Case Name Self Weight Acceleration x mis y m s z m s Indude v Members W Plates 1 Joint masses Acceleration You will usually use the default setting which applies a standard gravity acceleration to the structure However if you are investigating inertial or seismic effects you may wish to apply accelerations in the x or z directions Include For versions of Multiframe 14 and onwards it is possible to include Joint Masses in the self weight calculation By default they are turned off and are off for any models created in older versions of Multiframe Similarly it is possible to include or exclude any combination of Members Plates and Joint Masses After clicking OK a new load case named Self Weight will be created You can create an
122. age 23 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 24 Legends Legends displaying the meaning of colours used to display members and loads can be displayed by selecting the corresponding option in the Symbol Display dialog available from the Display menu A feature of some of the legends used in Multiframe is that you can use the legend to modify the selection in the current window Double clicking on the text of an item in the legend will select the corresponding items in the model For example this can be useful for selecting all the members in a group all the members with the same label or all he members with the same section type Member Legend Members in the Frame and Plot window can be displayed in colour The colour of the member is selected via the Symbol Display dialog available from the Display menu by choosing a colour scheme The following options are available Default colour When this option is selected the default colour settings will be used The default colour settings can be set via the View Colour dialog Section When this option is selected the members colour will be displayed as per the colour of the Section type The legend will list all different section types used in the structure Section Group When this option is selected the members colour will be displayed as per the colour of the group their assigned section type belongs to The legend will list all different section groups that the members used
123. al 7865 250 200000 000 76923 077 250 000 0 300 350 000 11 700 u C Steel Concrete QO Timber Aluminium Other Identity Standard Grade Co e gt Type in a name for the material gt Choose the name of the group you wish to store the material in from the Group pop up menu gt Fill in the fields specifying the properties of the material gt Choose the type of the material Be careful to ensure that the units of the values you enter match those of the fields shown in the table on screen Only the groups in the library that are not locked will be shown in the list of groups If you wish to store the material in the library and have it available for use in other structures store the section in one of the groups other than the group named Frame Materials stored in the Frame group will be stored with the structure and will not appear in the list unless you are using this structure You will probably find it convenient to store most of your materials in the Frame group to avoid cluttering up your library with materials that are only used in one or two structures Editing and Deleting Materials The properties of materials can be modified and materials may be removed from the library using the commands in the Materials submenu under the Edit Menu Working with the Sections Library When working with lots of different sections for different projects some thought has to be g
124. ali and Neville in which the deflected shape member stiffness and fixed end forces are derived using stability functions For UDL s applied over the entire length of a member Multiframe computes the correct nonlinear fixed end forces For other member loadings Multiframe uses the linear fixed end forces This has little effect for members with small axial forces and the accuracy of an analysis can be improved by simply subdividing members with high axial forces P Delta effect In Multiframe the P Delta P A effect is accounted for by updating the nodal coordinates within each iteration Axial Shortening Multiframe can calculate the axial shortening of a member due to flexure of the member This nonlinear effect may be included in an analysis by selecting the appropriate option in the Nonlinear Analysis dialog The implementation in Multiframe only considers shortening of the member due to the moments acting at the ends of the member No account is made for the effect of loads applied to the member Tension and Compression only members Tension only and compression only members can be considered by a nonlinear analyses These types of members are removed or reinstated to the structure at the end of each iteration based upon the axial deformation of the member Tension and compression only members are not considered in static linear dynamic or time history analyses Analysis Nonlinear analysis in Multiframe is performed using a Newton
125. alue for maximum length of a plate side and Multiframe automatically generates all plates for you Page 51 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 52 Patch Mesh Patterns There are two types of triangular meshes for patches uniform and non uniform 3 or 4 sided patches without openings could be meshed to uniform patterns All other patches with or without openings have to be non uniformly meshed At each patch or opening side there are three mesh types uniform linear and bi linear To mesh a patch you could specify the mesh density type and ratio along each side of the patch and openings In patch property window the user defined mesh type option has been removed replacing with a comprehensive patch side meshing algorithm Each segment side has new fields such as density type and ratio e Density number of segments of a patch opening side e Type mesh type can be uniform linear or bi linear e Ratio is the length proportion between max sub segment Rmax and the min sub segment Rmin If Ratio is negative value meshing along the patch opening side will be in an opposite direction With different combinations among density type and ratio users could create all kinds of patch mesh patterns Patch 1 Properties Patch Properties Label Bending Thickness 10 000 Membrane Thickness 10 000 Additional Mass 0 000 Per Area Material Group No Material Material No Material Mass Per
126. ame and the effect they will have on the inertia of the frame The Member Mass command from the Frame menu allows you to ignore or include the effect of member mass in dynamic analysis To specify whether member mass is to be included gt Select the member or members gt Choose Member Masses from the Frame menu Dynamic Member Masses Wiel x Ge gnore a C Include Cancel gt Click Ignore or Include as appropriate Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Section Orientation When analysing a three dimensional frame it is necessary to know the orientation of the structural section used for each member relative to the global coordinate system Initially Multiframe assumes that the web or direction of principal strength of the section is aligned so that the principal direction lies in a vertical plane passing through the member In the case of a vertical column it is assumed that the principal direction passes through the global x axis If you wish to have the section oriented at another angle referred to by some engineers as the beta angle you can use the Member Orientation command from the Frame menu To change the orientation of a member or members gt Select the member or members to be specified gt Choose Member Orientation from the Frame menu Member Orientation Angle 0 000 Advanced Align members C T axis C 7 Node D gt Global Axis Y axis Point 0 000 0 000 Flip Section Axes aia E Flip X X E
127. an be read by AutoCAD and other CAD systems Depending on what is displayed on screen the file will contain either lines representing the members in the frame or polygons representing the shapes of the sections that make up the members Normally lines only will be output However if you save a DXF file while rendering is turned on in the front window the more complex polygon option will be used The polygon option saves the detailed models of the members as 3DFACE entities This is particularly useful for exporting data to rendering programs that need a polygonal format to do a good job of rendering the frame When exporting a DXF files only active members i e not clipped or masked are included in the exported data In addition nodes and members will be labelled with their number and or label These will be written to the DXF file if they are visible within Multiframe To export a frame saved in DXF format gt Choose 2D DXF or 3D DXF from the Export sub menu gt Specify the name and location of the file to be exported using the Save File dialog The export of 2D DXF files is provided only for compatibility with older CAD programs which only accept 2D DXF The members in the frame are saved as LINE entities DXF files exported from Multiframe include the colours of the members by using the current colour settings of the Frame window Furthermore if the Frame Window has focus and the Member Legend is visible the members will be ex
128. an teeitiy s aeatacn teenies 219 ET 279 EE 278 EE 112 PNUD OES EE 103 Orienta OM secured AE 125 Brent OM esera N e 279 Page 343 Index IEN 278 RESTA eani 105 SE 278 Een 124 279 Joint and Member Number 103 eru eet EE 92 Joint Displacement ccceeeeeeeeeeees 196 224 J t Ee EE 104 279 Jome Eer 279 Tont BEE 133 Global Joint Moment 281 Local Joint Load WEE 281 Local Joint Moment 281 Prescribed Displacement 000006 281 Unload Joint eee 281 282 283 Jomt Loads Table cccciessatcieavitentcaeue 286 erte EE 278 VOM e EE 112 Joint Masses KEE 287 ett MOMENT EE 133 Joint Optentapon ceeccceeccesecceeeceeees 125 Joint Optentapon 219 Joint REACTIONS EEN 196 223 Joint Restraint 2 00 eee eeeceeceesee scene 105 278 VOUT SPN essa 106 278 TOMt Keele EEN 250 271 Jont KE 124 279 Jont Eet 182 Joints EKDE Ee 110 demetten 110 Jomis Tablespace a ie ees 286 K Keyboard echnoues 6 ee 158 L Learn Multiframe 0 0 0 0 cece ceeccceesceeeceeees 296 Learning Mulltiframe rossini 3 RE 24 Eeer 264 PRC TCLEN E ebe 264 IEN E 184 Mame ar E CG 293 Linked Joints Table 286 linking EE 110 Se CC I atonal rete sateen eee 111 IB EEN 295 Global Distributed 135 138 139 Global PO E 145 POM FOCE eanan 133 Jont Teen En EEN 133 Local Distributed 137 138 141 219 Page 344 Local Moment 148 Prescribed Displacement 000000000000 134 Se We DE ee 151 Thermal E
129. anel commands From left to right the buttons perform the following functions Add rectangle load panel Add 4 node load panel Add 3 node load panel Auto generate load panels Rotate panel supports Load Panel Symbols Toolbar Load Panel Symbols ol Is mi Bl La The Panel Symbols Toolbar is available when the Frame Load or Plot Window is the front window It toggles the display of some of the load panels found in the Symbols dialog From left to right the buttons show or hide the following symbols Panel axes Panel numbers Panel labels Panel support edges Panel load tributary areas Panel loads Panel corner edge loads preview Chapter 3 Multiframe Reference Patch Toolbar The Patch Toolbar available for adding patches rotating local axes flipping z axis and converting load panel to patches It provides shortcuts to frequently used patch commands From left to right the buttons perform the following functions Add rectangle patch Add N node patch Auto generate patches Rotate patch local axes Flip patch z axis Convert load panels to patches Patch Symbols Toolbar Patch Plate Symbols Mats Meat a da a OF Aa A8 A A The Patch Symbols Toolbar is available when the Frame Load or Plot Window is the front window It toggles the display of some of the patches found in the Symbols dialog From left to right the buttons show or hide the following symbols Patch visible Patch internal meshes Patch edg
130. another while you are working in any of the graphics windows It lets you switch to the 4 most commonly used views You can also use the View button at the bottom left of the window to switch to more views From left to right the buttons show the following views Front Right Top 3D Render Toolbar Rendering rb lfiva br The Rendering Toolbar can be used to quickly turn rendering on and off It also provides a shortcut to editing the lighting setup in OpenGL The four lights that may be used for OpenGL rendering may be toggled on or off or the lighting properties edited Toggle Rendering Light 1 On Off Light 2 On Off Light 3 On Off Light 4 On Off Customise Lights Group Toolbar Groups Group Set 1 H The Groups toolbar can be used as a shortcut for changing the current group set and allows you to select a group set from the drop down list The button on the far right of the toolbar is used to Add a group to the current group set Page 255 Chapter 3 Multiframe Reference Page 256 Clipping Toolbar The Clipping Toolbar available for the Graphic views it provides shortcuts to frequently used clipping commands From left to right the buttons perform the following functions Toggle Clipping on off Clip to Zone Clip to Frame Load Panel Toolbar Load Panel 4 C e E Gl The Load Panel Toolbar available for adding panels and rotating support edges It provides shortcuts to frequently used load p
131. are selected and well as all joints connected to these members Selecting Patches There are several techniques and commands that are used to select patches within a graphical window The most common way of selecting items is by using the mouse To select a single item gt Click on the item The selected patch is drawn in a darker colour A different colour for depicting the selection can be set via the Colour command in the View menu To extend or reduce the selection gt Shift click on an unselected patch to add it to the current selection gt Shift click on a selected patch to remove it from the current selection gt Shift drag to invert the selection in the selection rectangle To select a group of items gt Drag from left to right a rectangle which encloses the patches to be selected gt Drag from right to left to select all patches which intersect or are contained inside the selection rectangle If the rectangle is defined by dragging the cursor from the left to the right a bounding selection will be performed Only the items within the rectangle will be selected If the rectangle is defined by dragging the cursor from right to left an intersect selection will be performed Any item that intersects the rectangle will be selected Page 19 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 20 If shift is held down while dragging the existing selection will be extended with the additional unselected items A second technique for perfor
132. asking submenu commands are used to control the display of member in the frame Masking allows you to define which members are visible and which are invisible No Masking Turns off masking if itis on This makes all members in the frame visible Mask Grey Turns on masking and makes the masking mode grey This means all members that have been masked out will be drawn in grey Mask Invisible Turns on masking and makes the masking mode invisible This means all members that have been masked out will be made invisible Mask To Frame Turns on masking if it wasn t already on and makes all of the members in the frame visible Mask To Window Turns on masking if it wasn t already on and makes all the members that lie completely inside the boundaries of the window visible Mask To Selection Turns on masking and masks out all the members in the frame that are not selected This means the only members in the frame that will be visible are those which were selected Mask To Group Turns on masking and masks out all the members in the frame that are contained m the specified groups This means the only members in the frame that will be visible are those which are in the selected groups Mask Out Selection Turns on masking and masks out all the selected members in the frame This has the effect of hiding the selected members and leaving all remaining visible members visible Mask Out Group Turns on masking and masks out all the memb
133. ata is exported with a separate table for each time step each row in the table contains the data for a single joint e Nodal Database data is exported as a single table with each row representing the data for a particular time step for a single joint e DOF data base data is exported as a single table with each row representing the data for a particular time step for a single DOF Bitmap Image Bitmap export gives you the ability to export rendered Frame Plot and Load views to a bitmap file This is similar to Edit Copy Copy to Clipboard however the File Export Bitmap Image allows you to specify the size of the image to be exported the larger the size the better the quality To export the image gt Choose Bitmap Image from the Export sub menu Export Bitmap Width fi OF Height 611 Cancel Warning Export may take some time to complete gt Enter the width and height in pixels of the bitmap image to be created gt Click OK Note that the aspect ratio of the current view is preserved when you change the width and height gt Specify the name and location of the file to be exported using the Save File dialog Page 245 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 246 gt Click OK A bitmap image of the current view will now be saved to the specified file Navisworks NavisWorks provides software for real time walk through and inspection of large CAD models This is particularly useful
134. ative size and orientation of the sections in the frame You can interrupt the drawing of a rendered view of the structure by pressing the escape key Chapter 3 Multiframe Reference Plot Specify the precision to be used in the display of deflection diagrams in the Plot window which action if any is to be overlaid onto the deflection diagram and what scaling factor should be applied to the current diagram The overlaid action will be displayed as a colour on the deflected shape Red indicates a high value of the action relative to the rest of the structure while blue indicates a relatively low value Plot Colours Specify which colours to use for the various diagrams Customise Plot You can customise the display of diagrams in the Plot window to allow the display of one or more diagrams simultaneously This applies to both global and local diagrams To choose which diagrams are displayed in the Plot window gt Choose Customise Plot from the Display menu Customize Plot Flat Flot Hame Bending M Ma IT Sbe top T Mu M Sbe bottom Bir T Shy lett T Global Mx T Sby right IT Global My l Global Mz Moment Ms Moment Mu Shear Vu Shear Va Anal Pes Torque Tu Bending Sbz top Bending Sbz2 bottom Bending Sby lett Bending Sby right Shear Du Shear bs Anal So Comb Sx 5b2 top Comb Dy bas bottom Comb Du xtbw lett Comb Dy bw right Deflection Global Moment Mu Global Mornient Mu Sy T Ge
135. ave and sway can be applied be entering values for Linear Acceleration Surge is applied along the x axis with forwards positive heave is applied along the y axis with upwards positive and sway is applied along the z axis with to starboard positive Angular Acceleration a Angular accelerations can be applied These act around the centre of motion of the vessel the location of which is defined by the Motion Axes see below Roll is applied about the x axis with starboard side down positive yaw is applied about the y axis with bow to starboard positive and pitch is applied about the z axis with bow up positive Motion Axes The location of the motion axes with respect to the origin is defined by the Motion Axes The x direction is positive if the model s origin is forward of the centre of motion the y direction is positive if above the centre of motion and the z direction positive if it is to the starboard of the centre of motion Self Weight It is possible to include the Self Weight load case within the Sea Motion case The reason for doing this instead of creating a combined load case made up of a Sea Motion and a Self Weight load case is because linear accelerations due to gravity will be adjusted for any Rotation Angles entered To include the self weight of the structure in the Sea Motion calculation tick the Include Self Weight check box and enter the gravitational acceleration You will more than likely usually use the d
136. ay by using the load case items at the bottom of the Case menu The current load case is indicated with a check mark to the left of its name in the menu You may find the Result Layout command from the Window menu useful when viewing your results This command arranges the Plot Load and Result windows on the screen so that you can easily view graphical and numerical information at the same time Remember that the Symbol command under the View Menu will allow you to display the joint and or member numbers on the graphics in the Plot and Load windows This will allow you to refer to the text and graphics more conveniently In all of the tables drawn in the Result window you can resize the columns by dragging the lines which separate the column titles You can also change the text font and size used in the table by using the Font command from the View Menu Using the Numbers command from the Format window can control the format of the numbers displayed in the table On Windows you can Right Click on any column heading to sort or hide that column Select and range of headings and use Right Click to show hidden columns You can copy data from the Result window to the clipboard for use with other applications To copy a single number from the table gt Click on the number to be copied gt Choose Copy from the Edit menu To copy a column from the table gt Click on the title of the column to select it gt Choose Copy from the Edit men
137. ays a Minimum Envelope of all increments in the current time history analysis case Absolute Envelope Displays an Absolute Envelope of all increments in the current time history analysis case Time History Ctrl H Set the currently displayed time history increment Window Menu The Windows menu provides window specific functionality Cascade Displays all the Windows behind the active Windows Tile Horizontal Layout all visible windows across the screen Tile Vertical Layout all visible windows down the screen Arrange Icons Rearranges the icons of any minimised window so that they are collected together at the bottom of the Multiframe program window Editing Layout Makes the Frame Data and Load windows all visible at once This is useful when you are defining the structure and its loads and restraints Page 297 Chapter 3 Multiframe Reference Page 298 Result Layout Makes the Plot Result and Load windows all visible This is useful when you are examining the results of the analysis Calcs Layout Makes the Plot Load and CalcSheet windows visible This is useful when you are doing calculations for a given member Report Layout Makes the Plot Load and Report windows visible This is useful when you are reviewing a summary report of design calculations Frame Makes the Frame window visible and brings it to the front Data Makes the Data window visible and brings it to the front
138. bal patch distributed load Local patch distributed load Global plate distributed load Local plate distributed load Formatting Toolbar Formatting x Arial Wester qo HA Bezu plz The Formatting Toolbar is used to change the attributes of the text displayed in each of the windows in Multiframe It also provides shortcuts to commands for formatting text within the Report Window From left to right the buttons perform the following functions Font Name Font Size Bold Italic Underlined Colour Align Left Align Centre Align Right Bullets Symbols Toolbar i 4 e A Be beoe THE The Symbols Toolbar is available when the Frame Load or Plot Window is the front window It toggles the display of some of the joint member and section symbols found in the Symbols dialog This toolbar also contains a button to toggle rendering of the structure From left to right the buttons show or hide the following symbols Joint numbers Joint labels Joint restraints Member numbers Member labels Chapter 3 Multiframe Reference Member axes Member releases Section names Section axes Legends Windows Toolbar im Fe fe MI 2 EI The Windows Toolbar can be used to quickly switch from one window to another From left to right the buttons show the following windows Frame Data Load Result Plot CalcSheet Report View3D Toolbar The View3D Toolbar can be used to quickly switch from one view to
139. ber releases Member End Springs Display a table of member end springs and their properties which represent semi rigid connections in the model Joint Loads Display a table of joint load positions and magnitudes Prescribed Displacements Display a table of joint load positions and magnitudes Member Loads Display a table of member load positions and magnitudes Thermal Loads Display a table of thermal load magnitudes Restraints Display a table of joint restraints and prescribed displacements Linked Joints Links a group of joints so that they move together in response to static or dynamic loads Springs Display a table of joint spring stiffness s Chapter 3 Multiframe Reference Spring Members Display a table of spring members Joint Masses Multiframe 4D only Display a table of joint masses Sections Display a table of sections summarizing the use of sections in the frame The table includes the number length and mass of each type of section used Materials Display a table of materials summarizing the use of materials in the frame The table includes the name group type and density of each type of material used Step Loads Multiframe 4D Display a table of dynamic joint load positions and associated tine series Load Cases Display a table of static load cases Load Panel Geometry Display a table of load panel data describing the geometry of the load panels in the frame
140. by a unique number You can display these numbers in the Frame Load and Plot windows by choosing Symbols from the Display menu checking the Joint Numbers check box and clicking the OK button Coordinates are changed by typing values in the Data window or by double clicking on the joint in the Frame window You will probably find it helpful to use the Editing Layout from the Window menu while you are typing in coordinates as this will allow you to see the changes to the structure as you make them The coordinates are displayed in a table in the Data window You can resize the columns in the table by dragging the lines that separate the columns You can change the text font and size used in the table by using the Font command from the View Menu while the Data window is in front on the screen You can control the format of the numbers displayed in the table by using the Numbers command from the Format window while the Data window is in front To change a coordinate of a joint gt Make sure the Data window is in front gt Click on the coordinate to be changed 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 5 00 0 00 5 00 6 06 0 00 10 00 5 00 0 00 10 00 0 00 0 00 oints Member Geometry Member Propertie a e ay gt Type in the new value for the coordinate Page 101 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe 0 00 0 00 0 00 500 5 00 7 10 00 5 00 10 00 0 00 0 00 Rigid oints Member Geometry Member Propertie 4 _ B Die gt Press the Ent
141. ces and displacements in the structure The forces computed are Bending Moment Shear Force Torque and Axial Force The corresponding stresses are also computed The displacements computed are the displacements and rotations of the joints and the displacement along the members as they deflect These results can be viewed in numerical form in the Result window or in graphical form in the Plot window Result Window Tables of numerical results may be viewed in the Result window Click in the Result window to bring it to the front or choose Result from the Window menu if the window is not visible If the structure has not been analysed since you made changes to it no numbers will be displayed in the window Chapter 2 Using Multiframe There are six tables of results that can be displayed in the Result window These are a table of joint displacements a table of joint reactions a table of member actions or end forces a table of stresses at the member ends a table of member details and a table of dynamic results Only one of these tables can be displayed at a time The results can be viewed from the Results sub menu under the Display menu to control which table is on display at any time The current table is indicated with a check mark beside the appropriate menu item You can also use the tabs at the bottom of the window The results for one load case at time can be viewed in the Result window You can control which load case is currently on displ
142. command Frame II Lem The member to be subdivided is selected Page 77 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe lt a E _ _ A continuous beam is generated using the subdivide command with six subdivisions Insertion of bracing in a frame by subdividing floor beams Frame II Members to be subdivided are selected After subdividing into two and drawing in bracing members Converting a Member into an Arc To convert a member in the structure into an arc gt Select the member or members to be changed gt Choose Convert Member to Arc from the Geometry menu A dialog box will appear with a field for the number of members you wish to subdivide the member into and settings for the shape of the arc Page 78 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Curved Member x Humber of Segments 4rc Size fe Radius y Height e C Angle S l z i Connect to existing ry aw gt Enter the number of arc segments to be created gt Choose the size of the arc using one of the three methods gt Choose the direction of the arc relative to the member using the radio buttons on the right gt Click the OK button Normally you will want the new members to connect with any existing members in the structure If you do not want this to happen uncheck the check box at the bottom of the dialog It is a good idea for you to test the accuracy of this approximation to a curve by generating arcs
143. constantly or linearly A global distributed load is a load which is distributed along all or part of a patch and acts in a direction parallel to one of the reference x y or z axes To apply a global distributed load to a patch gt Select the patch or patches to be loaded gt Choose Global Patch Dist d Load from the Load menu or short cut menu A dialog box will appear with icons to indicate the shape and direction of loading Page 139 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Global Patch Dist d Load Pa at Direction Magnitude Left Magnitude S Corner 1 Node 3 Right Magnitude Corner 2 Node 4 Corner 3 Node 2 Load Positions Left Distance Lx on 3 Left Distance Ly 0 0 Right Distance Rx op Right Distance Ry 0 0 V Use Global Projected Area Cancel gt Click on the icon which shows the shape of the load In a two dimensional view there will be four icons indicating the four possible loading directions In the 3D view all six possible icons will be displayed with the patterns in the icons showing the direction of the action of the loads Each icon has a pattern with lines running parallel to the direction of action gt Click on the icon which shows the direction in which the load is to act gt Type in values for the magnitude of the load at each end gt Select global or projected area in which to apply the load The axis of the load determines how the load is distributed along the patches With Global or Proj
144. ction components are displayed in the tool tips in these tables Caution Multiframe files for structures using local joint loads are not compatible with versions of Multiframe prior to v7 5 These files may be read into the older version of Multiframe but analysis of these structures may cause the program to crash unexpectedly Member Releases Multiframe allows you to use four basic types of members end releases These are members that are pinned or rigid at one or both ends If rigid they can transmit moments at the end or if pinned they cannot transmit moments To set the member releases gt Select the member or members to be pinned gt Choose Member Releases from the Frame menu A dialog box will appear with icons indicating the four types of member releases Member Releases x Member Releases e EE Cancel Joint 1 dont A RE Torsion M I M Mu Minor Bending hau IT Ms Major Bending IT Mai IT Fy ulal Px Page 126 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe gt Click on the icon that represents the type of member you require or gt Click on the individual degrees of freedoms to select which are released gt Click on the OK button When you specify the type of a member you have control over which degrees of freedom are released at the pinned ends of amember You can release any of the three rotations at each end of amember This helps prevent the problem of torsional mechanisms being created when a group of co
145. current load case in the Plot window Torque Tx Display the computed torque about the local x axis for the current load case in the Plot window Global Mx Display the computed bending moments about the global x axis for the current load case in the Plot window Global My Display the computed bending moments about the global y axis for the current load case in the Plot window Global Mz Display the computed bending moments about the global z axis for the current load case in the Plot window Page 291 Chapter 3 Multiframe Reference Page 292 Stresses Submenu The items in the Stresses submenu may be used to control which type of stress is displayed in the Plot window Bending Sbz top Display the computed bending stress about the local z axis at the top of each member for the current load case in the Plot window Bending Sbz bottom Display the computed bending stress about the local z axis at the bottom of each member for the current load case in the Plot window Bending Sby left Display the computed bending stress about the local y axis at the left of each member as viewed from Joint 2 for the current load case in the Plot window Bending Sby right Display the computed bending stress about the local y axis at the right of each member as viewed from Joint 2 for the current load case in the Plot window Shear Sy Display the computed shear stress in the local y direction for the curren
146. d Window This window is used for setting up the loading conditions you wish to apply to the structure You can also add self weight load cases and control whether member s self weight is included in static analysis Result Window This window is used for viewing the results of the analysis in numerical form It can display tables of joint displacements and reactions and member actions or end forces Results of any modal analysis are also displayed here in the form of a table of frequencies and periods of vibration Plot Window This window is used for viewing diagrams of the forces and deflections in the structure It allows you to view diagrams of the whole structure individual members joint reactions and joint displacements You also view the mode shapes for modal analysis in this window CalcSheet Window This window is used for preparing and evaluating design calculations that use the results of the analysis as a basis for design checks Report Window This window is used for viewing analysis details or design calculations when Steel Design is also installed Page 249 Chapter 3 Multiframe Reference Page 250 Toolbars You can use the icons on the toolbars to speed up access to some commonly used functions You can hold your mouse over an icon to reveal a pop up tip of what the icon does File Toolbar PSS 864 lah A Se SF The File Toolbar provides shortcuts to a number of commands frequently associated with W
147. d minimum plate bending moments about the principal axis for the current load case in the Plot window Moment Mmax Display the computed maximum plate bending moments about the principal axis for the current load case in the Plot window Force Fxx Display the computed membrane direct forces about the local xx axis for the current load case in the Plot window Force Fyy Display the computed membrane direct forces about the local xx axis for the current load case in the Plot window Force Fxy Display the computed membrane shear forces in x y plane axis for the current load case in the Plot window Chapter 3 Multiframe Reference Force Fmin Display the computed minimum membrane forces about the principal axis for the current load case in the Plot window Force Fmax Display the computed maximum membrane forces about the principal axis for the current load case in the Plot window Patch Stresses Submenu The items in the Patch Stresses submenu may be used to control which type of patch stress is displayed in the Plot window Sxx Display the computed in plane direct stresses about the local xx axis for the current load case in the Plot window Syy Display the computed in plane direct stresses about the local yy axis for the current load case in the Plot window Szz Display the computed transverse direct stresses about the local zz axis for the current load case in the Plot window Sxy D
148. d then paste the coordinates into the Data table in Multiframe First you would generate a continuous beam in Multiframe with the appropriate number of spans and then copy and paste the x column into the table in the spreadsheet Next write a formula for the y coordinate or height of the arch in the column adjacent to the data you have pasted in You can then produce the y coordinate for each joint automatically Page 331 Appendix E Using Spreadsheets With Multiframe Rise RC 1 Span 2 2 4 Rise Span 2 je This formula generates Worksheet the arch height The heights get generated inthis column You might want ta use a graph in your spreadsheet ta preview the arch shape ey ode SO ee ee ee Once you have generated the coordinates you can then copy the column of y coordinates from the spreadsheet and paste them into the y column in Multiframe Page 332 Appendix E Using Spreadsheets With Multiframe Unda RI Hedo Eita E Et FA Ctrl C Clear Select Add Section Edit Section Delete Section Section Colors Preferences m7 nmn 1 080 0 000 1 920 0 000 2 520 0 000 2 060 0 000 3 000 0 000 2 B80 0 000 0 000 1 920 0 000 20 Jm 18 000 1 080 Os M 0 000 This will automatically generate the correct geometry for the arch which will be displayed in the other Multiframe windows Page 333 Appendix E Using Spreadsheets With Multiframe Page 334 If you have appli
149. de coupled and thus only the diagonal needs to be stored In general a lumped mass matrix will give slightly lower natural frequency values than an analysis using the distributed mass matrix Analysis Type For most structures the 2D Analysis button will be inactive and thus greyed out The user will only be able to choose a 2D Analysis if either e the structure including all loads and joint displacements are entirely in the x y plane or e the structure is entirely in the x y plane and only Dynamic or Seismic analysis is chosen The advantages of analysing in 2D include decreased analysis time combined with decreased memory requirements and the ability to study only the in plane natural modes when using modal analysis Page 194 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Note If you are unsure of what values to choose leave the current default values which will be suitable for most analyses Also see Modal Results on page 224 Time History Analysis Time History Analysis Concepts Once you have defined your dynamic loads or accelerations you can perform a Time History analysis to compute the response of the structure at each of the time steps you have specified Time History Analysis Procedures To perform a Time History Analysis e Select Time History Analysis from the Analyse menu This command is only available after your have defined Dynamic Loads such as Time Force series or Seismic acceleration series The following
150. dio button beside the axis name The drawing in the bottom right hand corner of the dialog will display your selection Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Finally you can choose which acceleration series from the Load Library will be applied to which axes by choosing the appropriate names from the pop up menus Choosing the Time Step The time step you choose for a time history analysis At has the effect of including or excluding the effects of natural frequencies modes in response of the structure As At increases more modes are effectively excluded from the response behaviour as the time step As a general rule if T 1s the period of the longest mode that is to be included in the response calculation you should choose At such that At lt 0 1 T Rayleigh Damping Factors When adding either a dynamic or seismic case the user can specify if proportional damping is to be used in the analysis To do so you need to specify non zero values for the Rayleigh damping coefficients Alpha and Beta If you are uncertain as to how to find the appropriate value for Alpha and Beta please refer to texts on the subject Finite Element Procedures in Engineering Analysis Bathe Klaus J rgen 1982 by Prentice Hall Inc pages 528 531 is a good reference Proportional damping assumes that the damping matrix is proportional to the mass and stiffness matrices M and K respectively C aM pK To calculate these values you need to look at the first two modes a
151. displacement Global Distributed Load Multiframe allows loading on members to be applied relative to the direction of the global coordinate system or relative to the direction of the local member coordinate system Loads that are applied at an angle to either of these systems can be modelled by using vector components of the loads A global distributed load is a load which is distributed along all or part of a member and acts in a direction parallel to one of the reference x y or z axes To apply a global distributed load to a member gt Select the member or members to be loaded gt Choose Global Dist d Load from the Load menu or short cut menu A dialog box will appear with icons to indicate the shape and direction of loading Page 135 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Global Distributed Load x Shape Left Magnitude 1 000 kipelt Right Magnitude Ii 000 Kips tt Lett Distance o OO D Right Distance 0 000 nv f Aves Global Projected f Local Cancel gt Click on the icon which shows the shape of the load In a two dimensional view there will be four icons indicating the four possible loading directions In the 3D view all six possible icons will be displayed with the patterns in the icons showing the direction of the action of the loads Each icon has a pattern with lines running parallel to the direction of action gt Click on the icon which shows the direction in which the load is to act gt T
152. e e Vertical Automatically selects all the vertical members columns in the frame e Sloping Automatically selects all the vertical members columns in the frame Member Actions Allows you to search through the structure to find members with actions deflections or stresses in excess of limits you may enter For example you could find and select all of the members with a tensile stress greater than 21ksi Load Panels Allows you to select a load panel by number Load Panel Labels Selecting a load panel using the load panel label Chapter 3 Multiframe Reference Patches Allows you to select a patch by number Patch Labels Selecting a patch using the patch label Plates Allows you to select a plate by number Plate Labels Selecting a plate using the plate label Design Members Allows you to select a design member by number Design Member Labels Selecting a design member using the member label Groups Selects the members in specified groups From Window The From Window menu contains commands to select members in the current window based upon the selection in another window e Frame Selects the members selected in the Frame Window e Load Selects the members selected in the Load Window e Plot Selects the members selected in the Plot Window e Data Selects the members selected in the Data Window e Result Selects the members selected in the Result Window Geometry Menu The Geom
153. e bottom of the Plot window To turn on and off the display of symbols gt Choose Symbols from the Display menu Symbol Display E BS x Joint Member Flot T Numbers T Numbers T Got Values Jh Restraints Labels IT Force Reactions I Joints Lengths Moment Reactions I Releases CES e Masses IW Releases Reaction Shading h Links Shrink Members Jh Original Structure IT Labels Masses JW Plot Legend IY Axes Iw offsets h Show Enveloped Cases a Type T Release Label E Type e Design Member Jh Design Members Labels T Numbers BR Length Section IT Names Group Name Shapes Axes Loads W Loads IY Load values IM Load Shading Jh Self weights Design IT Lateral Restraints Restraint Labels IT Column Restraints E Grade L Colour Members Erou Je Legend Loads Default Colour K ltsosrd Jh Save Settings Cancel If you turn on the display of Plot values the labels on the Plot diagrams for axial force and stress diagrams will have a T amp C marked on the axes to indicate which is Tension and which is Compression The settings in this dialog can be stored and used when next starting Multiframe by choosing the Save Settings option at the bottom of the dialog Reactions The reactions at joints restrained by Joint Restraints Springs or Prescribed Displacements can be displayed in the Plot window when
154. e following dialog will be displayed Current Pressure Coefficients Facing wall A Side wall 5 Cross current roof R Cu urrent Angle alpha deg l gt 10 Leeward wall L Up current slope U Down current slope D Enter values of pressure coefficient for each of the sides of your structure as described in the diagram For sloping sides it is possible to define different pressure coefficients for varying angles of slope Page 173 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Copy settings from previous Water Current Load Case If you have already defined a water current load case it is possible to copy the settings from that load case by ticking the check box at the bottom of the add Water Current load case dialog Member Water Current Shielding Factor Edit the member water current shielding factor to account for any shielding within the structure One or more shielding factors can be changed at the same time by selecting multiple members To edit the member water current shielding factor gt Select one or more members gt Choose Member Water Current Shielding Factor from the Case menu The following dialog will be displayed Water Current Shielding Factor Shielding Factor 1 000 Member Water Current Factors The automatically calculated member water current factors for each individual member can be edited via the Member Water Current Factors dialog To edit the member water current factors gt Select
155. e Coefficients It is possible to display the Load Panel and Patch wind pressure coefficients directly on to the panel patch that they refer to To do this gt Choose Symbols from the Display menu Page 171 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 172 gt Select Pressure Coeff from either the Panel or Patch group To view the value clearly you may have to turn off the panel patch loads and any other labels Water Current Load Case Multiframe 3D allows you to add a Water Current load case which automates the adding of fluid loads from a defined to direction to the whole structure To create a Water Current Load Case gt Choose Water Current from the Add Case menu in the Case menu A dialog will be displayed which allows you to enter details of the current strength and direction and which variables you would like to be automatically calculated Multiframe converts this information loads on the structure Water Current Load case Name Water Current 1 Water Current Profile 8 Height 1 Velocity Height of water level 10 000 Water density rho 1025 000 Water Current direction theta 0 000 Indude Auto calculate Members Patches Load panels Cf shape factors Cp pressure coeffs Set Pressure Coeffs Copy settings from previous Water Current Load Case OK Water Current Profile Define the water current velocity profile as pairs of height and velocity values A height of zero 1s equivalent to the globa
156. e current working plane by selecting the Constrain drawing to working plane option in the Drawing Settings dialog When this option is selected the cursor will still snap to existing parts of the model but drawing will be projected back to the current drawing depth When drawing or dragging you can stop the cursor snapping to joints members and grid points by simply holding down the ALT key while performing the operation Dynamic Line Constraints By default drawing will occur on the current working plane which 1s the plane aligned with the global axes that is most normal to the current viewing direction and passing through the current drawing depth To help with the alignment of the model and to allow drawing out of the current working plane Multiframe uses dynamic line constraints When drawing a member if the cursor has snapped to a joint and the mouse moved in the direction of one of the global axis drawing will be constrained to occur along this direction in 3D space The constraint of drawing to the global axis direction described above is in fact part of a more general concept for automatically constraining the direction the mouse moves in 3D space The drawing direction can also be constrained to occur in the direction of members connected to a joint If the mouse is moved in the direction of a member attached to the joint then drawing will be constrained to the direction of that member in 3D space When movement is constrained
157. e depth of the member Member Self Weight Specify whether the self weight of the selected members should be included or ignored during a static analysis that includes a self weight load case Note that this does not affect the inclusion of member masses in a dynamic analysis which is controlled by the Member Mass command from the Frame menu Patch Self Weight Specify whether the self weight of the selected patches should be included or ignored during a static analysis that includes a self weight load case Plate Self Weight Specify whether the self weight of the selected plates should be included or ignored during a static analysis that includes a self weight load case Dynamic Load Multiframe 4D only Allows you to apply a dynamic time varying load to selected joints in the Load window Unload Load Panel Remove all loads from the selected load panels in the Load window Global Panel Load Add a pressure load to each of the selected load panels in the Load window A dialog box will appear which allows you to specify the pressure magnitude and direction A global distributed load acts parallel to one of the global x y or z axes Local Panel Load Add a local pressure load to each of the selected load panels in the Load window A dialog box will appear which allows you to specify the pressure magnitude and direction of the load A local distributed load acts parallel to one of the local x y or z member axes Unl
158. e display of your projects More information on VRML can be found at http www web3d org Multiframe Text Exports a file in Multiframe text file format See Appendix D Spreadsheet Text There are two types of text output Multiframe Text described above is best for input to a post processing program The Spreadsheet text output is a summary of maximum actions for each member in the frame and is in a format suitable for input to a spreadsheet such as Excel or Lotus Day Star Text Multiframe outputs a tabular summary of member actions in a format suitable for input to the Day Star Text AISC steel code checking program available from DayStar Software Inc http www daystarsoftware com The American steel library included with Multiframe uses a section naming convention consistent with that used by DS Steel Microstran Archive Multiframe supports exporting the Microstran archive file format version 4 While not all the features in Multiframe and Microstran are compatible the majority of the geometry topology and loading can be exchanged via this file format Space Gass Text Multiframe supports exporting the Space Gass text file format While not all the features in Multiframe and Space Gass are compatible the majority of the geometry topology and loading can be exchanged via this file format Chapter 3 Multiframe Reference SDNF Text This will export a file in the Steel Detailing Neutral File format SDNF
159. e displayed Page 214 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Customize Plot Flat Flot Mame Bending M Ma IT Sbe top T Mu IT Sbe bottom Bir T Shy lett T Global Mx T Sby right IT Global My T Global Mz Moment Ms Moment Mu Shear Vu Shear Va Anal Pes Torque Tu Bending Sbz top Bending Sbz2 bottom Bending Sby lett Bending Sby right Shear Du Shear Sz Anal Sos Comb S 5b2 top Comb Sx 5b2 bottom Comb Sx Sby lett Comb Dy bw right Deflection Global Moment Mu Global Mornent Mu Gs Ausl Tension Tensile Stress Axial Compression Compressive Stress Combined TI Ss 4Sbe top IT Sx S by left IT Ss Sbe bottom TI Ss Sby right Plot vie Ge Structure E Memb a re em El IT du IT dai Cancel gt Click on the name of the menu item you wish to change gt Click on the Member button gt Set the check boxes of the actions you wish to display in the local member diagrams gt Click on the Structure button gt Set the check boxes of the actions you wish to display on the diagram of the whole structure gt Click the OK button You can control the values associated with the colours used when overlaying an action onto the structure deflection diagram These colours and values are controlled using the Plot command under the Display menu To change the value associated with the overlaid colours gt Choose Plot from the Display menu Page 215 Chapter
160. e doing a dynamic analysis in 4D the member s weight is controlled by the Member Masses command from the Frame menu The default setting 1s that the mass is included A self weight load case can be combined with other load cases in the usual way The numerical values of the self weight loads are not displayed in the Data window These values will be updated just prior to analysis to ensure that the weight for any members you have changed are included correctly Self Weight Loads The loads for self weight are included in two ways Members which are vertical are loaded with an axially distributed load Wz acting in the vertical direction from joint 2 to joint 1 You will see values for this load in printouts or in factored load cases that are made up from a self weight load case Members that are not vertical are loaded with a vertical distributed load scaled to take into account the horizontal projected length of the member see Global Distributed Load above Because global distributed loads are applied in units of force horizontal length the magnitude of the distributed load must be scaled to take into account 1 OOIb TE ZU bft 10 feet 10 feet _j foot G feet Page 153 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe For example a 10ft long member weighing 100 pounds with a horizontal projected length of 1 foot would require a distributed load of 1001b ft to apply the correct self weight The same 10 foot long member with projected l
161. e e DEE 149 Load case Add Combuned 293 PUG Te 293 Add BE TEE 293 INGO St AU Ca siihecc cites those haieat tinh ttngie 293 Add Time History siicicnicieisciseken 293 Ber ek GE 293 Load Case Toolbat cce eee eeeeeeee 291271 Load EE 154 oad Cases Table E 287 Load LID EE 158 Eoad En EE 281 LO ad VOOlDAL EE 29 eer Load WINdOW ebe Ee Se 247 Loads EE 150 Global Moment 147 1s0C al POMS ise cee a a 146 local and global axes 297 Local Dist d Load ee 281 282 283 Local Distributed Load 137 138 141 219 Local Joint Load sissors 133 281 Local Joint Moment 281 Local Een EEN 148 282 Local Point Load eee eee eee ee 146 282 By reet EE 193 M E Eu 269 Mask Tree efeeegeee Ee ee 269 Mask Out Selection ccc eee eee eeeee 16 269 Mask To Frame eaa 269 Mask To Selection WE 269 Mask To Selection BEE 16 Mask To Window ccc cceecceeecceescceeseeeeees 269 IVI AS KANG eresi 16 266 Masking Sub Menu 269 Mass M trix KEE 193 ELE 110 Materials Sub Men 265 Matrix Stiffness Method eee 297 Maximum Actions ccccccecccsecceescceesceeeces 198 Maxim m Envelope secenek 294 Maximum Eege 333 Maximum Member Actions Table 288 Maximum Member Stresses Table 288 Maximum Sttresggeg 199 fent e 115 Component Type acsriesrenans 131 279 End Release eege eege 126 ETH 129 279 EaD EE 279 280 EE 219 IN VIDOES EN 103 TTS US sctatericeesstn ee lites betes Sacent
162. e for the magnitude of the load gt Click on the OK button There is no need to enter or signs for your load values The directions are determined from the icon that you select When entering positions of loads in the Patch Point Loading dialog it is possible to enter calculation expressions For example to place a load at the centre of the patch enter L 2 for the left distance and L 2 for the up distance It is possible to apply this loads in this way to a number of patches with different simultaneously The individual value of L for each patch is used to calculate the position of each load To remove the patch loads from a patch select the patch and choose Unload patch from the Load menu You can also double click on a patch to view a table of all the loads on the patch Only one point load is allowed to be added to each patch per load case Local Patch Point Load A local patch point load is a concentrated load that acts at a position within a patch boundary and acts in a direction parallel to one of the reference x y or z axes To apply a local point load to a patch Chapter 2 Using Multiframe gt Select the patch or patches to be loaded gt Choose Local Patch Point Load from the Load menu or short cut menu A dialog box will appear with icons to indicate the direction of loading Local Patch Loads Load Directions Magnitude iit All six possible radio buttons will be displayed pointing in the direction of t
163. e left distances Lx and or Ly of start position If you enter this in a load dialog this expression will be calculated for all the selected patches This means you can apply this load to a number of patches of different dimensions simultaneously You can also enter more complicated expressions such as 2 L 3 or 1 35 L 4 2 The variable L is always available and contains the length of the patch side the syntax of the expressions is the same as that used in the CalcSheet Global Patch Point Load A global patch point load is a concentrated load that acts at a position within a patch boundary and acts in a direction parallel to one of the reference x y or z axes Page 141 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 142 To apply a global point load to a patch gt Select the patch or patches to be loaded gt Choose Global Patch Point Load from the Load menu or short cut menu A dialog box will appear with icons to indicate the direction of loading Global Patch Point Loads Load Directions a to Load Positions Magnitude T kN Use Global Projected Area In a two dimensional view there will be four icons indicating the four possible load directions In the 3D view all six possible icons will be displayed with the icons pointing in the direction of the appropriate axes in the current view gt Click on the icon which shows the direction in which the load is to act gt Enter the position of the load gt Type in the valu
164. e linked group of joints is displayed as a shaded area in the Frame window The Master Joint in each group of linked joints is also highlighted using circle of darker shading Page 110 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe The properties of a linked group of joints can be edited by double clicking on the linked region displayed in the Frame window The linked joints are also displayed in tabular form in the Data window Choose Linked Joints from the Data sub menu to display this table or click on the Linked Joints tab at the bottom of the Data Window The rows of this table corresponding to the Master Joints are shown in bold Linked Linked The linking is defined for the global XYZ directions If you link two or more joints together in the X direction then they will be locked together for any movement in the global X direction The following restrictions apply when linking joints and to the restraints or supports attached or applied to the linked joints e Joints may be common to several groups of linked joints provided that the master joint in all of the intersecting groups is the same joint e Prescribed displacements can only be applied to linked joints that are master joints e Restraints to linked degrees of freedom must be applied to the master joint e The reactions in the direction of the linked degrees of freedom for a group of linked joint are computed at the master joint The compliance of the frame to these rules
165. e nodes Patch internal meshed nodes Patch colour fill Patch edge lines Patch axes Patch numbers Patch labels Patch materials Patch thickness Patch loads Plate axes Plate numbers Plate labels Plate materials Plate thickness Plate loads Menus Multiframe uses the standard set of Windows menu commands for File Edit and Windows operations It also has a range of menus for other commands Page 257 Chapter 3 Multiframe Reference Page 258 e File Menu e View Menu e Select Menu e Geometry Menu e Group Menu e Frame Menu e Display Menu e Patch Internal Forces Submenu The items in the Patch Internal Forces submenu may be used to control which type of internal force is displayed in the Plot window Moment Mx x Display the computed plate bending moments about the local xx axis for the current load case in the Plot window Moment Myy Display the computed plate bending moments about the local yy axis for the current load case in the Plot window Moment Mxy Display the computed plate twisting moments in x y plane for the current load case in the Plot window Shear Vxz Display the computed plate transverse shear force about the local z axis in x z plane for the current load case in the Plot window Shear Vyz Display the computed plate transverse shear force about the local z axis in y z plane for the current load case in the Plot window Moment Mmin Display the compute
166. e of bugs we follow a series of engineering and testing principles and procedures to ensure that Multiframe will produce results which are consistent with the level of accuracy and thoroughness a professional engineer applies to design work To this end we follow a development and testing path which includes use of structured programming techniques verification of the underlying algorithms testing of the computer implementation of those algorithms testing of real world problems in house and beta testing in the field at Multiframe user sites Structured Programming The best defence against bugs in software is to use structured programming techniques that have been proven to improve software reliability Without going into the technical details of our software development methodology we summarize by saying that we utilize structured code object oriented design data hiding and encapsulation and fault tolerant programming practices to enhance our software s reliability Multiframe is a complex software system of over 400 000 lines of code and we believe our history of reliability reflects the effort we have put into using reliable coding practices Verification of Algorithms When new design or analysis algorithms are introduced into Multiframe we first carry out testing on the algorithms on proven test cases with known analytical solutions These generally come from engineering texts such as Refs 1 to 3 These test cases will include samples whic
167. eR8 A Al B eS D s 6 tr B A S OE Ces a E E E T a Gow sett z lit V4 AD el zm 5 CH Ba oo geeieiafl A A AAAS NO RAB KOHN Jill VIPS lge RD sl Hood ales eege Zille a Opening Duplicate Multiframe allows openings to be copied in structural designing Duplicate command is available from the Geometry menu or from the Geometry toolbar To duplicate an opening gt Select openings gt Choose Duplicate from the Geometry menu or icon button Page 60 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe e Multiframe4D Frar File Edit View Select Geometry Group Frame Load Display Case Analyse Time Design Window Help Debug ar emc H sn abe B Be o a m KR fey D T R G ml a E vi l SEKR DN E a X i o Des ES A o EE a gt 1 Eal Y et 4 of oi ag Se P a ial eae ae Ell T a Y T a El 3 a y o j ala Hie ale E Hj c gt Kja fal a BE o A d Copy selection r Multiframe4D Fra File Edit View Select Geometry Group Frame Load Display Case Analyse Time Design Window Help Debug H Ax abe Ge EAE Om el GES BEER lk ED lt Dei ml a vi a EE B G al D dee l E DN Ki OK E a gt dik a Y E o aj lt CSN e H
168. eased by tension and decreased by compression P Delta effect The P Delta P A effect refers to additional bending moments that are induced in a structure as it deflects The extra moments are produced by the relocation of the loads which have moved relative to the original structure This is modelled in Multiframe using a Finite Displacement formulation This represents the change in geometry of a member by accounting for the rotation of the member from its original position Axial Shortening Axial shortening or flexural shortening models the reduction in the length of a member due to the curvature induced by flexural bending In most cases the effect of flexural shortening is small however in members with large bending moments it may be desirable to model the change in the length of the member The implementation in Multiframe only considers shortening of the member due to the moments acting at the ends of the member No account is made for the effect of loads applied to the member Page 187 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Tension and Compression only members Tension only and compression only members can be considered by a nonlinear analyses These types of members are removed or reinstated to the structure at the end of each iteration based upon the axial deformation of the member Analysis Parameters Nonlinear analysis in Multiframe is performed using a Newton Raphson solution scheme The user may control the solution process by ad
169. ect If you wish to remove the moments from a joint select the joint and choose Unload Joint from the Load menu Prescribed Displacement To prescribe a displacement at a joint gt Select the joint or joints to undergo the prescribed displacement in the Load window gt Choose Prescribed Displacement from the Load menu A dialog box will appear with icons for the various prescribed displacements Page 134 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Joint Displacements Joint Displacement Displacement 1 000 gt Click on the icon which shows displacement direction gt Type in a value for the displacement gt Click on the OK button Selecting the No prescribed displacement icon the first icon in the list will remove all prescribed displacements from the selected joints Prescribed displacements act in the local coordinate system of the joint to which they are applied Each of the icons represents a direction for the displacement relative to one of the joint s reference axes As you click on the icons that indicate the various displacements the directions of each displacement will be indicated by the radio buttons at the bottom of the dialog You can also click on the radio buttons to choose which direction you wish the displacement to act in A prescribed joint displacement affects the current load case only The properties of a prescribed displacement may be edited by double clicking on the icon representing the prescribed
170. ect the patch or patches to be loaded gt Choose Local Patch Edge Load from the Load menu or short cut menu A dialog box will appear with icons to indicate the shape of the load and its direction relative to the patch edge All six icons will be displayed in the direction of the appropriate local axes of the patch in the current view Patch Edge Loads a Load Direction Load Edge Left Magnitude kN im Right Magnitude 1 0 Kim gt Click on the icon which shows the shape of the load gt Click on the icon which shows the direction in which the load is to act gt Click on the patch edge which the load is applied to gt Type in a value for the magnitude of the load at its end gt Click on the OK button There is no need to enter or signs for your load magnitudes The directions are determined from the icon that you select The axis convention used for the direction of edge loads is shown in the diagram below Edge loads along the direction of the patch edge are in the local x direction edge loads parallel with the patch are in the y direction and edge loads normal to the patch are in the z direction This sign convention is used in the data tables Chapter 2 Using Multiframe A If you wish to remove the patch edge loads from a patch select the patch and choose Unload patch from the Load menu You can also double click on a patch to view a table of all the loads on the patch Global Point Load
171. ected areas the magnitude of a global distributed load refers to its load per square unit where the area is measured perpendicular to the direction of the load This means a vertical distributed load applied to an inclined patch will apply a total load equivalent to the magnitude of the load times the horizontal projected area of the patch For loads applied in patch local area the magnitude of the distributed load refers to its load per square unit where the unit is the actual area of the load measured along the patch gt Click on the OK button Note that when working in dialog boxes you can use the Tab key to move from one editing box to the next There is no need to enter or signs for your load magnitudes The directions are determined from the icon that you select When you enter positions of loads in the patch loading dialogs or the Data window you can enter calculation expressions for the position For example if you want a load to start at one third patch sides you can enter L 3 for the left distances Lx and or Ly of start position If you enter this in a load dialog this expression will be calculated for all the selected patches This means you can apply this load to a number of patches of different dimensions simultaneously You can also enter more complicated expressions such as 2 L 3 or 1 35 L 4 2 The variable L is always available and contains the length of the patch side the syntax of the expressions is the same as tha
172. ection of a patch To change the axes of a group of patches gt Select a group of patches to be changed in the Frame window gt Right click and choose Rotate Patch Axes from the pop up menu gt Click on an icon to change local axes of the patches Chapter 2 Using Multiframe The same technique is used to change the labels and colours of a group of patches by choosing the corresponding items form the pop up menu To flip patch normal direction by using the Flip Patch Axes icon in the Patch toolbar Flip patch z axis This will flip patch normal direction 1 e z axis regardless of node sequences so that they all move all patch normal to their opposite directions This is most useful when assigning all patches to the same normal direction To change the normal directions of a group of patches gt Select a group of patches to be changed in the Frame window gt Right click and choose Flip Patch Axes from the pop up menu gt Click on an icon to change local axes of the patches The same technique is used to change the labels and colours of a group of patches by choosing the corresponding items from the pop up menu Add N sided Patches amp Openings Multiframe allows n side patches to be drawn in structural designing Add N node patch command is available from the Geometry menu or from the patch toolbar To add a N side patch gt Choose Add n node Patch from the Geometry menu gt Click in anti clockwise order the N poin
173. ed the section types restraints and loads to the structure these will remain intact when you paste in the new geometry and you can immediately re analyse to determine the results of the new shape You can then investigate different alternatives by generating different shapes in the spreadsheet and pasting them into Multiframe One important point to note is that pasting the coordinates in requires that the joints in Multiframe are listed in the same order as the joints in the spreadsheet You may find the Renumber command in Multiframe useful for ensuring that this is the case A second point to note is that you can select just a part of a column or range of columns in Multiframe you do not necessarily have to generate coordinates for the whole structure Example 2 Generating Loads Generating the loads for a structure is often the most time consuming part of setting up a structural model For example if you have a structure subject to wind loads which depend on the height of the members above the ground there may be hundreds of calculations required to determine the magnitudes of these loads However you can use a spreadsheet in particular a spreadsheet s ability to look up values from tables to automate the generation of loads If a load depends on the height of a member you will first need to calculate the height of each member You can do this by using the Member table from the Data window to find out which joints are at the ends of
174. eeeeeees 252 e 295 Ehe 278 Frame Windows tee 247 G Gen RANG EE 81 82 275 Generate Toolbar eee 248 271 Generating a continuous beam ss0000000 84 Generating a curved member 85 Generating a multi story Tramen 82 Generating a portal frame cc ceeeeeeeeeees 81 Generating a regular frame csssseeeeees 87 Generating An Arche 327 Generating EE 330 Geometry Men 273 Geometry Toolbar 249 271 Global Dist d Load ee 281 282 283 Global Distributed Load 135 138 139 142 143 144 Global Joint Load eee eee 133 281 Global Joint Moment 281 Global Moment 147 281 Global KEE 289 Global KEEN 289 Eifel UR EE 289 Global Point Load eee ee 145 281 Eet 244 Or EEN 30 266 Group eege ee 278 Add Ce EE 278 B EE 278 E GE 278 Remove RE 278 ET erte 278 Group Set Add EE 278 RT EE 278 Eh GE 278 EE 107 Group Toolbar 253 270 Beki 107 CROWDS oe ee een 109 H FGI MeNi EE 295 Help EE E 295 IS Tee 7 I LO OEE setae tt tien ans ate 258 Microstran Archive les 236 SDN EE 238 Space Gass Text Piles deene d ee 237 Importo e Menu EE 259 Importing Load Data 159 oe ee EE 186 Installing Multiframe cccccceeeeeeeeeeees 3 Intersect Members 79 276 Intrinsic FUNCTIONS cc ce ceecceecceeecceeeceeees 181 Inverse Iteration crass sen ieee 191 Iera e EE 186 E une 158 J Jacobi method 191 192 ene ce ene eee ee AE mee Re E EA arr ee eee 281 AC 6 6 tee tae adn
175. eeees 258 Orientation fo Lal aaeenmnepe eet E pene cree tt 125 E E 36 Page 345 Osaka zasisan schon caste daviaeaGente Macihdimeicenetaalieaes 158 P PoE e UDa 228 258 BT EE 10 266 Participating Mass Rano 203 Participation Factors eiea 203 Eeer 262 eege 185 303 P Delta effect 0 186 303 304 307 Pinned J OU EE 125 leese 285 295 PEC OON eorenemee ee ener reser ree nen ae omen neers 285 Elan e 206 247 Plots Envelope EE 222 Plotting Envelope Cases ccccssssseeeeeees 222 POCA ANAING eera E 81 PRECISION wet crea 184 Kee Kee E 200 262 Prescribed Displ cement 134 281 Prescribed Displacements Table 286 Print Diagrams cccccccccccsessseeeeeeees 229 258 Print selected members 229 Pit SUMMA EE 228 258 Print MHElEHRE ebe Dee geiert 230 258 Siet 228 Printing Diagrams cccccccccccsesssseeeeeees 229 Printing Reports ccccccccccceeeessseseeeeeees 228 Proporre S ar 259 265 Q Quality Assurance 335 Quality eh 335 R Rayleigh Damping Factors eesnesse000000 163 EENS essare ee an 207 Reactions KE leita 288 Reana Se ia See ee 251 ING COs EE 261 Ee 308 recular e 87 Remove Design Member 278 Remove from Group sseseeeeeesssssssssssssee 278 PRCT Si esoe 16 218 284 Render Toolbar sesiis eae 253 Rendered lens Hesira a 17 Rendering Toolbar esana 270 FROMM MIDE EE 103 276 Reorder Gases en 157 292 EEN 295 R epo T nten 295
176. efault setting of g in the y direction Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Include Members Plates and Joint Masses By un ticking the checkboxes it is possible to exclude different types of element from the Sea Motion calculation Note that accelerations are only applied to Joint Masses in the direction that the Joint Mass acts For the Joint Mass to act equally in all directions enter the same value of mass in the x mass y mass and z mass fields when adding the joint mass as in the dialog below Joint Masses All three mass fields should be the same Not used in the Sea Motion calculation A summary of the Self Weight accelerations that can be applied and their positive directions can be seen in the following diagrams SB View looking fwd View from above SB side view Page 165 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 166 After clicking OK a new Sea Motion load case will be created You can create any number of sea motion load cases with different acceleration factors You should make sure that you have set all of the section types for the structure before you use the Sea Motion command Sea Motion Loads Sea Motion loads are applied and displayed similarly to Self Weight loads To view the loads on the structure turn self weight loads on in the Display Symbols menu Sea Motion joint mass loads are applied as joint loads Wind Load Case Multiframe 3D allows you to add a Wind load case which automate
177. egrees of freedom you wish to restrain If the combination of restraints you select is not one of the standard icons Multiframe will display the special restraint icon the last icon in the list After you have added a restraint to the frame you can change its properties by double clicking on the restraint icon in the Frame window You can also edit the individual degrees of freedom of the restraint in the Restraints table in the Data window Page 105 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Springs To attach a spring support to a joint gt Select the joint or joints supported by springs gt Choose Joint Spring from the Frame menu A dialog box will appear with icons for the spring directions Joint Springs Type Stiffness Ge Normal i O00 kipin C Tension Only Als C Compression Only D Global Ce Local Cancel gt Click on the icon which shows the direction in which the spring is to act gt Type in a value for the spring constant gt Choose the axis system of the spring gt Select the type of spring gt Click on the OK button Selecting the No spring icon the first icon in the list will remove all springs from the selected joints Selecting any other icon will remove any restraints or prescribed displacements with the same degree of freedom if any from the selected joints and replace them with springs The rotational spring icons each have an axis drawn through them in the 3D view that indicates the axis ab
178. ember loading dialogs or the Data window you can enter calculation expressions for the position For example if you want a load to start at one third span you can enter L 3 for its start position If you enter this in a load dialog this expression will be calculated for all the selected members This means you can apply this load to a number of members of different lengths simultaneously You can also enter more complicated expressions such as 2 L 3 or 1 35 L 4 2 The variable L is always available and contains the length of the member the syntax of the expressions 1s the same as that used in the CalcSheet Page 137 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 138 Global Panel Load Multiframe allows loading on panels to be applied relative to the direction of the global coordinate system or relative to the direction of the local panel coordinate system A global panel load is a load which is uniformly distributed along all areas of a load panel and acts in a direction parallel to one of the reference x y or z axes To apply a global distributed load to a panel gt Select the load panel or panels to be loaded gt Choose Global Panel Load from the Load menu or short cut menu A dialog box will appear with icons to indicate the direction of loading Global Panel Loads Panel Loads We eae y y x z z Pressure 1 000 kPa Iw Use Global Projected Area Cancel gt Click on the icon which shows the load direction In a
179. ength of 5 feet would only require a distributed load of 201b ft to correctly apply the self weight For this reason if you have members that are very nearly vertical and therefore have a very small projected length you will see very high values for the distributed load applied due to self weight Load Cases Multiframe allows you to create a number of different types of load cases to manage different loading conditions Multiple Load Cases You can apply up to 500 load cases to a structure at a time You may define some of these load cases to be factored combinations of existing load cases If you make a change to a load case that is used by other load cases the factored load cases will automatically be updated to reflect the change You can automatically construct a load case that includes the self weight of the structure as outlined in the previous section Initially one load case is defined titled Load Case 1 You can edit one load case at one time The current load case is indicated by a check mark on the appropriate item in the lower part of the Case menu and is shown in the lower left hand corner of the Load window and the Plot windows when two dimensional views are displayed If the load case is a factored combination of other cases it will have Combined displayed after the name of the case in the Load window You cannot edit or remove loads from a factored load case If you change loads in a load case that is used by a combined load
180. ent property of the member identifies what component within the frame that a member represents such as a column primary beam or a brace This information is used within the program help identify the most significant member at a connection This is in turn used to automatically compute the cut off distances at each ends of a member used in rendering of the frame Shear Area Multiframe allows shear area to be input and used in analysis Using shear area can be switched on or off on a member by member basis Page 131 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 132 To use shear area in a Multiframe analysis a member must have a section type that has the shear area fields defined Asx and Asy are the two fields in the Sections Library group that define the shear area for the sections local x and y axes where x is the major axis For all other sectional values y is equivalent to local member axis y and x is equivalent to local member axis z in the negative direction u The shear area values must be greater than zero and the member must have the appropriate shear area flag set gt Choose Member Shear Area from the Frame menu Shear Area File KX Use Shear Area Ok KA H vw M Du Axis Cancel gt Select the local member axes for which shear area is to be used in analysis Remember Asx corresponds to the z axis and Asy to the y axis The members that use shear area in analysis are indicated in the last column in the Member Pr
181. er key or click inside the Frame or Load window on Windows 0 00 Rigid 0 00 Rigid soot aad 0 00 Rigid 0 00 Rigid SE paeten aasa ao Fe r The structure will be re drawn in the Frame and Load windows to reflect the changes you have made You can repeat this process for any of the other joints in the structure You can use the Tab and Return keys or the arrow keys to move from number to number in the table or you may simply click on the number you wish to change Note that changing the coordinates of a joint so that it is the same as another joint in the structure will not create a connection between the members at that joint A connection can only be made by dragging one joint onto the other in the Frame window If you double click on a joint in the Frame window Multiframe will display a dialog that allows you to change the coordinates of the joint Changing the position of a joint will change the length and or slope of any members that are connected to it The length and slope of the members in the structure may also be changed directly The Member lengths and slopes may be displayed by choosing the Member Geometry command in the Data sub menu under the Display menu Page 102 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Simply click on the numbers to be changed and type in the new values The drawing in the Frame and Load windows will be updated to reflect your changes Remember that the slope of a member is measured in degrees with positive angle
182. er of options that control what happens when snapping to objects in a frame may also be specified gt Select the Dynamic line constraints option to automatically constrain the cursor to move along specified directions after snapping to joints gt Selecting the option to Show Snap Tips will display a tool tip identifying what the cursor has snapped to gt Enter the distance in pixels that the cursor will move to snap to a joint gt Enter the distance in pixels that the cursor will move to snap to a member Generally this should be less then the joint snap tolerance An important option for working with 3D models is to be able to constrain drawing to the drawing depth When drawing new members this will force all members to be added at the current drawing depth The cursor will still snap to points away from the drawing depth but the position of the mouse in 3D space will be computed by projecting a location back to the drawing plane defined by the drawing depth The last control in the dialog provides an option to lock the geometry and topology of the frame so that it cannot be modified gt Click the OK button Dynamic Line Constraints is a feature in Multiframe that allows drawing in any direction in a 3D view and for helping to align the model accurately When moving the mouse from a joint if the mouse is initially moved along the direction of one of the global axes then drawing will be constrained to that axis in 3D space Furthe
183. ers in the frame contained in the specified groups This has the effect of hiding the member in the selected groups and leaving all remaining visible members visible Current View Submenu The view submenu commands allow you to view the frame from different angles Front Orientates the view in the active window to the x y plane with z axis out of window Back Orientates the view in the active window to the x y plane with z axis into the window Left Orientates the view in the active window to the y z plane with x axis out of window Page 271 Chapter 3 Multiframe Reference Page 272 Right Orientates the view in the active window to the y z plane with x axis into the window Top Orientates the view in the active window to the x z plane with y axis out of window Bottom Orientates the view in the active window to the x z plane with y axis into the window 3D Sets a three dimensional view of the frame in the active window Viewing angles can be modified using the angle slides on the bottom and right hand side of the window Toolbar Submenu The Toolbar submenu commands allow you to make selected toolbars visible or invisible File Toolbar Makes the File toolbar visible or invisible The File toolbar contains common file functions View Toolbar Makes the View toolbar visible or invisible The View Toolbar provides common view functions such as Zoom and Pan Symbols Toolbar Makes the Symbols toolbar v
184. es dialog will be displayed that lists the groups contained within the current group set and the properties of the groups contained within the set Page 108 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Group Set Properties Exclusive Member Grouping W eg Groups A group defines an arbitrary list of members and joints It provides a simple way of selecting and interacting with the grouped members or nodes Each group has a name and colour that identify the group both of which are set by the user When a group is contained within a group set using exclusive member grouping the members with the group cannot be part of another group with the same set To create a group of members gt Select the members to be groups in any of the graphical views or the tables listing members gt Choose Add Group from the Group menu Name carcel gt Type in the name of the group gt Select the colour to be associated with the group Double clicking on the colour field will open the colour picker dialog gt Click on the OK button If the members are displayed using group colours the selected members will be displayed using the colour associated with the group The properties of a group may be edited via the table in the Group Set dialog Page 109 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Linking Joints Or Master Slave Multiframe allows you to rigidly link groups of joints together so that they move together in response to either static or
185. escending I I 1 A A A d 5 5 6 6 7 D 7 I 5 If you wish you could also add additional calculations based on the results to compute other design parameters and then sort based on the calculated values Page 337 Appendix E Using Spreadsheets With Multiframe Page 338 In Multiframe for Windows version 5 1 and later you can also sort directly in the tables inside Multiframe by right clicking on the column heading Summary Spreadsheets are an invaluable tool for all design engineers Used by themselves they can provide quick answers to difficult design problems but used in conjunction with Multiframe they can provide you with a greatly expanded range of design tools Next time you have a design requirement that Multiframe does not provide consider using a spreadsheet to help provide the facilities you need to solve your design problem Appendix F Quality Assurance Appendix F Quality Assurance This appendix describes the quality assurance processes used to ensure Multiframe gives reliable and accurate results Quality Assurance Many Multiframe users ask us how we know that Multiframe produces the correct results This appendix explains how Formation Design Systems has verified that Multiframe gives accurate results and what steps we take to make sure that each version of the software we ship is as reliable as possible Quality Principles While it is impossible to ensure that any software product is completely fre
186. et These variables are listed below The calculations can be saved to and read from disk or printed by choosing the appropriate items from the File menu while the CalcSheet window is in front The following sections are available e Calculation Sheet e Pre defined CalcSheet Variables e Section Properties Variables e Saving Calculations Calculation Sheet The CalcSheet facility in Multiframe allows you to prepare your own design calculations and evaluate them without leaving Multiframe The calculations can use any number of variables defined by you and can also access a number of variables from within Multiframe that contain the results of analysis and section properties for a member Calculations are prepared and evaluated in the CalcSheet window To make the CalcSheet window visible gt Choose CalcSheet from the Window menu CalcSheet pm Resut Comments ee Result of Comments can be Ty pe y our equations here calculation ty ped here The window is divided into three columns titled Equation Value and Comment Calculations may be entered into the equation column and when the expressions are evaluated the results will be displayed in the Value column The Comment column may be used by you for entering any information that is relevant to the line on which it is entered The Comment column is especially useful for entering the units for the results of calculations you carry out Page 227 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe
187. etry menu provides functions for creating and editing the geometry of a frame Add Member Insert Add a member to the structure in the Frame window Press the mouse button to position the first joint of the member and drag to the position of the second joint and release the button Windows users have the option of just clicking on the first joint then clicking on the second joint position to draw a member Add Connected Members Shift Insert Add a series of members to the structure in the Frame window Press the mouse button to position the first joint of the first member and then move to the position of the second joint and press the button again Further members can then be created by moving to the end position and clicking the mouse button Press escape when you have finished adding members Page 275 Chapter 3 Multiframe Reference Page 276 Delete Member Delete Backspace Delete the selected members in the Frame window from the structure Add Spring Member Adds a spring member to the structure in the Frame window Press the mouse button to position the first joint of the member and drag to the position of the second joint and release the button Windows users have the option of just clicking on the first joint then clicking on the second joint position to draw a member Subdivide Member Ctrl B Divide all selected members in the Frame window into a number of equally sized smaller members Convert Member to A
188. eward Wall L Down Current Slope D Side Wall 5 CC Cross Current Roof R on urrent User Coefficient 1 000 Apply to all Water Current load cases The wall roof type for the selected patch is indicated by the radio buttons and diagram If Multiframe has incorrectly identified a wall it is possible to overwrite the selection by clicking one of the other wall types If the External Pressure coefficient selection is set to Calculated the value of Cpe will be automatically updated Load Panel Water Current Factors The load panel water current factors can be edited via the load panel water current factors dialog To edit the load panel water current factors gt Select one or more load panels gt Choose Load Panel Water Current Factors from the Case menu Page 175 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 176 A similar dialog to the Patch Water Current Factors will be displayed Display Load Panel Patch Water Current Pressure Coefficients It is possible to display the Load Panel and Patch water current pressure coefficients directly on to the panel patch that they refer to To do this gt Choose Symbols from the Display menu gt Select Pressure Coeff from either the Panel or Patch group To view the value clearly you may have to turn off the panel patch loads and any other labels Buoyancy Load Case Multiframe allows you to add a Buoyancy load case which automates the applying of fluid buoyancy loads
189. f the frame are relative to the global axes as usual To create a Seismic Load Case gt Select Seismic from the Add Load Case sub menu under the Case menu A dialog will appear allowing you to enter the name and number and duration of time steps acceleration series to be applied and the direction of the acceleration Seismic Load case Dis EN Cancel DK Hame Seismic Case 1 Eanes Da Morth KOBE North South D No of steps H U i Up KOBE Vertical sl Start time 0 0 seconds Step size ia 0 SES E ast KOBE East West End time 0 100 seconds Calculate Envelope Cases Eiet Step fi d Lash Sten fi D KOBE Vertical up Ages North is jo degrees from v Morth aye C ve KOBE Morth South d e Up Foo KOBE East West East East CG aye Top SC Rayleigh D amping Alpha Jung 8 Beta om gt Enter the name of the load case gt Enter the number of time steps to perform gt Enter the duration of each time step Multiframe will display the total duration of the analysis below these values gt Select the orientation of the axes along which the ground acceleration will be applied The normal convention for these axes 1s to label them North East and Up for the three directions You can specify the orientation of the North axis relative to the global x axis by entering an angle counter clockwise about the y axis in degrees from the x axis You can also reverse the direction of any of the load axes by choosing the appropriate ra
190. fined by dragging the cursor from right to left an intersect selection will be performed Any item that intersects the rectangle will be selected If shift is held down while dragging the existing selection will be extended with the additional unselected items A second technique for performing a drag selection is to use a line selection When the line selection tool is chosen the user drags the end of a straight line across the screen All openings that intersect this line and all joints connected to these openings are selected Select Patch Edges There are many techniques and commands that are used to selecting patch edges like selecting a patch edge within a graphical window The most common way of selecting items 1s by using the mouse To select a single patch edge gt Click the area inside the patch edge The selected patch edge is drawn with the current selection colour to make it appear highlighted A different colour for drawing the selection can be set via the Colour command in the View menu To extend or reduce the selection gt Shift click on an unselected patch edge to add it to the current selection gt Shift click on a selected patch edge to remove it from the current selection gt Shift drag to invert the selection in the selection rectangle To select a group of items gt Drag from left to right a rectangle which encloses the patch edges to be selected gt Drag from right to left to select all patch edges which inter
191. fined in the Sections Library see Adding a Material below To specify the material for a member gt Select the member or members to be specified gt Choose Member Material from the Frame menu A dialog box will appear with a list of the groups and materials available in the Sections Library Member Material Group Material Steel AS3679 AS3679 250 Steel AS36738 AS3679 300 Steel AS1163 AS3679 350 Steel AS 1594 AS3679 400 Concrete AS3600 AS3679 300PLUS gt Click on the name of the group you wish to choose from gt Click on the name of the material you wish to choose gt Click the OK button A material does not need to be assigned to members With older versions of the sections library the material properties required for analysis are stored with the sections In this situation if no material 1s assigned to a member then the material properties stored with the sections will be used For updated libraries that contain groups of materials a material will be associated with each of the sections and this will be used as the default material for a member and is assigned to the member when the section type is selected Note that if a material has already been allocated to a member then the material is not re assigned when the section type is modified The materials associated with the members can be displayed in the Frame window by using Member Legend to display members according to material Patch Orthotropic Mater
192. ftware to practicing engineers and having them use it on design work in progress to determine its reliability for actual design use These beta testers provide us with feedback on the reliability and accuracy of the program as well as its useability and suitability for everyday work Once the beta test program is completed and all testers are happy with the program we begin shipping the commercial version Version Control Each new version of Multiframe displays a version number indicating the version and the date the software was first shipped If the version is a development alpha test or beta test release the version number may also include a letter and number suffix indicating the type and number of the release A development version is usually only for internal use and is a very early demonstration of a possible new product or feature It is highly experimental and not reliable An alpha release is a first public release of a program for initial testing and comment it is not reliable A beta release is a final test version of the program released for field testing prior to commercial release It is mostly reliable but may contain some bugs A commercial release is a completed debugged program reliable and ready for professional use For example 1 0d1 The first development release of version 1 0 1 5a2 The second alpha test release of version 1 5 1 6b2 The second beta test release of version 1 6 1 64 A commercial release of version 1 64 B
193. gn Before closing a dialog box will appear asking whether you wish to save the current design If you select Yes the current design will be saved to the disk Save Ctrl S Save work so far with the same name you saved with last time Save As Save work so far in a file with a new name If the CalcSheet window is in front this will save the current calculations in a file Otherwise it will save the structure Import See Import Submenu Export See Export Submenu Open Library Multiframe4D The Open Library command provides a submenu which allows the user to open a Sections Library or Load Library Open Sections Library Multiframe2D and 3D This command opens a Sections Library Page Setup Set up the printer for printing Print Summary Print out the data for the frame and results of the analysis Print Diagrams Print out member diagrams for the selected members in the Plot window Print Window Print the contents of the front window on the screen Chapter 3 Multiframe Reference Properties The Properties command allows you to save project and designer information with your file This information will also appear at the top of your printed reports The Properties dialog also contains two additional pages that display properties of the file and statistics about the frame Exit Leave Multiframe and go back to the Desktop If you have any work unsaved Multiframe will prompt you to save any c
194. grids can be used to directly edit some properties if the individual grids that make up the structural grid The behaviour and display of each grid can be controlled individually As with the drawing grid if you want to have the joints automatically align to a grid but do not want to see the grid simply unselect the Visible button before clicking OK Similarly you can select the Visible to have the grid displayed as a visual guide but unselect the Snap to disable the automatic alignment with the grid Page 31 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Adding a Grid To add a new grid gt Click on the Add button The Structural Grid dialog is displayed which is used to define the properties of the new grid Mame Floor 4 Plane fe x Position fr fis ft cy C wr Grid Lines A Positions z Positions Number of lines Hu Position Spacing Label ere o 000 0 000 PPTTTETTETTETTTEEETEETETEEETETETETETETETETETTETTT T TTEETTTTETEETTETEETEETETETET TETETETETEEETETTETTETTTETETT Ce Sin Si W Labels M Visible JW Snap Cancel gt Enter the name of the grid gt Choose orientation of the grid by selecting a plane gt Specify the position of the grid by setting the location of the grid along the axis perpendicular to the plane of the grid gt For each of the two directions in the plane of the grid specify the number of grid line and there location gt Click the OK button Editing a Grid To edit an existing grid
195. gt Select the row in the table of grids corresponding to the grid to be edited Alternatively just a cell in this row can be selected gt Click on the Edit button The Structural Grid dialog is displayed which is used to modify the properties of the grid see above Page 32 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Deleting a Grid To delete an existing grid gt Select the rows in the table of grids corresponding to the grids to be deleted gt Click on the Delete button You will be prompted to confirm that you wish to delete the selected grids Duplicating a Grid To edit an existing grid gt Select the rows in the table of grids corresponding to the grids to be duplicated gt Click on the Duplicate button Duplicate Grid xX Number of Times i Spacing f O00 ft gt Enter the number of times to duplicate the grids gt Enter the distance to increment the position of the duplicated grids gt Click the OK button Drawing Depth When you draw in a two dimensional view it is necessary to specify the depth at which you are drawing For example when drawing in the Top view the y coordinate must be specified for any members drawn To change the current drawing depth gt Choose Drawing Depth from the View menu A dialog box will appear with the current depth selected Depth im y 0 000 ft z 0 000 ft Cancel Type in a new value for the depth and click OK to set the new depth Snapping to J
196. h independently examine the various degrees of freedom Mx bending My bending Axial tension etc followed by examples which superimpose the effects of multiple degrees of freedom These simple test cases are performed for structures aligned with the principal axes as well as those rotated to arbitrary angles Testing of Implementation Once the basic algorithms have been proven correct testing is then carried out on more complex sample problems to which a solution has already been established using a proven analysis program These results may either come from structural engineering texts such as Refs 1 to 3 as well as from other results carried out by Formation Design Systems or other engineers using other software products such as SAP Nastran etc Testing of Upgrades Page 339 Appendix F Quality Assurance Page 340 As each new version of Multiframe is released we perform a series of tests to ensure it functions correctly Among these tests is an analysis of a frame which exercises every different feature of Multiframe i e every possible member release section type and orientation load type combination etc At each release the results from this frame are compared with the results from the previous release to ensure conformance with answers which have been established as being correct Beta Testing Immediately prior to the release of each new version of Multiframe we conduct a beta test of the software This involves sending the so
197. hanges to the structure or calculations before quitting Import Submenu Import data from another program into Multiframe Multiframe Structure Imports the structure contained in an existing Multiframe file into the current frame Loads are not imported DXF Files can be exported in either 2D or 3D format This is to allow compatibility with older CAD programs that only accept 2D DXF The members in the frame are saved as LINE entities Multiframe will allow DXF file input from any CAD program We have tested with AutoCAD MiniCAD Microstation and Claris CAD and we expect input from all other systems to work also When reading in DXF files Multiframe will interpret each line or segment of a polyline as a member Any members that have ends within 0 2 in Smm of each other will be connected together Multiframe can read 2D or 3D DXF files compatible with AutoCAD release 10 and higher Multiframe Text Imports a file in Multiframe text file format See Appendix D Microstran Archive Multiframe supports importing the Microstran archive file format version 4 While not all the features in Multiframe and Microstran are compatible the majority of the geometry topology and loading can be exchanged via this file format Space Gass Text Multiframe supports importing the Space Gass text file format While not all the features in Multiframe and Space Gass are compatible the majority of the geometry topology and loading
198. hapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 114 If a member is attached to a patch it is possible to automatically align the member orientation so that it is perpendicular to the patch on the opposite side to the patch normal If you wish to align the member to the patch normal then select Patch Normal and then click Flip X X and the section will be rotated by 180 degrees If one or more of the selected members are not attached to a patch then a warning message will be shown If a member is attached to more than one patch ie it is on the edge where two patches join it will be aligned to the first patch detected You can also choose to flip the orientation of the section about its x and or y axes y Local Member Axes Joint 1 ma Joint 2 y Section Global Axes Axes Zz You can display the section axes on the members m the Frame window by using the Symbol command from the Display menu You can also show the member axes m this way Automatically Align and Offset Member to Patch The Member Align and Offset to Patch command will automatically align a member to be perpendicular to the patch it is attached to It is offset so that the bottom of the section is flush with the patch gt Select one or more members that are attached to a patch gt Choose Member Align and Offset to Patch from the Frame menu The member will be orientated perpendicular to the patch on the opposite side to the patch normal If you wish to align the
199. he 4 entry on the line is an additional field identifying the section in most cases this filed will contain the name of the library used by a 3 party application to store their sections The 3 and 4 entries on this line can be omitted if no section is available that corresponds to the Multiframe section A short sample file is shown below Multiframe Section Map File Version 1 Maps Multiframe Australian section library to the Microstan Asw library X UB 610UB125 610UB125 ASW UB 610UB113 610UB113 ASW UB 610UB101 610UB101 ASW UB 530UB92 4 530UB92 4 ASW UB 530UB82 0 530UB82 0 ASW These files can be easily generated or modified using spreadsheet applications that can save the spreadsheet in a suitable text format Microsoft Excel allows files to be save in either tab delimited or comma delimited formats Page 321 Appendix D Text File Format Appendix D Text File Format This appendix describes a neutral text file format that can be used to send data from Multiframe to a post processor or to prepare data for Multiframe either manually or using a pre processor Text File Format Multiframe has the capability of saving and reading files in a text format This facility is designed to allow pre and post processing programs to transfer information to and from Multiframe The file may also be used as a convenient summary of the data in a human readable format The format of a Multiframe text file is as follows A
200. he Case menu A dialog will be displayed which allows you to enter details of the hydrostatic load case Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Hydrostatic Load Case om 8 Name Hydrostatic 1 Height of fluid level 6 Sinusoidal Waveform 10 000 2 000 0 000 0 000 1025 000 kg m 3 Gravity g 3 807 m s 2 Fluid is inside the structure Only apply loads to selected items Model Type Cross section members only 3D Patch Load Panel Tributary area width 1 000 Include Patches Load Panels Define an internal point Centre of Gravity User Defined 0 000 m Copy settings from previous Hydrostatic Load Case Flat Sinusoidal Waveform Select either a flat or a sinusoidal wave fluid surface Height of Fluid Level For a flat fluid surface enter the height of the fluid level above the origin Any part of the structure that protrudes above the surface of the fluid will not have a Hydrostatic load applied to it Wave Length For a sinusoidal wave fluid surface enter a value for the wave length Wave Height For a sinusoidal wave fluid surface enter a value for the wave height Trough Co ordinates For a sinusoidal wave fluid surface enter values for the wave trough co ordinates Page 179 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 180 Wave Direction For a sinusoidal wave fluid surface enter the wave direction The wave is applied horizontally in the x z plane A value of zero applied the water cur
201. he Delete or Backspace key may be used to delete the current selection If nothing is selected and you are typing text or numbers it will delete the character to the left of the blinking cursor Ctrl The Ctrl key may be held down while typing another key to choose a command from a menu without using the mouse Menu items that have a key to the right of the name may be chosen in this way For example to choose Undo from the Edit Menu you could hold down the Ctrl key and type Z Shift or Ctrl You can hold down the Shift or Ctrl keys while clicking on something to add it to the current selection or remove it from the selection if it is already selected Holding down the shift or Ctrl while drawing a member dragging a member or dragging a joint will constrain the movement to be horizontal vertical or at a 45 degree angle Page 6 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Home Takes you to the top of the table in the Data and Result windows F2 function key Shortcut key to execute a Linear Analysis Using Views There are a number of tools in Multiframe to help you view your frame This section describes different utilities to display your structural model e View Directions e Rotating a 3D View e Zoom Pan Shrink and Size To Fit e Clipping and Masking e Rendering e Selecting Joints and Members e Selecting Load Panels e Selecting Patches e Selecting Plates e Symbols e Legend View Directions The View button in the bottom left hand corne
202. he boundaries of the clipping bars will be made invisible Clip To Frame Turns on clipping if it wasn t already on and positions the clipping bars just outside the outermost limits of the frame in each direction This means all members will be visible Clip To Window Turns on clipping if it wasn t already on and positions the four clipping bars which are visible in the current view so that they lie just inside the boundaries of the window Clip To Selection Turns on clipping if it wasn t already on and positions the clipping bars so that they lie just outside the maximum extents of the selected members in the window Clip To Group Turns on clipping if it wasn t already on and positions the clipping bars so that they lie just outside the maximum extents of the groups specified by the user Clip To Zones submenu The submenu contains items to select each of the saved clipping zones Selecting an item in this menu turns on clipping if it wasn t already on and restores clipping to the clipping region specified by the zone Save Clipping Zone The current clipping region is used to add a new clipping zone or to update the clipping region associated with an existing clipping zone Edit Zones Opens a dialog to edit the properties of zones Zones may be renamed and the region stored with each zone may be edited Zones may also be added and deleted via this dialog Chapter 3 Multiframe Reference Masking Submenu The M
203. he colour of the load by the Load type Load types are for example Local Member Point Loads Local Joint Loads etcetera Direction Display the colour of the loads by the direction the load 1s in Localised index When several loads are applied on one member their display can be set so that the 1 2 3 loads on each member are shown in different colours Loadcase Display the colour of the loads by base load case from which load originates Loading type Display the colour of the loads by the Loading type Loading types can be for example dead live etc Symbol Display x Flot Joint Member Numberz Jh Numbers Iw Plot values Restraints Labels Force Reactions Joints Lengths Moment Reactions vw Releases Axes Reaction values v Masses hg Releases Iw Reaction Shading Links Shrink Members Je Original Structure Labels Masses I Plot Legend Axes W Offsets M Show Enveloped Cases B Type sl E Type Release Labels Design Member IM Design Members Labels Loads Section I Numbers M Loads Names 8 l Length M Load Values Group Name Jh Load Shading Shapes rs Self weights Axes Visible Numbers Section Marks Labels Axes M Legend Support Markers Legend Load 4rea Markers Loads Corner Edge Loads Cancel Page 26 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Sections Member Legend gt E i29 7x5 0 CHS E 460U882 1 BH z
204. he forces and displacements All static load cases are drawn to the same scale Modal results are non dimensional You can exaggerate the scale of a diagram gt Choose Plot from the Display menu The Zoom Shrink Pan and Size To Fit commands can be used in the Plot window to change your view of the structure The rotation bars can also be used to change the view point in the 3D view The six force diagrams that can be displayed in the Plot window are Mz bending moments about the local z axis of the members in plane bending Page 209 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe My bending moments about the local y axis of the members out of plane bending Page 210 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe y Vy shear force through the local y axis of the members in plane shear Page 211 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Na shear force through the local z axis of the members out of plane shear Time History Case Step Case 1 Maximum View 150 on g D 1 120 Page 212 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Px axial force along the local x axis of the members tension or compression Tx twist or torque about the local x axis of the members Page 213 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe To choose which diagrams are displayed in the Plot window gt Choose Customise Plot from the Display menu A dialog will appear listing the menu items controlling the plot display and the actions stresses and deflections which can b
205. he leftmost columns The remaining columns display the maximum stresses within the members Member Details To display a detailed table of member actions and stresses for the member currently selected in the Plot Window gt Double click on the member to display its local diagrams Chapter 2 Using Multiframe gt Choose Member Details from the Result sub menu under the Display menu Static Case Load Case 1 Member No 1 Y 12x40 SS H Ms Ni Uu Va Px Tx vie Tt kip ft kip ft kip kip kip kip ft A oo om ooo o000 0334 Ooo 33 403 0 000 2 ous 1768 0591 0004 0334 0002 33 403 0 000 S 0250 3536 1183 Dm 0334 0002 33 403 0 000 4 os75 5303 1774 003 0334 0002 33 403 0 000 SJ nsm 7071 2365 007 0334 0002 33 403 0 000 BJ 065 8839 2956 0022 0334 0002 33403 0000 eg s This table gives actions and stresses at a number of points along a member The table is displayed for the current member you have clicked on in the Plot window The signs of the values displayed correspond with the diagram of the member and is controlled using the Preferences item see Plot Window Sign Convention below Dd ba The actions stresses and deflections are initially displayed at a number of evenly spaced locations You can vary both the number of points and the position of each point To specify how many points the details will be displayed at gt Choose Preferences from the Edit menu x
206. he local axes in the current view gt Click on the radio button which shows the direction in which the load is to act gt Enter the position of the load gt Type in the value for the magnitude of the load gt Click on the OK button There is no need to enter or signs for your load values The directions are determined from the radio button that you select When entering positions of loads in the Patch Loading dialog it is possible to enter calculation expressions For example to place a load at the centre of the patch enter L 2 for the left distance and L 2 for the up distance It is possible to apply this loads in this way to anumber of patches with different simultaneously The individual value of L for each patch is used to calculate the position of each load If you wish to remove the patch loads from a patch select the patch and choose Unload patch from the Load menu You can also double click on a patch to view a table of all the loads on the patch Only one point load is allowed to be added to each patch per load case Patch Edge Loads Multiframe allows edge loading on patches to be applied relative to the direction of the local patch coordinate system Page 143 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 144 A local patch edge load is a load which is distributed along the edges the patch and acts in a direction either normal or tangential to the patch edge To apply a local edge distributed load to a patch gt Sel
207. hile editing numbers in the Data window you can use the scroll bars to scroll through the list of data horizontally or vertically to find the number you want to alter If you wish you can use the Return or Enter Tab or arrow keys to move to another number rather than pressing enter You can resize the columns in the table by dragging the lines that separate the column titles You can change the text font and size used in the table by using the Font command from the View Menu while the Data window is in front on the screen The format of the numbers displayed in the table can be controlled by using the Numbers command from the View menu while the Data window has focus You can also double click on the restraint icon at a joint but not the joint itself to modify that restraint Grouping Multiframe allows you to arbitrarily group members together so that they can readily be selected and identified within the frame The implementation of grouping within Multiframe is hierarchical and organises groups into sets of groups or Group Sets This allows groups to be organised into sets based upon a common categorisation For example groups used to define floors within a building can be organised into a Floors group set Group Sets Group sets contain a list of groups and provide a means of organising groups into logical sets based upon a common criterion The grouping of members within a group can be set to only allow members to be associated
208. his includes the properties of the joint such as its number label or local axes Other symbols can be displayed to indicate other information related to joints such as restraints joint masses and linked joints Similar options are available for members and panels they may be displayed with their number label length and local axes They may also be annotated with their section names or shapes Symbols representing other properties that are related to the ends of the members may also be shown an include end releases and offsets Other setting available via this dialog allow the display in the plot and loads windows to be customised A number of options are available that specifies how and if loads are display and whether the loads are labelled with their magnitudes Similar options are available for controlling the display of reactions and labels in the Plot window The colour used to draw each element in the Frame window is also set via the Symbols dialog Members in the Frame window can be displayed using a number of colouring schemes that use different colours to distinguish members based upon their section section shape or label Grouping of members may also be highlighted by displaying members using the colour of the group in which they are contained A legend summarising the colours used in drawing the model may also be displayed The symbols toolbar provides a number of buttons to toggle the display of the more frequently used symbols P
209. his option requires that a version of Microsoft Word be installed on the computer Multiframe will automatically run Microsoft Word when it is required The View tab contains an option for automatically synchronising selections between the different graphical views Page 265 Chapter 3 Multiframe Reference Page 266 Licensing Preferences Presentation Reporting view Licensing Numerics Save Analysis Non linear Analysis _ Plate Analysis Design TT T wrs34o4 _ AIST Spec T Ion Ipspoen 45D Eurocode 3 LRFD AsS4600 Optimisation Enable Multicore Optimisation Analysis Configure Logging The licensing tab enables or disables the integrated steel design module To activate Steel Designer the user must own the appropriate licenses and have the correct access codes Multiframe will need to be restarted for the changes to take effect You can also control activation of the nonlinear analysis option is a similar way Multicore Optimisation Analysis Multicore Optimistaion will be enabled by default on systems that have multiple cores When enabled the Multicore option uses all available cpu cores to perform an analysis This will reduce the time taken to perform an analysis especially on models containing large numbers of plates Logging Logeing Options Enable Logging Log File Location CE Logging is a debug fu
210. hole panel patch Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Internal Pressure Internal pressure loads normal to the patch panels outwards from the centre of the model are applied with the user defined pressure coefficient Co Plate Load Panel Factors User Defined If you do not want to use the pressure coefficients as defined by AS1170 select the radio button labelled User Defined To define your own pressure coefficients press the button Set Pressure Coeffs The following dialog will be displayed Wind Pressure Coefficients Windward wall A4 Side wall 5 Crosswind roof R 0 500 Angle falpha deg gt Leeward wall iL Upwind Slope OU 0 700 Dowpaipd slope D 0 700 Enter values of pressure coefficient for each of the sides of your structure as described in the diagram For sloping sides it is possible to define different pressure coefficients for varying angles of slope Copy settings from previous Wind Load Case If you have already defined a wind load case it is possible to copy the settings from that load case by ticking the check box at the bottom of the add Wind load case dialog Member Wind Shielding Factor Edit the member wind shielding factor to account for any shielding within the structure One or more shielding factors can be changed at the same time by selecting multiple members To edit the member wind shielding factor gt Select one or more members gt Choose Member Wind Shielding Factor from
211. ials Multiframe extends its support to orthotropic materials for plates This will be done through Advanced material button in patch property dialog window To apply orthotropic material to a patch gt Select the patch to be edited gt Choose Patch Properties menu or short cut menu Page 121 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 122 gt In material group click Advanced button and a dialog box will appear with advanced material property Advanced Material Isotropic Orthotropic Defined by User Ey Poission s ratio Vx Poission s ratio Vy G 150000 290000 0 23 0 2 80000 Orthotropic Defined by Section Shapes Group None res DE JECTION Mee gt Select material type amp Type in values for the material gt Click on the OK button Note that when working in dialog boxes you can use the Tab key to move from one editing box to the next Adding a Material If the material you require is not contained in the Sections Library you can define the material by specifying all the material properties To add a material gt Choose Add Material from the Materials submenu under the Edit menu A dialog box will appear with a list of group names fields for the material s name and the properties of the material The dialog also provides fields to specify the type colour and a reference to standard that defines the material Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Add Material ew Materi
212. ich represent different buckling modes The minimum load ratio that satisfies the above equation is the critical load ratio This gives the elastic critical load AP It is very important to note that the reference loads define the distribution of actions within the structure the relative distribution of these action is assumed by the analysis to remain the same at all ratios of the reference loading Page 191 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe The accuracy of a buckling analysis is dependent upon the number of members used in you model Unlike many other types of analyses a buckling analysis requires that each component in your structure be modelled as more than one member Indeed a good starting point would be to model each component as at least 4 members Furthermore analyses should also be conducted using models with even more members in order to gauge the accuracy of the analyses When performing a buckling analysis it is also important to accurately model restraints and secondary members that resist the buckling of members In a linear analysis such restraints are not important but in a buckling analysis the out of plane buckling of a member can be significant and will be greatly affected by the existence of intermediate restraints Buckling Analysis Procedures To perform buckling analysis e Choose Buckling from the Analyse menu Buckling is only enabled when Linear or Nonlinear Analysis have been run previously The fo
213. ides some options for controlling how far the cursor will move to snap to an object in the model The Joint snap tolerance specifies how close the cursor has to be to a joint to snap to the joint Similarly the Member snap tolerance specifies how close the cursor has to me to a member or point on a member to snap to the member In general the member snap tolerance should be equal to or smaller than the joint snap tolerance By default these values are quite small but for most models tolerances of 20 pixels or greater can be used Setting the Origin Multiframe has an origin for its coordinate system indicated by a symbol of x y and z axes drawn in the Frame window You can control the display of these axes by using the Axes command from the View Menu You can also change the location of the origin relative to a structure gt Choose Move from the Geometry menu A dialog box will appear allowing you to enter x y and z coordinates for the new position of the origin SSS ft Selection y 0 000 ft Z 0070 ft Cancel This command is useful for creating structures that are made up of larger sub structures You can shift the origin to a convenient location prior to doing the drawing for each sub structure Adding a Member To add a member to the structure gt Choose Add Member from the Geometry menu gt Or Click on the Add member icon in the Member toolbar gt Move the pointer to the position of the first joint Press
214. ie ed 219 OTIC IITA ON WEE 219 PRG eds 2 EE 219 Rigid Offsets ccccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 128 SHC AE ATC EE 131 279 E 279 TGS eer ee 127 Member Actions 187 197 201 299 Member Actions Table 288 Member Buckling cc ceeeeeeeeeees 203 288 Member Component eeesesssssssssseeeeeeeee 279 Member Details secen a 199 Member Details Table 288 Member Diagrams ssseeeeeees 215 218 Member End Properties Table 286 Member End Springs ccccccessssseeeeeeees 279 Member End Springs Table 00000aeneeeenn 286 Member Geometry 102 Member Geometry Table 286 287 288 Member Labele 104 279 280 Member Load Global Dist d Load 281 282 283 Global Moment 281 Global Point Lodd EEN 281 Local Dist d Load 281 282 283 Local Moment arsena 282 Local Point Load eene ee 282 Member Self Weight 282 Thermal OAC EE 282 Unload Member Ae 281 Member Loads Table 286 Member Masses nnsnnensensnnensenseneesense 112 279 Member Material 0 0 00 ceeccesecceeeceeees 121 Member echter n 131 Member e KT CEET 128 279 Member Orientatnon cee eeeeeee 113 279 Member Properties Table 286 Member Releases cceeceeceeeeees 126 279 Member Self Weaht cesses 152 282 Member Shear Arena 279 Memper SESS E 198 Member Stresses Table 288 Member Toolbar cece cece eeeeee 249 271 Member RE 279 Me
215. ies of the frame You will then find it easy to move the appropriate bar to restrict your viewing to the part of the frame that is of interest to you Clip To Selection You will also find it convenient to use the Clip To Selection command from the Clipping menu This will position the clipping bars so that they lie just outside the farthest extents of the currently selected joints If you try to move a clipping bar past the position of its opposing bar for example move the bottom bar up past the top bar the opposing bar will be moved to maintain a small distance between the two This can be very useful when you want to move clipping from one floor to another or from one column line to another You can clip on the bar farthest from the direction you wish to move and drag the two bars together Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Clipping Zones Clipping regions can be saved within Multiframe and used to restore clipping to a predefined region This enables the user to quickly restore clipping to a particular part of the model A clipped region is stored within Multiframe as Clipping Zone To save the current clipping region gt Choose Save Clipping Zone from the Clipping submenu in the View menu gt Enter a name to identify the saved region gt Click the OK button The current clipping regions can readily be restored to a region stored as a clipping zone To modify a zone gt Choose Save Clipping Zone from the Clipping
216. iframe3D and Multiframe4D allow you to render the display of the frame in the Frame Load and Plot windows as an aid to visualising the relative sizes and orientation of the sections in the structure Rendering involves drawing a representation of the frame complete with web and flange details with hidden lines removed Rendering can only be done in the 3D view in a window and only on the Deflection diagram in the Plot window The number of segments drawn per member on the rendered deflected shape is controlled by the precision set using the Plot command from the Display menu To turn on rendering in the front window gt Choose Render from the Display menu A dialog will appear with the rendering options Chapter 2 Using Multiframe vw Render Members Jh Draw edges IW Use shading vw Use OpenGL Level of Detail C Low e Medium C High Lights Geometry Section scale ha E Rendered length i UU un gt Check the Render Members check box to turn on the rendering If you wish you can also choose whether to use shading on the sections and whether to draw separate lines for the edges of the sections The Section scale field can be used to exaggerate the sizes of the section shapes as they are drawn in the rendered view Because the size of sections is usually very small compared to the size of the frame this helps make the actual shapes more clearly visible The Rendered length field can be used to
217. igid body motion For example if you try to analyse a two dimensional frame using Multiframe 3D you may find the Solution doesn t make sense warning occurring This will only be a problem if the structure lies in a plane other than the Front plane In Multiframe3D version 1 6 and later 2D structures with 2D loading in the Front plane will be automatically recognized and analysed correctly This is probably because you have not restrained the structure sufficiently to stop the whole frame rotating about the global x axis passing through its supports For example a simple or continuous beam with pinned restraints will not analyse because it is free to twist about its longitudinal axis A om om oul GO The solution to these problems is to add a rotational restraint to one or more of the restraints on the structure Page 315 Appendix A Troubleshooting Restraints lo Restraints Restrained displacements Wu Wu z E E RSR Cancel K Gr GO od oul The same problem can occur with more complex 2D structures In fact a torsional rigid body mode of rotation will occur on any structure where the only restraints are pinned and all the restrained joints are co linear 2D portal with two pinned restraints is free to rotate about the global z axis 4 Check for unrestrained joints If you have a large number of members in your structure with member releases you may develop a situation where all of the members meeting at a jo
218. in the structure belong to Section groups are for example UB Channels Equal Angles etcetera Section Shape When this option is selected the members colour will be displayed as per the colour of the shape The legend will list all different shapes of the members used in the structure Shapes are for example Tube I section Channel etcetera Label When this option is selected and members have been labelled the members colour will be displayed as per the label colour The legend will list all different labels Type When this option is selected the members colour will be displayed as per the member type colour The legend will list the different types of members used in the structure Types are for example Tension only or Compression only Group in current group set When this option is selected and members have been assigned to groups members colour will be displayed as per the group they belong to The legend will list all different groups used in the current group set For more information on Groups and Group Sets please see Grouping on page 107 Component When this option is selected and members have been assigned to components the members colour will be displayed as per the component s colour The legend will list all different components Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Symbol Display KE x Plot IM Plot Values Force Reactions Moment Reactions Reaction Values Iw Reaction Shad
219. indow from the File menu The Print Preview dialog will then appear You can use the Titles button in this dialog to set optional header and footer information such as file name date time etc e Click the Print button to print out the contents of the window Data Exchange Multiframe can import and export data to and from other applications using a variety of techniques and data formats The topology of a frame can be exported to CAD packages via DXF files images can be pasted into reports via the windows clipboard data can be copied into spreadsheets or other applications animations can be saved to file and frame data can be exchanged with other analysis design or detailing programs via a number of different file format This chapter describes the various techniques and formats that can be used to exchange information with Multiframe File Import Multiframe can import a frame from numerous file formats Each file format that can be read by Multiframe is described in the following sections Multiframe Structure A frame saved as a Multiframe binary file mfd may be appended to the frame currently open within Multiframe The To import a Multiframe file into the existing frame Chapter 2 Using Multiframe gt Choose Multiframe Structure from the Import sub menu gt Select the file to be imported using the Open File dialog Upon choosing a file the Add Substructure dialog will be displayed Add Substructure Position OF
220. indows applications From left to right the buttons generate the following geometry New Open Save Cut Copy Paste Print Help Generate Toolbar E A D E D Gm sl ER rh The Generate Toolbar is found in the Frame Window and performs the same functions as the Generate command in the Geometry menu From left to right the buttons generate the following geometry Continuous Beam Curved Member 2D Portal Frame Multi story Frame Trestle Grillage Pratt Truss Warren Truss 3D Portal Multi bay building Drawing Toolbar eh fh E NW e kl em RS RH a Chapter 3 Multiframe Reference The Drawing Toolbar is found in the Frame Window and provides shortcuts to commands for adding members to the model and associated settings From left to right the buttons perform the following functions Add a Member Add a continuous Member Toggle snap to joints Toggle snap to members Toggle snap to member quarter points Toggle snap to user defined increments on member Toggle perpendicular snap to member Lock topology of model Constrain drawing to current drawing depth Geometry Toolbar Se 6hl KEMP zb The Geometry Toolbar is found in the Frame Window and provides commands to manipulate the geometry of the frame graphically From left to right the buttons perform the following functions Move Rotate Mirror Shear Shear Extrude Duplicate Rescale Member Toolbar Member P x mE A 2600
221. ine across the screen In this case all members that intersect this line are selected and well as all joints connected to these members The selection tool to be used when performing a drag selection is picked using the View Toolbar Clicking on the dotted square or dotted line buttons chooses the corresponding selection tool QQ AA ALE 5 a KW KW Subdividing a Member To subdivide a member in the structure gt Select the member or members to be subdivided gt Choose Subdivide Member from the Geometry menu Chapter 2 Using Multiframe A dialog box will appear with a field for the number of members you wish to subdivide the member into and a table listing the lengths of the new members Subdivide Member Cancel 3 h Connect to existing iW Group as Design Member gt Enter the number of subdivisions to be created If you want the member to be subdivided evenly leave the table of lengths unchanged otherwise click in the table and change the length or proportion of the new members gt Select the Group as Design Member checkbox if the subdivided members are to be grouped as a design member gt Click the OK button A number of new members connected end to end will be generated to replace each of the selected members This command is particularly useful for generating continuous beams or for subdividing beams for the insertion of angle bracing Generation of a continuous beam using the subdivide
222. ing i Original Structure IM Plot Legend M Show Enveloped Cases Member Jh Numbers T Labels Lengths AXES IW Releases Shrink Members Masses Jh Offsets Type Release Labels sl Joint Numbers Restraints Joints Jh Vv G Jh Releases G Jh m Masses Links Labels Jh Axes E Type Design Member M Design Members Labels Loads Section I Numbers Jh Loads Names E Length Jh Load values Group Name I Load Shading I Shapes Panel Self weights Axes Visible Section Marks Numbers Labels Colour Aces Members vw Legend Support Markers Default Colour Section Legend Load Area Markers Loads Corner Edge Loads Cancel Frame all a E Jo neg gecsloamnlsd Af 3 1 You can use the legend to quickly select members that share the same property or label For example if you want to select all members with a Tube shape you set the Colour scheme to Shape in the Display Symbols dialog and then double click on Tube in the legend Load Legend The colour used to display each load in the Load Window is set by selecting the colour scheme in the Symbol Display dialog available from the Display menu As with members various properties of the loads can be displayed graphically The following options are available Page 25 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Load type Display t
223. ing including videos can be viewed online Go to the Learning Multiframe page on our website for the installer download and or start the tutorials online http www formsys com mflearning Within Multiframe the Learning Multiframe training can be accessed from e Help menu in Multiframe e Start menu Programs Multiframe Help only when Learning Multiframe has been installed Both new users as well as experienced Multiframe users will benefit from working through this training document Continue reading e Chapter 2 Using Multiframe series of step by step instructions on specific tasks in Multiframe e Chapter 3 Multiframe Reference lists all menu commands available in Multiframe e Chapter 4 Multiframe Analysis explains the matrix calculation methods used in Multiframe including sign conventions etc Page 3 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Chapter 2 Using Multiframe After doing Learning Multiframe tutorials see Chapter Getting Started for more information you should now have a basic knowledge of some of the features of structural analysis and design using Multiframe This chapter presents a series of step by step instructions to the tasks covered in Learning Multiframe as well as other procedures you will want to know about The chapter begins with a summary of basic computer skills and this is followed by a description of the tasks involved in analysing and designing a structure using Multiframe These tasks fa
224. ing slings or lifting cables you should release both moments and torsion at the ends of those members If you release all of the sling members connecting to the lifting point be sure to applied a fixed restraint to the lifting point to prevent that node from rotating A lifting analysis is performed via the Lifting command in the Analysis menu A lifting analysis is in fact a special type of linear analysis and as such the results of the lifting analysis are stored as the results of a linear analysis If your sling members are set to Tension Only then a dialog will appear allowing you to take those effects into account during analysis You are no longer required to use a NonLinear analysis for Tension Only effects Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Some care must be taken in performing a lifting analysis as the additional spring restraints added for the analysis will also help to suppress structural mechanisms After analysis 1s complete you will notice that all nodes in the model will have reactions You should see normal reactions at any nodes where you have applied a restraint and at other nodes where automatic springs have been applied you should see reactions with a small value These small reactions are a consequence of the automatically applied springs If you see unacceptably large reactions at any of these nodes then you should use manual spring restraints and carry out a normal linear analysis Buckling Analysis Modal Anal
225. int have a pin at their ends In this case there is no rotational restraint for the joint and it will result in an infinite rotation displacement of the joint The solution to this is to use the pinned joint type Joint Type 2a fe Joint Type Cancel Alternatively you can apply a joint restraint with only the three rotations restrained Page 316 Appendix A Troubleshooting Restrain ts This will prevent the joint rotating but because the members are connected to the joint via a pinned end they are free to deflect and rotate as usual Page 317 Appendix B Analysing Trusses Appendix B Analysing Trusses This appendix describes how to analyse truss structures using Multiframe Analysing Trusses When you create a frame for analysis by Multiframe it initially assumes that all of the connections between the members in the structure are fully rigid that is there is full moment transfer across all joints To allow you to include joints which do not transmit moment Multiframe allows you either to use the Member Releases command to release the moments at one or both ends of a member or to use the Joint Type command to pin the ends of all of the members connected at a joint If you are using Multiframe3D or Multiframe4D you should use the Joint Type option However if you are using Multiframe2D you will need to follow the procedures listed below Although you can release the end moments for as many members i
226. ion Note The correct library has to be loaded before opening the structural model Else the members will loose their section properties and the following warning will appear Multiframe X A Some of the sections used in the structure are missing from the sections library It is best to close the model without saving open the correct library and then re open the model Joint Type Multiframe allows you to use two basic types of joints joints that are completely rigid 1 e they can transmit moments or joints that are pinned 1 e they cannot transmit any moment To set the joint type gt Select the joint or joints to be pinned gt Choose Joint Type from the Frame menu A dialog box will appear with icons indicating the two types of joints Chapter 2 Using Multiframe gt Click on the icon which represents the type of joint you require gt Click on the OK button The joints in the Frame window which are now pinned will be drawn with a circle on top of the joint to indicate that it is pinned a Frame Me Pinned joints are most useful in situations where all or most of the joints in a structure cannot support moment transfer If you wish to model a situation where some of the members connected at a joint can transmit moment and some cannot then you should use the Member Releases command explained below Joint Orientation When modelling structures it is sometimes convenient to define restraints that are
227. ion gt Shift click on an unselected item to add it to the current selection gt Shift click on a selected item to remove it from the current selection To select a group of items gt Drag a rectangle which encloses the items to be selected If the rectangle is defined by dragging the cursor from the left to the right a bounding selection will be performed and only the items within the rectangle will be selected If shift is held down while dragging the existing selection will be extended with the additional unselected items that are contained within or intersect the rectangle When performing a drag selection there are two techniques for items The first is by using a rectangular box as described above An alternative to this is to use a line selection in which the user drags the end of a straight line across the screen In this case all members that intersect this line are selected and well as all joints connected to these members The selection tool to be used when performing a drag selection is picked using the View Toolbar Clicking on the dotted square or dotted line buttons chooses the corresponding selection tool 9 Q AA AA elt The Select menu contains a number of commands for helping to select items in the model Member and Joint may be selected by specifying their number or by a label 5 KW a KW Selecting Load Panels There are many techniques and commands that are used to selecting load panels within a
228. ion does not make sense please check the structure restraints and section properties Why does this happen and what should you do if it does During analysis Multiframe checks to see if there is a zero on the diagonal of the stiffness matrix If so it will display a error message saying either The structure has unrestrained degrees of freedom or Suspected unrestrained degrees of freedom The program will select the suspect joints in the Frame window after displaying this message Sections 2 and 3 below describe how to deal with this problem After carrying out the analysis Multiframe checks the results of analysis to verify that the solution makes sense It does this by examining the deflections and seeing if any of them are infinite If any deflections are bad it will display the Solution doesn t make sense message There are four main causes for this condition and you should check each of them if you receive the above warning message 1 Check for bad section s properties When Multiframe computes the stiffness matrix it uses the properties in the Sections Library to determine the resistance of the sections to bending axial and torsional deformation If any of the key properties are zero this will result in a zero in the matrix and consequently a bad solution For a successful analysis the following properties must be greater than zero Area Cross sectional area of the section Ix Moment of inertia of the section about its strong
229. ion of the local degrees of freedom at a joint To apply a load to a joint gt Select the joint or joints to be loaded gt Choose Global Joint Load from the Load menu to apply a global load gt or gt Choose Local Joint Load from the Load menu to apply a local load A dialog box will appear with icons to indicate the direction of loading Joint Load mfe X Joint Load Ht E Magnitude fi D kip Cancel In a two dimensional view there will be four icons indicating the four possible load directions In the 3D view all six possible icons will be displayed with the icons pointing in the direction of the appropriate axes in the current view gt Click on the icon which shows the direction in which the load is to act gt Type in a value for the magnitude of the load gt Click on the OK button There is no need to enter or signs for your load magnitudes The directions are determined from the icon that you select If you wish to remove the joint loads from a joint select the joint and choose Unload Joint from the Load menu You can also double click on a joint to view a table of all the loads on the joint You can superimpose loads in the same direction on a single joint Each time you use the Joint Load command the new loads will be superimposed on any other joint loads you may have previously applied Joint Moment A joint moment is a bending moment that is applied at a joint in the structure Joint momen
230. ion radians In addition the section properties as described in the CalcSheet section of the manual can also be evaluated When a dialog is accepted each member in the current selection is considered in turn the above variables are substituted by the appropriate value and the expressions evaluated before setting the value of the field The following dialogs support parsing member variables e Member Offsets dialog e Member Orientation dialog e All Member load dialogs e Bending dialog Steel Designer e Tension dialog Steel Designer e Compression dialog Steel Designer e Constraints dialog Steel Designer e Serviceability dialog Steel Designer AS4100 Analysis When you have finished setting up your structure and its restraints and loading you use the Analyse menu to carry out structural analysis on the structure A progress bar will be displayed while the analysis is in progress Multiframe will check the structure prior to analysis and alert you if there are any problems For example You must have specified the section type for all of the members If you have missed any members Multiframe will alert you with a dialog and will select all of the undefined members in the Frame window You will also be alerted if there are any mechanisms or there are unrestrained degrees of freedom In each case the offending part of the structure will be selected in the Frame window Different analysis types are available dependent on the version
231. is grid with the Grid command from the View Menu gt Choose Grid from the View Menu Grid Spacing K Damp ft y Dm Z 7 000 Display W Snap M Wisible Cancel gt Enter values for the x y and z spacing of the grid ft ft gt Click on the Visible checkbox if you want the grid to be displayed in the Frame Window gt Click on the Snap checkbox if you want drawing to align to the grid gt Click the OK button If you want to have the joints automatically align with the grid but do not want to see the grid simply unselect the Visible button before clicking OK Similarly you can select the Visible to have the grid displayed as a visual guide but unselect the Snap to disable the automatic alignment with the grid Structural Grid Multiframe also has a facility to define a 3D structural grid that allows you to have your drawing automatically align with a predefined grid associated with the building Page 30 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe The structural grid is composed of a number of planar grids that nominally represent a floor within your building You can control the size location labelling and use of these grids with the Structural Gridcommand in the View Menu gt Choose Structural Grid from the View Menu Grid Manager 3 x J me e Floor 1 EES 7 The Grid Manager dialog appears that allows you to add edit delete and modify the behaviour of grids The table of
232. is tested when the user analyses the frame The joints linked together in a linked group may be selected using the Linked Joints command in the Select menu From version 8 6 of Multiframe the elements selected when the joints are linked are also stored with the linked group These will also be selected when the Select Linked Joints command is executed Page 111 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 112 Joint Mass If you are performing a dynamic analysis using Multiframe4D you may wish to add additional masses to the structure to simulate the effects of equipment or construction loading which will affect the inertia of the frame The Joint Mass command from the Frame menu allows you to add these additional masses at joints in the structure To add a mass at a joint or joints gt Select the joint or joints gt Choose Joint Mass from the Frame menu Joint Masses Jo Dinamic Joint Masses Delete Joint Masses Ce Add Joint Masses Cancel s Mass 1 000 lb y Mass hoo lE z Mass hooo Is s Mass 1 000 bm y Mass 1 000 bag BzMass hm bef gt Enter the mass values to be associated with each global direction of movement If you have already added masses that you wish to remove you can click the Delete Joint Masses radio button to remove Joint Masses from the selected joints Member Masses If you are performing a dynamic analysis using Multiframe4D you may wish to include or ignore the masses of the members in the fr
233. isible or invisible The Symbols Toolbar provides buttons to toggle the display of commonly used symbols Format Toolbar Makes the Format toolbar visible or invisible The Format Toolbar allows you to change the style of the font used in each of the windows in Multiframe Window Toolbar Makes the Window toolbar visible or invisible The Window Toolbar provides a quick way to move from window to window View3D Toolbar Makes the View3D toolbar visible or invisible The View3D Toolbar provides a quick way to move between 2D and 3D views in the graphics windows Group Toolbar Makes the Group toolbar visible or invisible The Group toolbar provides a simple way to transverse the different groups sets Rendering Toolbar Makes the Rendering toolbar visible or invisible The Rendering Toolbar allows you to modify the setting used in OpenGL rendering Clipping Toolbar Makes the Clipping toolbar visible or invisible The Clipping Toolbar allows you to enable or disable clipping clip to a model and to clip to a stored clipping zone Chapter 3 Multiframe Reference Generate Toolbar Makes the Generate toolbar visible or invisible in the Frame Window The Generate Toolbar allows you generate frames Joint Toolbar Makes the Joint toolbar visible or invisible in the Frame Window The Joint Toolbar allows you restrain joints Member Toolbar Makes the Member toolbar visible or invisible in the Frame Window The Membe
234. isplay the computed in plane shear stresses in x y plane for the current load case in the Plot window Sxz Display the computed transverse shear stresses in x z plane for the current load case in the Plot window Syz Display the computed transverse shear stresses in yz plane for the current load case in the Plot window Von Mises Display the computed Von Mises stresses for the current load case in the Plot window Tresca Display the computed Tresca stresses for the current load case in the Plot window e Case Menu e Window Menu e Help Menu File Menu The File menu contains commands for opening and saving files importing and exporting data and printing Page 259 Chapter 3 Multiframe Reference Page 260 New Ctrl N Erases the structure and all loads Use this to start work on a new structure If you have any work unsaved Multiframe will prompt you to save any changes to the structure or calculations before starting the new work Open Ctrl O Open a file that has previously been saved on disk If the CalcSheet window is in front it will read in a new calculations file Otherwise it will read in a frame you have previously saved to disk If you have any work unsaved Multiframe will prompt you to save any changes to the structure or calculations before opening the new file Multiframe can read Multiframe Multiframe text and DXF files Close Select Close when you wish to finish with the current desi
235. iven to how to manage the section libraries The best way to work with the section library is dependent on the number of different projects simultaneously and whether the projects are done in a multi user network environment or not Approach 1 Default Sections Library is in same directory as Multiframe program Use Section Maker to add custom sections and groups Add add hoc sections to custom groups or to Frame group Approach 2 Project based Rename default library Copy default library to project folder at start of each project Optional rename sections library to project name Page 123 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 124 Load appropriate library each time Multiframe starts up Back up sections library with project data files Tip 1 Renaming the default library By changing the name of the default section library Multiframe will prompt you which library you wish to use each time it starts up The default section library is c program files multiframe sectionslibrary slb Tip 2 Frames Group For sections that will only be used in one particular project and to prevent cluttering the library too much Multiframe has the option to store sections in the Frames Group The frames group is independent of the sections library and will be loaded each time you open the project Sections in the Frames Group can only be added edited using Multiframe and cannot be accessed by Section Maker New Section i x New Sect
236. justing the number of load increments the maximum and minimum number of iterations the convergence tolerance and the type of convergence norm No of Load Increments The number of steps in which the loads are applied to the structure For most analyses it is sufficient to use a single load increment Maximum iterations per increment The maximum number of iterations to be performed in a single load increment This value is set to avoid analyses that may not converge Minimum iterations per increment The minimum number of iterations to be performed in a single load increment Unless analysis time is an issue we suggest using a minimum of 3 iterations to ensure that the solution has converged This is particularly important in tension only compression only analyses where several iteration are often necessary to obtain a reliable solution Convergence Tolerance The solver will continue to iterate until the selected converge norm 1s less than the Convergence Tolerance A smaller tolerance produces a more accurate solution but will take longer to complete the analysis And more with the new dialog users are allowed to set different convergence tolerances for residual displacement and unbalanced forces A tight tolerance for displacement and a slightly loose tolerance for force will normally get a satisfied solution as users require The analysis reports show the max residual displacement amp force at each iteration This could help
237. k missing sections i Add missing sections to Frame droup Cancel gt Select the units to be used in the exported file gt Choose how section names in Microstran are to be matched with those currently loaded into Multiframe Section names may be mapped automatically in which case Multiframe will use some simple rules regarding the naming conventions used in Microstran and attempt to modify the names of section in Multiframe match the Microstran section names Section names may also be mapped using a mapping file that contains a list of Multiframe sections names and an alternative name for that section Refer to Appendix C for a full description of section mapping files gt Click the OK button The Microstran file will now be exported from Multiframe It is important to note that the data used to describe a frame in Microstran is slightly different in structure to that used in Multiframe As such some feature and data used within Multiframe may be lost when exporting to Microstran Space Gass Text Files To export a frame saved in the Spreadsheet text file format gt Choose Space Gass Text from the Export sub menu gt Specify the name and location of the file to be exported using the Save File dialog Upon choosing a file the Import Export Options dialog will be displayed Complete the option in this dialog as described above and press OK The Space Gass file will now be exported from Multiframe It 1s importa
238. l If boundary only option is selected Multiframe will add triangular mesh onto the area of openings but as well as retain the opening boundaries This option will be very useful for users to increase the mesh densities of certain areas of a patch or retain a line segment or members inside a patch Page 48 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Delete Patch Openings To delete a patch opening gt Select patch openings in the Frame window gt Hit the delete key from key board or Choose Delete Patch Openings from the Geometry menu Edit Patch Opening Edges To change the properties of a patch opening edge gt Double click on the patch opening edge in the Frame window e MuttiframedD Frame ee ee d File Edit View Select Geometry Group Frame Load Display Case Analyse Time Design Window Help Debug EECHELEN 8BeO OS 6 rs Oc Ey CB Sy Py Cs mp e Gost F VAD A a osea dai ai ag all A AA Aal NO RAB ow m Am la ll VPs Io e Hovl aoe poad addd d utecda Patch Edge Start Node 4 End Node 5 emt mm wS DPS BiF Mesh Type Mesh Density 5 Use side density always Mesh Ratio 1 V Meshing on members You can change the mesh type of a patch opening edge mesh density and mesh ratio etc You can also decide whether you would like patch opening edge members to be meshed or not Patch opening edge
239. l Tension T Tensile Stress Axial Compression Compressive Stress Combined TI Sx Sbe top IT Sx S by left IT S 4Sbe bottom TI Ss Sby right Plot view Ge Structure E Memb Ao re em El IT du IT dai Cancel A dialog will appear listing the menu items controlling the plot display and the actions stresses and deflections which can be displayed gt Click on the name of the menu item you wish to change gt Click on the Member button Page 287 Chapter 3 Multiframe Reference Page 288 gt Set the check boxes of the actions you wish to display in the local member diagrams gt Click on the Structure button gt Set the check boxes of the actions you wish to display on the diagram of the whole structure gt Click the OK button Data Submenu The Data submenu controls which table of data will be displayed in the Data window One table can be displayed and edited at a time Joints Display a table of joint coordinates Member Geometry Display a table of member data describing the geometry of the members in the frame This data includes joint numbers at the ends type member type length slope and orientation offsets connection dimensions Member Properties Display a table of member property data including section type orientation member type and member releases Member End Properties Display a table of property associated with the end of a member including member offsets and mem
240. l axis origin ie y 0 Use the Add Row button to increase the number of points that defines the profile Select a row and press Delete to remove a row The current profile is shown graphically as you enter the values Height of Water Level Enter the depth of the water above the origin Any part of the structure that protrudes above the surface of the water will not have a Water Current load applied to it Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Water Density Enter a value of water density The water current pressure is calculated by P 0 5 Puate W C Where C is a combination of the user and shape factors Water Current Direction Enter the water current direction The water current is applied horizontally in the x z plane A value of zero applied the water current along the x axis Positive angles of water current direction represent a rotation anti clockwise Include Members Patches Load Panels Tick the include check boxes to include ignore any type of element from having a water current load applied Auto calculate Tick the check boxes to define which factors are automatically calculated If the boxes are not ticked the default value is applied The member factors are e C Drag force coefficients As defined by AS11170 Appendix E3 Defaults to 1 5 e C External pressure coefficient as defined with the Set Pressure Coeffs button Defailts to 0 8 To define your own pressure coefficients press the button Set Pressure Coeffs Th
241. l be aligned to the patch Please note that the member will be offset to its base plus half the bending thickness of the patch In the render mode the patch thickness is not drawn so the member will appear a small distance from the patch Load panels do not have a thickness Member Offset Connections The member offset connection dialog has been improved To open the Member Offsets dialog gt Select one or more members gt Choose Member Offsets from the Frame menu The following dialog will be displayed Page 57 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Member Offset Connections Local between nodes Node 7 0 000 mm 0 000 mm z 0 000 mm Same offset at both nodes The Node labels now display the actual node numbers for each end of the selected member If you tick the Same offset at both nodes checkbox the offsets at the second node will be auto completed Add Rounded Corner Rectangular Opening Multiframe allows rounded corner rectangular openings to be drawn in structural designing Add rounded corner rectangular opening command 1s available from the Geometry menu or from the patch toolbar To add a rounded corner rectangular opening gt Choose Add Opening gt Rounded Corner Rectangular from the Geometry menu or icon button Rounded Corner Rectangular Opening gt Click two points or nodes that define the corners of the rectangular opening Page 58 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe SC sss lll
242. lable please activate the nonlinear from the Edit Preferences Licensing tab If this is not possible make sure you have installed the nonlinear analysis feature by re running the Multiframe installer and selecting Modify Also see Installing Multiframe on page 3 for more information on how to modify your analysis The dialog that appears allows you to Chapter 2 Using Multiframe e Specify which nonlinear effects are to be considered in the analysis e Set a number of parameters which control the solution process e Set the load cases to be analysed Nonlinear Analysis Nonlinear Effects Load Cases Self Weight P DELTA Axial Shortening Tension Compression only members Analysis Parameters No of Load Increments Min iterations per Increment Max iterations per Incremen Convergence Criteria Displacements Tolerance 1 000e 004 C Residual Forces Tolerance 1 000e 003 Reporting None Brief i Detailed The nonlinear results for each load case may be generated separately using different nonlinear effects and analysis parameters The setting used to generate the nonlinear results for a particular load case can easily be obtained from the Analysis Settings datasheet Each of the nonlinear effects and analysis parameters are described below P delta effect The P delta P 65 effect refers to the secondary moments induced in a member due to the axial forces within the member The stiffness of a member is incr
243. ll intersecting members in the current selection e Merge Members Merges groups of members in the current selection into a single member Members to be merged into a single member are identified by finding all members that have the same section size are collinear are rigidly connected and have the Same member component e Reverse Member Ends Reverses the direction of the selected members local x axes by swapping the nodes that define the ends of the members e Disconnect Members Disconnects the selected members from the remainder of the frame Drawing Settings Multiframe has a number of options to control the behaviour of the cursor when drawing new members or dragging part of a frame Most of these settings affect how the cursor snaps to objects in the model To modify the drawing and snapping settings gt Choose Drawing Settings from the Geometry menu Chapter 3 Multiframe Reference Drawing Settings x Snap to Options W Joints M Dynamic line constraints If Members M Show snap tips Joint snap tolerance 4 pixels Member quarter points Member snap tolerance 4 pixels Custom member points Humber oF divisions E Perpendicular point Cancel gt Choose the options in the Snap To group box to specify how the cursor will snap to the existing joints and members This includes options for snapping to quarter points of members and for specifying an arbitrary number of divisions A numb
244. ll into three general categories Creating the structure specifying the loads and interpreting the results of analysis The first three sections of this chapter reflect these categories This is followed by detailed explanations of doing design calculations printing and saving data and transferring data to other programs e Techniques e Using Views e Creating a Structure e Applying Loads e Analysis e Viewing Results e Printing e Data Exchange Techniques There are several techniques you can use in Multiframe to make modelling structures fast and intuitive In this section you will learn about the different mouse and keyboard techniques available in Multiframe e Summary of Mouse Techniques e Summary of Keyboard Techniques Summary of Mouse Techniques You will use the following mouse techniques to do just about all of the tasks in this chapter e Click to select or activate something e Press to cause a continuous action e Drag to select choose from a menu or move something e Shift Click to select or to extend or reduce a selection e Ctrl Click to select or to extend or reduce a selection e Double click to get information about an object To Click Position the pointer on what you want to select or activate Press and quickly release the mouse button To Press Position the pointer on something Page 5 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Without moving the mouse press and hold down the mouse button The effects of pres
245. ll numbers in the file are in Fortran style format Integers are in I6 while real numbers are in F12 4 format Data within the file is saved in groups each group is proceeded by the name of the group in upper case letters and followed by a number of lines with the relevant information The text file uses the units currently selected in Multiframe Job Title Up to 80 characters describing the file and the date METRIC or IMPERIAL Number of joints Units JOINTS Start of data describing joints I6 Number of joints 16 F12 4 F12 4 F12 4 Joint number x coord y coord z coord repeat line for each joint MEMBERS Start of data describing members I6 Number of members 16 16 16 16 16 16 F12 4 A15 A Member no Joint 1 Joint 2 Section Group Section Number 25 I6 Member Orientation Group Name Section Name Section Shape repeat line for each member SECTIONS Start of section data I6 Number of different sections used in frame A25 16 16 16 Section Name Group Number Section Number Section F10 4 F10 4 F10 4 F10 4 Shape F12 4 F12 4 F12 4 F12 4 F1 Depth Width Web thickness Flange thickness 2 4 F12 4 F12 4 Mass Area Ixx Iyy J Young s Modulus Shear Modulus repeat line for each different section used in frame RESTRAINTS Start of restraints data I6 Number of restraints 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 F12 4 Restraint Joint x flag y flag z flag x flag y flag Oz F12 4 F12 4 F12 4 F12 4 F1 flag x value y value z value x val
246. llowing dialog will appear Buckling Analysis Buckling Buckling Analysis Reference Case Method inverse Iteration zl Number of Modes fat Convergence tolerance 1 000e 003 K i Maximum Iterations Options Finite Joint Rotation Flexure Torsion Analysis Type S 30 Analysis Reference Case The reference case is the case used to specify the distribution of forces though the structure These loads will be scaled to determine the buckling modes Method Two methods are provided Inverse Iteration is the default and should be used in most cases as it is typically fastest However Inverse Iteration is limited to finding only the first buckling case Where more than 1 buckling mode is required or when Inverse Iteration does not converge you can use the Jacobi method The Jacobi method is slower but is able to find more than a single buckling mode As this method can be very slow it is not suitable for large models Number of Modes The number of buckling modes required This number must be between 1 and 50 Only a single buckling mode can be obtained using Inverse Iteration Page 192 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Convergence Tolerance The minimum value required for the Convergence Error When the convergence error falls below the Convergence the solution has completed successfully The convergence error is calculated at the end of each iteration when using an iterative technique such as Inverse
247. loads Member Constraint C Restraints Inside Boundar m a J Enable all Hot Spot List_ P n wo a a an tate een pe gt gt Multiframe allows uses to add or delete a hot spot from the above dialog Click Add button and will come up with a dialog window with fields for label ratio coordinates etc Click OK button and hot spot will be added into the list 20 Geometry x 0 000 Y 0000 V Enable Page 73 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 74 Connections Between Members If the position of the first or second joint of the member you have drawn coincides with the position of an existing joint the new member will be connected to the existing member at the existing joint Note that this will happen even if the existing joint is at a different depth from the current drawing depth For this reason you will probably find it necessary to use the clipping and masking controls when drawing members which lie in front of or behind other members in the two dimensional views When drawing in the 3D view you can only draw a member between two existing joints Frame Efel x New member is drawn here Members will be connected at this joint The new member will also connect with an existing member if you start or finish drawing on the existing member Frame OR x Frame OR E3 Existing member in the frame A second member drawn here will automatically insert a node in the existing
248. lows you to project a member or group of members in any of the global axis directions from existing joints For example you could draw a floor plan and then extrude the columns up from it or you could extrude the beams out from a wall frame you have drawn To extrude members from the frame gt Select the joints in the frame to be extruded gt Choose Extrude from the Geometry menu A dialog box will appear with fields for the direction and dimension of the extruded members Extrude Ol z nn ft Cancel W Connect to existing gt Enter the length of the extruded members in the appropriate direction gt Click the OK button If you leave the Connect to existing check box checked Multiframe will automatically create a connection between the selected joints and the extruded members It will also connect the extruded members to any existing members in the frame 1f they lie within a 0 2 in 5mm tolerance of the ends of the existing members Mirroring Members When you wish to create a structure with one or more axes of symmetry you can use the Mirror command to mirror the structure you have drawn To mirror members in a frame gt Select the members to be mirrored gt Choose Mirror from the Geometry menu A dialog box will appear with fields for the direction to mirror and the location of the plane about which mirroring will take place Page 99 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 100 SS El ies h Connect to
249. lts sub menu under the Display menu Result Memb Label d d 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 IS KINN Displacements Section 139 7x5 0 CHS 139 7x5 0 CHS 139 7x5 0 CHS 139 7x5 0 CHS 139 7x5 0 CHS 139 7x5 0 CHS 139 7x5 0 CHS 139 7x5 0 CHS 139 7x5 0 CHS 139 7 5 0 CHS 139 75 0 CHS 139 7x5 0 CHS a FF db Pt Reactions Px kH 0 000 5 725 5 725 0 000 5 792 5 792 0 000 0 739 0 739 0 000 0 039 0 039 vy kH 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 Vz kH 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 Tx kH m 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 o 000 Mu KH om 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 Mz kH m 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 dv mmi 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 32 22 32 227 0 000 50 77 50 772 0 000 45 18 48 186 0 000 0 000 0 000 4969 0 4969 04 9362 8 9362 64 10903 103503 6 i Member Actions Max Actions i Memb 4 gt Page 199 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 200 The table of maximum member actions displays the number of each member and the member labels in the first two columns The remaining columns display the maximum values of the six member actions and the two displacements
250. may be used to control which type of patch stress is displayed in the Plot window Sxx Display the computed in plane direct stresses about the local xx axis for the current load case in the Plot window Syy Display the computed in plane direct stresses about the local vw axis for the current load case in the Plot window Szz Display the computed transverse direct stresses about the local zz axis for the current load case in the Plot window Sxy Display the computed in plane shear stresses in x y plane for the current load case in the Plot window Sxz Display the computed transverse shear stresses in x z plane for the current load case in the Plot window Syz Display the computed transverse shear stresses in yz plane for the current load case in the Plot window Von Mises Display the computed Von Mises stresses for the current load case in the Plot window Tresca Display the computed Tresca stresses for the current load case in the Plot window Case Menu The items in the Case menu allow you to work with load cases Add Case Add a new load case enter load factors if desired The Add Case menu is a sub menu of the Case menu and is described in detail following this section on the Case menu Edit Case The Edit Case command allows you to modify the attributes of the current load case Reorder Cases The Reorder Cases command allows you to sort the order of load cases in the list Cha
251. mber That is the top temperature occurs at half the depth above the neutral axis and varies linearly down to a point half the depth below the neutral axis Note that the depth of the load does not have to be the same as the depth of the member Top Temperature KE Neutral Axi Depth Editing Loads Numerically Bottom Temperature You can edit the values and positions of loads and prescribed displacements numerically in tables of data that may be displayed in the Data window These tables display Joint Loads Prescribed Displacements Member Loads and Thermal Loads You can choose which table to display by choosing the appropriate item from the Data sub menu under the Display menu To change the value or position of a load gt Click on the number to be changed gt Type in the new value for the load Chapter 2 Using Multiframe gt Press the enter key If you change the position or direction of a load the drawing in the Load window will be updated to reflect the change Note that the loads for the current load case only will be displayed in the Data window You cannot change loads for a combined load case a Time History load case or a self weight load case Load Properties You can also edit loads numerically by double clicking on a member in the Load window This will display a dialog with a table of member loads and a table of thermal loads Member Loads EN Member Forces Thermal Loads Member 6 Load case Lo
252. mber ENEE 127 Member Vartables 182 memory requireMent eeeeeeeeeeeeeees 184 Merge Close Jeu pe e egeteue Geet ege 276 feet 79 276 Microstran Arche 259 260 Microstran Archive Files EE 240 rte GN 236 Minimum Envelope sssssseeeeeeesesessssssssssseren 294 EH 99 275 Modal Analys 192 Analysis Method 192 ENEE Eet 192 Maximum Ireratons 193 Mode Shape Scaling c ssseeeeeeees 193 lee E 192 Modal Results 224 Mode EE ee 293 Moment KEE 289 Moment Ma 256 257 289 291 292 moment OF E 299 MOUSE TECHNIQUES i6 0 h divest Gatetdndisadteoteenctaeds 5 EE 36 94 275 Movits a te 91 Movin HEET ege a 95 ke teie EE 264 Multicore Optimisation Analysis 264 Multiframe load code 321 Multiframe Structure cccccceeeeeeeeeees 230 Multiframe Tex ices scijecescnasiseeeivinckaeests 236 259 Multiframe Text Example File 0 322 Multiframe Text blei 260 Multiframe Text File EDO EE 239 Muli ame ee eege 261 EE EE 242 Multiple 16a Re 154 N Natural teure 203 Natural Frequencies Table 289 KEE eg E 244 INAVISW e cas scicrcasnefedtua ches Goh S 261 Eder 258 ie EE 268 NOM diskini nnna 269 Nonlinear Analysis 0006 184 303 304 Nonlinear Results 188 203 293 Number Porat siicccsacticesadsconsei ecard eiedintens 265 O Online Suppose 296 EE 258 Open Li Dtary sx ccsssitesscenesctuendaa saddvavensenvenabees 258 Open Sections Library c cssceeee
253. mber of decimal places and the number format gt Click the OK button The units you choose will be saved with the Multiframe application for subsequent use Colour Specify which colours to use drawing the various parts of the structure for the background of the windows for the clipped or masked members and for the rendering of the structure Status Bar Makes the Status Bar visible or invisible Toolbar See Toolbar Submenu Size To Fit Submenu The Size To Fit submenu commands allow you to change the view factor to fit the frame to the current window Frame Ctrl Insert Resizes the view to fit the entire frame to the window Page 269 Chapter 3 Multiframe Reference Page 270 Selection Fit the selection to the window Clipping Fit the active clipping region to the window Clipping Submenu The Clipping submenu commands allow you to control the display and positioning of the clipping bars Clipping allows you to define how much of the structure is visible at one time No Clipping Turns off clipping if it is on This hides the clipping bars and makes all members in the frame visible Clip Grey Turns on clipping and makes the clipping mode grey This means all members which do not lie completely within the boundaries of the clipping bars will be drawn in grey Clip Invisible Turns on clipping and makes the clipping mode invisible This means all members that do not lie completely within t
254. me such that a similar scaling of the diagonal terms in the stiffness matrix is performed for shear axial and torsional components of the end spring The properties of member end springs can be edited via the End Springs table in the Data Window Member End Springs can be added and deleted via the Member Ends table in the Data Window An end spring can be added by simply entering a number in the End Spring column if this number is greater than the number of end springs in the model then a new end spring is added using the default properties If the number is that of an existing end spring then a new end spring is added using the properties of the existing spring In both cases the number entered by the user will change to reflect he number of the new spring An end spring is deleted from a member by simply setting the number of the end spring to zero Member Modelling The Member Modelling dialog contains settings relevant to how a member is represented in a true physical model of the frame At the moment the only setting contained in the dialog identifies if the member is a beam column brace or another component within the model To set the member modelling options for a member gt Select the member or members to be modified gt Choose Member Modelling from the Frame menu Member Modelling x Component Mone o ce gt Select which component of the frame the member represents gt Click on the OK button The compon
255. member The connections between the members are set to be rigid You can change this using the Member Releases command if you require a connection between members which cannot Support moments Selections In order to specify the properties restraints and loads associated with joints and members it is necessary to be able to identify which parts of the structure the various properties will be associated with You do this by graphically selecting joints and members prior to choosing menu commands When you choose a command from a menu to apply restraints at joints for example the command will act on the joints that are currently selected Note that you cannot select a joint or member that has been hidden using the clipping or masking commands Frame with no members or joints selected Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Selecting Joints To select a joint gt Click on the joint A selected joint is indicated by a solid black box around the joint Frame This joint is selected To select a group of joints gt Drag a rectangle which encloses the joints to be selected To select all the joints gt Choose All from the Select menu gt Click the OK button To extend or reduce the selection gt Shift click to add a joint to or remove a joint from the current selection gt Shift drag to add a group of joints to or remove a group of joints from the current selection If you know the number of the joint you wish to select
256. ming a drag selection is to use a line selection When the line selection tool is chosen the user drags the end of a straight line across the screen All patches that intersect this line and all joints connected to these patches are selected Selecting Plates There are several techniques and commands that are used to select plates within a graphical window The most common way of selecting items is by using the mouse To select a single item gt Click on the item The selected plate is drawn in a darker colour A different colour for depicting the selection can be set via the Colour command in the View menu To extend or reduce the selection gt Shift click on an unselected plate to add it to the current selection gt Shift click on a selected plate to remove it from the current selection gt Shift drag to invert the selection in the selection rectangle To select a group of items gt Drag from left to right a rectangle which encloses the plates to be selected gt Drag from right to left to select all plates which intersect or are contained inside the selection rectangle If the rectangle is defined by dragging the cursor from the left to the right a bounding selection will be performed Only the items within the rectangle will be selected If the rectangle is defined by dragging the cursor from right to left an intersect selection will be performed Any item that intersects the rectangle will be selected If shift is held down while
257. model is analysed To add patch cross section gt Switch to Plot Window gt Choose Add Cross Section menu from the Display menu or shortcut menu Multiframe Advan o sas rees mea anuru Fs TE a sme FO 2 e2 Fojeas ere Edit View Select Geometry Group Frame Load Display Case Analyse Time Design Window Help Debug Symbols F5 SHE A 123 abc Legend Data Results Member Actions Member Stresses Efficiency Patch Internal Forces Patch Stresses Deflection Yv se Yv v e Y v v Add Cross Section Delete Cross Section Animate Customise Plot J Y E o EE gt Move the pointer to the position of the first point Multiframe Advan File Edit View Select Geometry Group Frame Load Display Case Analyse Time Design Window Help Debug Osa smeloe Se NEESER IE ef a IS 123 abc A 123 A G e e e EES sl a s VAD ae Te o Y E EO SS o a E Select MenberSress m Select Patch intemal Force lt Von Mses x gt Click the position of the second point to complete the new Cross Section Page 221 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Multiframe Advan File Edit View Select Geometry Group Frame Load Display Case Analyse Time Design Window Help Debug Ipoengi ipeiaelezlE Ieaaablmpl Heo S se 4 2 2 21 Ble ADT ey Bs SEI lei m Gow Sttes STAI A Ol SEA W zz 5 S D Select Member Sess m Select Pa
258. mouse button after dragging Click on the drawing at the bottom right of the window to return to a diagram of the whole structure Plate Diagrams The diagrams of the plates can display bending moments shear forces deflection and stresses When a diagram of the whole structure drawn in the Plot window and forces are displayed the force diagram for each plate will be superimposed on the plate With deflections on these forces will be displayed on a diagram of the exaggerated deflection of the whole structure All static load cases are drawn to the same scale To display the contour diagram for the plate deflections gt Choose Deflections under the Display menu Page 217 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 218 Tx ae Select Member Stress Kl Select Patch Internal Force v Select Patch Stress fi Static Case Load Case 1 Defl mm 0 000 mm To display the contour diagrams for the plate actions in local patch coordinate system gt Choose a patch internal force from the Actions sub menu under the Display menu BC Select Member Stress i Static Case Load Case 1 Mxx x Select Patch Stress ze 0 000 kN m m Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Plot T De ots Select Member Stress v Ta Select Patch Stress v Soe CERN 0 000 kN m m Static Case Load Case 1 Myy O Similarly to display the patch stress contour diagrams in local patch coordinate system g
259. mum Ireratons 19 Te e DE 19 Number of Modes ssssseeseeeeeeeees 19 Bn ke eere nea 191 Reference E 191 Buckling Results 224 C Cales E 295 CAC SMC EN 225 295 CAlCSNGEL Variables eccssccsnconstuiccasesusassnaeuas 226 CalcSheet Window sssssnneeeeeeenennsssssssseee 247 ANC Ul AUG creeis oe ttosoutetenaiaeets 294 Calculating Quantities amp Coste 332 Calculation Sheet 225 Cale UE e Te 3 3 scaneaceaaseanarcsasennsonceanavncccaqneees 225 ING E 184 capacities for Multiframe e0000000000000 302 SC E E E utara cate eevasctaencs 294 Check For Updates 296 Choosing the Time Sten 163 GAT a AEE EEEE E 262 e EE 5 Clip EEN 268 reegen 268 AO FG AMG oera 268 Wek Cire o eeennrer ameter ere eT enter Epeteret rte re 268 To DELS C HOM EE 268 TO ee 268 Kee cee nme A mn a A E 268 TC yr ETE E IEE 268 Clp AE e IC sscocansaceaassa varsaasennsoncsanavncasasiaens 268 CUI Tee 14 268 Page 341 Index CHp Ke EEN 268 Clip FO Selection E 14 268 Clip TO ne 268 CIP TOZON serenon 268 EE 12 266 268 Save Clipping Zone 268 Clipping and Masking ooeeeeeneeseessssssssee 12 Clipping Toolbar 00 254 255 270 TEE ee 15 EE 258 ONO UI a 267 Ee ert 228 Comb Sx Sby left essere 290 Comb Sax rbabwvnght eeseeeeeeees 291 Comb Sax Sbz bottom 290 Combs F SDZ OPen 290 Combined load case e e EE 155 Combined Load Case 293 COMPLESSIVE ON e 290 COMMS CHONG EE 74 CONTINUOUS DEAM
260. n To add a new series to the library gt Click the Add button gt Type in a new name for the series Enter the attributes of the series and type the values for the series data in the table at the right hand side of the dialog You can also copy and paste data into the table by selecting the cells to be pasted and using Paste in the Edit menu Remember that the final time value must be greater than any analysis time Otherwise the loading would be undefined For a set load the time could be any large number as the load value does not vary Importing Load Data You can import load data from a text file to the load library in addition to entering it by hand To import load data gt Click on the Import Series button A dialog will appear allowing you to choose the format of the data in the text file Page 159 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 160 Input Time Sernes el ES Input Time Seres Text File Ge Fixed Time Interval S Cancel Yariable Time Cancel Time Interval 08909 seconds Data Type Ge Force C Acceleration If you select Variable Time the data should be in tab delimited format with two values per data point the first value being the time in seconds and the second value being the load value force or acceleration as appropriate If you select Fixed Time Interval the data should be in tab delimited format with one force or acceleration value per data point Adding Time History Load Case
261. n a frame as you like a problem arises if you release the moments at the ends of all of the members connected at a common joint In this case the joint is unrestrained against rotation infinite rotations will be computed and the Solution doesn t make sense error message will appear If you are trying to analyse a truss structure it is necessary to make all of the members in the structure pined at both ends and consequently this problem arises for all the joints in the frame The solution to this problem is to restrain the joint against all rotations this sets the rotations of the joint to zero but the pins on the members allow them to deflect freely with no moment restraint If you are analysing a truss structure you will probably find it easiest to follow these steps 1 Draw the frame as usual 2 Use the Select All command from the Select menu to select all the members in the frame 3 Use Member Releases to set all the members to Pin Pin ends Page 319 Appendix B Analysing Trusses Member Releases _ OI Fa Member Releases 2 Cancel Joint 1 Jont A IT Ts Torsion M Ts M Mu Minor Bending J Mu M Ms Major Bending M Mz 4 Use the Joint restraint command to restrain the rotations of all of the joints in the frame to zero x Multiframe s analysis will accurately compute the deformations of the structure due to axial forces only and the resulting rotations of all the joints will be zero If you find it
262. n shortcut in the View toolbar can be used to turn the CG icon on and off E QQeH AA e Chapter 2 Using Multiframe The centre of gravity calculations include the mass of all of the members in the model as well as the mass of any plate elements in the model and joint masses Creating a Structure Creating a structure with Multiframe involves defining the geometry restraints section types and the connections of the structure by drawing in the Frame window You can also use the pre defined generation aids to automatically construct portal frames or geometrically regular structures This section begins with a description of the drawing techniques you can use to create a structure This is followed by a summary of how to select joints and members in the structure and how to use Multiframe capabilities to assist in generating commonly used structures A description of the commands that can be used to specify data defining restraints section properties and members with pins or moment releases completes the section Drawing Members of the structure may be drawn directly by using the mouse to define the beginning and end points of a member The scale at which this drawing is carried out may be specified by choosing the Size command from the View Menu The maximum and minimum coordinates to be used in the x y and z directions may be entered and Multiframe will scale these coordinates to the current size of the Frame window All movements i
263. n the window are accompanied by a display of the current pointer coordinates in the lower left hand corner of the window All coordinates are shown in the current length units as set using the Units command from the View menu Similar to members drawing load panels can also be drawn directly by using panel drawing commands from the Geometry Menu or shortcuts The panels can be either triangle or quadrilateral but have to be planar Patches can also be drawn directly by using patch drawing commands from the Geometry Menu or shortcuts The patches can be either triangle or quadrilateral but have to be planar Openings can also be drawn directly by using opening drawing commands from the Geometry Menu or shortcuts The openings can be N sided but have to be planar and are associated with a patch Setting the Size Before starting drawing you will need to set up the drawing area for the size of frame you intend working with To do this gt Choose Size from the View Menu A dialog box will appear with the dimensions of the structure gt Enter the maximum and minimum coordinates you wish to use in each direction gt Click the OK button Page 29 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Max x 20002020 ft Min x o oo P Max y fio ft Min y joco h Cancel Drawing Grid Multiframe has a built in facility to allow you to have your drawing automatically align with an evenly spaced grid You can control the spacing display and use of th
264. nalysis which includes member axial forces and effective lengths and effective length factors Patch Internal Forces Display the patch interaction forces within patches for the current load case in the Result window Chapter 3 Multiframe Reference Patch Stresses Display the stresses within patches for the current load case in the Result window Natural Frequencies Multiframe 4D only Display the computed frequencies periods participation factors participating mass ratios and modal masses for each of the mode shapes determined by a modal analysis Actions Submenu The items in the Actions submenu may be used to control which type of force or moment is displayed in the Plot window Moment Mz Display the computed bending moments about the local z axis for the current load case in the Plot window Moment My Display the computed bending moments about the local y axis for the current load case in the Plot window Shear Vy Display the computed shear forces in the local y direction for the current load case in the Plot window Shear Vz Display the computed shear forces in the local z direction for the current load case in the Plot window Axial Px Display the computed axial forces for the current load case in the Plot window Axial Tension Display the computed axial tensile forces for the current load case in the Plot window Axial Compression Display the computed axial compressive forces for the
265. nction that allows the recording of user access When logging has been enabled user usage license and dongle number and application will be recorded in the specified text file Chapter 3 Multiframe Reference Numerics The Numerics tab is used to set the default format used to display dimensionless numbers in Multiframe You can choose to use decimal scientific or engineering notation and specify how many digits of precision you wish to display Save This Save tab allows the option to save a backup file to be turned on or off By default the backup is on Properties If the Frame window is foremost this command shows details about the joint element or panel selected If the Load window is foremost this command shows details about the loads on the selected joint member load panels patches or plates Sections Submenu The Sections menu has commands for adding editing and deleting sections within the current sections library Add Section Add a new section to the sections library Sections shapes that are not standard shapes within Multiframe are added using this command and requires the user to input the properties if the section Add Standard Section Add a new section to the sections library Standard section shapes supported within Multiframe are added by specifying the dimensions of the shape All section properties will be computed Edit Section Edit the data for a section in the sections library Delete Secti
266. nd the corresponding critical damping values required at those modes Then using the equations a Bo 20 6 at Bo 2 262 where CO and 2 are the approximate first and second natural frequencies of the frame and E 1 and 2 are the critical damping values corresponding to these frequencies Combing the equations gives Or Jon o 6 o on Z I 5 o o B AO 63 _ SE OI o Sea Motion Load Case Multiframe allows you to add a Sea Motion load case where linear and angular acceleration can be applied to a structure gt Choose Sea Motion from the Add Case menu in the Case menu A dialog will be displayed which allows you to enter the accelerations due to the sea motion to be applied to the structure Multiframe converts these into loads Page 163 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 164 Sea Motion Load case Mame Sea Motion 1 x froliisurge wv vawwtheave z pitch sway phi SE Acceleration 0 000 0 000 mmis ka Acceleration 0 oog om 0 000 degjs Motion Axes 0 000 0 000 from origin Include Self Weight Inlcude Members Plates Joint masses Cancel GD side view Rotation Angle 0 It is possible to model the structure heeled in any direction or combination of directions by entering values for Rotation Angle In reality the structure is not rotated but the subsequent accelerations are applied at that angle Linear Acceleration a Combinations of surge he
267. nd will get patch stiffeners Page 71 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Auto generate Patch Hot Spots Multiframe supports patch hot spots to be auto generated Patch hot spots will be defined by patch corners opening corners constraint points and patch internal points Auto generate Patch Hot Spots command is available from the Geometry menu or from the right click shortcut menu gt Select patch in which hot spots will be generated in the Frame window and mouse right click Patch Properties Patch Materials Patch Thickness Patch Meshing Patch Colors Patch Labels Rotate Patch Axes Flip Patch z Axis Split Patch Merge Patch Auto generate Patch Stiffeners Auto generate Patch Hot Spots Patch Reference Axes Mask To Selection Ctrl M Mask Out Selection Ctrl Shift M gt gt Choose Auto generate Patch Hot Spots gt A dialog box will appear with a field for type of hot spots generate button amp a list of hot spots etc Generate Patch HotSpots Patch Constraint E Inside E Boundary El Out of Plane members E Point loads Member Constraint Restraints E Inside gt Ooa gt Select hot spot types click generate button and will get hot spot list Page 72 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Generate Patch HotSpots Locations Patch Corner Patch Constraint E Concave El Convex El Inside E Boundary Opening Corner Out of Plane members Concave El Convex E Point
268. ne SH gt Enter a load factor if any gt Select the series you want to add and the global direction in which it is to act A force series needs to be created in the load library first See Editing the Load Library for information on how to create a force series Note that only force series may be applied when in a Time History load case and acceleration series can only be used in Seismic load cases Viewing Applied Time History Loads To view the loads applied above while still in the current Time History load case gt Choose Step Loads from the Data sub menu under Display Data dt poren rector Time History Seriea series Tupe Page 161 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 162 Adding Seismic Load Cases In addition to creating Time History load cases that allow you to apply dynamically varying forces to the structure Multiframe4D allows you to create load cases that apply dynamically changing ground accelerations The most common use for this is applying an earthquake spectrum to a frame but it may also be used for any other ground based acceleration Analysis is carried out by applying the specified acceleration to all of the restrained joints in the structure The assumption is that all restrained joints move with the ground acceleration The results of the analysis are displayed relative to the ground position at each point in time This means that the restrained joints all show zero deflection and the deflections o
269. nnected members all have the Tx action released To help prevent this the default settings for a pinned end only release the major and minor rotations My and Mz You may also select to release the axial force at either end of the member Shear releases are not available in Multiframe via this dialog However they can be simulated using member end springs with no stiffness These are described elsewhere in this manual The members in the Frame window with pinned ends will be drawn with a circle near the ends that are pinned Although the pins are shown to be a small distance from the end of the member in the Frame window for the purposes of analysis they are in fact infinitely close to the ends of the member A pinned end releases moments about the local member axes Note that the assumed member releases are initially set to rigid rigid and it is not necessary to explicitly define any releases on a member unless you have previously set the member releases to rigid pinned pinned rigid or pinned pinned You can change the member releases on a member by double clicking on the pin icons at the ends of the member Member Types Multiframe allows you to specify a member as Tension only or Compression only Tension only members will resist forces in the structure only when the member is in axial tension Similarly compression only members will resist forces in the structure only when the member is in axial compression These types of member
270. normal shear or tangential friction to the panel Chapter 2 Using Multiframe To apply a local distributed load to a panel gt Select the load panel or panels to be loaded gt Choose Local Panel Load from the Load menu or short cut menu A dialog box will appear with icons to indicate the direction of loading Local Panel Loads X Panel Loads iawer y y SE SCH Ke St Pressure P Ooo kPa Cancel gt Click on the icon which shows the load direction In a two dimensional view there will be four icons indicating the four possible load directions In the 3D view all six possible icons will be displayed with the icons pointing in the direction of the appropriate local axes of the panel in the current view gt Click on the icon which shows the direction in which the load is to act gt Type ina value for the pressure of panel loading gt Click on the OK button There is no need to enter or signs for your load magnitudes The directions are determined from the icon that you select If you wish to remove the panel loads from a panel select the panel and choose Unload panel from the Load menu You can also double click on a panel to view a table of all the loads on the panel Global Patch Distributed Load Multiframe allows loading on patches to be applied relative to the direction of the global coordinate system or relative to the direction of the local patch coordinate system Loads can be applied either
271. not aligned with the global coordinate system In Multiframe these types of restraints may be modelled by specifying the orientation of the local degrees of freedom at each joint By default these degrees of freedom are aligned with the global axes but this is not always necessary The Joint Orientation dialog is used to specify an arbitrary local coordinate system at each joint This local coordinate system defines the direction of the local degree of freedoms that are used for applying boundary conditions and loading to the structure The orientation of a joint is specified by 3 angles that measure the rotation of the local coordinate system from the global coordinate system The right hand rule is used to determine the direction of the rotations To set the orientation of a joint gt Select the joint gt Choose Joint Orientation from Frame menu gt Enter the angles defining the orientation of the joint gt Press OK Page 125 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Joint Orientation The orientation of a joint is displayed in the Frame and Load Windows If the orientation of a joint is not aligned with the global coordinates then the axes of the local coordinates are displayed at the joint The display of the local joint axes may be disabled via the Symbols dialog The joint displacements and joint reactions displayed in the Results Window are displayed in local joint coordinates Global results for each of the displacement of rea
272. ns can contain the usual mathematical operators as well as some common mathematical functions In addition expressions can also contain a number of predefined variables that describe the properties of joints or members For example the variable L is used to represent the length of a member in dialogs that act upon a selection of members Intrinsic Functions The following functions are supported by Multiframe when evaluating mathematical expressions Function Description Units Sin x Sine of x x in Radians Cos x Cosine of x x in Radians Tan x Tangent of x x in Radians Arcsin x Arcsine of x Degrees Arccos x Arccosine of x Degrees Arctan x Arctangent of x Degrees Asin x Arcsine of x Radians Acos x Arccosine of x Radians Atan x Arctangent of x Radians Atan2 x y Returns arctangent of x y in the range from 180 to 180 Arctan2 x y Returns arctangent of x y in the range from n totnm Sqr x Square of x Sqrt x Square root of x Page 181 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 182 Exp x Exponential of x Ln x Natural logarithm of x Log x Base 10 logarithm of x Abs x Absolute value of x Max x y Returns maximum value of x and d Min x y Returns minimum value of x and y Special Constants The following constants are supported by Multiframe when evaluating mathematical expressions Function Description Units Pi Value of Pi 3 14159 Joint Variables In dialogs that act upon joint loads res
273. nt to note that the data used to describe a frame in Space Gass 1s slightly different in structure to that used in Multiframe As such some feature and data used within Multiframe may be lost when exporting to Space Gass Page 243 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 244 SDNF Multiframe can export a frame in the Steel Detailing Neutral File format SDNF This can be used to import the frame in to other analysis design or detailing packages To export a frame saved in the SDNF format gt Choose SDNF from the Export sub menu gt Specify the name and location of the file to be exported using the Save File dialog Upon choosing a file the Import Export Options dialog will be displayed Complete the option in this dialog as described above and press OK to export the frame Multiframe v7 The release of Multiframe version 7 5 was accompanied by a significant upgrade of the Multiframe binary file format mfd Files saved in the new format are not compatible with older versions of Multiframe or with the Macintosh version of Multiframe To provide compatibility with these versions of Multiframe frames can be saved in the file format used prior to version 7 5 To export a frame saved in the Multiframe version 7 file format gt Choose Multiframe v7 from the Export sub menu gt Specify the name and location of the file to be exported using the Save File dialog Multiframe will now export the frame in this file format S
274. ntion for axial forces and stresses You can choose to either display tension or compression as positive when drawing member diagrams Stresses are also displayed according to the sign convention you choose This ensures that the signs of stresses caused by bending correspond with the signs of stresses caused by axial actions Chapter 3 Multiframe Reference There is also an option to use perspective when displaying graphics in the 3D views You may find this useful for presentation purposes However you will usually find it more convenient to work with the standard orthographic projection If you do turn on the perspective option it uses a perspective angle of 30 corresponding to the natural perspective of the human eye Reporting View Preferences Select Printing Font L Font Courier New SIZE S Shade alternate rows Repeat table headers at top of new page Report window Stream report window output to Microsoft Word You can control the font and size of text used when printing by using the Reporting tab in the Preferences dialog The appearance of the report can also be modified to lightly shade every 2 row in the report which assists is making the tables easier to read An option is also available to force the header rows of tables within the report to be repeated at the top of a page when the table extends onto a new page The reporting in Steel Designer can be redirected to a Microsoft Word document T
275. o account during analysis You are no longer required to use a NonLinear analysis for Tension Only effects Some care must be taken in performing a lifting analysis as the additional spring restraints added for the analysis will also help to suppress structural mechanisms After analysis is complete you will notice that all nodes in the model will have reactions You should see normal reactions at any nodes where you have applied a restraint and at other nodes where automatic springs have been applied you should see reactions with a small value These small reactions are a consequence of the automatically applied springs If you see unacceptably large reactions at any of these nodes then you should use manual spring restraints and carry out a normal linear analysis Buckling Analysis Buckling Analysis Concepts In Multiframe3D and Multiframe4D you can carry out a buckling analysis to determine the buckled shape of a structure with respect to a set of reference loads This type of analysis is also referred to as a Elastic Critical Load ECL analysis or a stability analysis The analysis involves the solution of a generalised eigenvalue problem of the form K AK U 0 where K is the elastic stiffness matrix K is the geometric stiffness matrix computed using a set of reference loads Py and iis a load factor or multiplier This system of equations can be solved for many values of eigenvalue and corresponding modes shapes wh
276. o be attached to patches in structural designing so that those attached members or attached patch edges will be forced to mesh during patch meshing Attach to Patch commands is available from the Geometry menu or from the patch toolbar To attach a member patch to patch gt Select members and or patches gt Choose Attach to Patch Command from the Geometry menu or icon button SE Multiframe4D Frame File Edit View Select Geometry Group Frame Load Display Case Analyse Time Design Window Help Debug DSH tee Oee et AA fall O Sx LEI Tea BE Ty EE lo Group Seta z a s Taare E em Acs 0a dead all a aa 8 rnama Emal Am Ar EE EENEG l a i jugv ao Patch e od glegeeegdelG Zi A a Chapter 2 Using Multiframe S Multiframe4D Frame nk Edit View Select Geometry Group Frame Load Display Case Analyse Time Design Window Help Debug Osa smaloe Se aas Bin B8e 7 S Er By Oy Py Bs Te E 0 D Group sets d alls V4aaw ejja m mAs d lo ege all a aAaaa gt n RA mmml Am l l d IZAR N EEEE i a w p avlae HOeddl d a dg Aa e Bei dg Detach Member Patch to Patch Multiframe allows members patches to be detached from patches in structural designing so that those detached members or patch edges will not be meshed during patch meshing Detach from Patch commands is available from the Geometry menu or from the
277. o0Upa0z H 200PFC D 3100UC118 EI 200x100 9 0 RHS Type O Local Joint Loads DI Global Joint Loads O Local tember Point Loads EI Global hiember Point Loads JE Local hember Dist Loads E Global Member Dist Loads Load Case 1 The Load legend is activated by selecting the check box next to the load colour scheme in the Symbol Display dialog available from the Display menu Legend Properties Legends are drawn in the corners of a window by default this is the top right hand corner The position of the legends can be modified by the user via the Legend submenu contained within the Display menu The font size and style used to draw the legend can also be customised using the commands in the Legend submenu In many instances it is also possible to customise the colour of each item in the legend This can be done via the submenu or by double clicking on the colour box in the legend Note that many legends use the same list of legend colours and that editing the colour of an item in one legend will be affect the colour in many legends A popup menu can also be activated by right clicking the mouse on the legend The popup menu has options to edit the colours style and position of the legend and to choose the current colour scheme Centre of Gravity Multiframe calculates and displays the centre of gravity of the model while you work The CG can be displayed graphically in the drawing windows and is also displayed at the bottom of
278. oad Patch Remove all loads from the selected patches in the Load window Chapter 3 Multiframe Reference Global Patch Point Load Add a point load to each of the selected patches in the Load window A dialog box will appear which allows you to specify the magnitude locations and direction A global point load acts parallel to one of the global x y or z axes Local Patch Point Load Add a local point load to each of the selected patches in the Load window A dialog box will appear which allows you to specify the magnitude locations and direction of the load A local distributed load acts parallel to one of the local x y or a member axes Global Patch Load Add a pressure load to each of the selected patches in the Load window A dialog box will appear which allows you to specify the magnitude and direction A global point load acts parallel to one of the global x y or z axes Local Patch Load Add a local pressure load to each of the selected patches in the Load window A dialog box will appear which allows you to specify the pressure magnitude and direction of the load A local distributed load acts parallel to one of the local x y or a member axes Unload Plate Remove all loads from the selected plates in the Load window Global Plate Load Add a pressure load to each of the selected plates in the Load window A dialog box will appear which allows you to specify the pressure magnitude and direction A global distrib
279. oads as they will be displayed in the current view gt Click on the icon which shows the direction in which the moment is to act gt Type in the value for the magnitude of the moment gt Press Tab and type in the position of the load measured from joint 1 gt Click on the OK button There is no need to enter or signs for your moment magnitudes The directions are determined from the icon that you select When you enter positions of loads in the member loading dialogs or the Data window you can enter calculation expressions for the position For example if you want a load to be at mid span you can enter L 2 for its position If you enter this in a load dialog this expression will be calculated for all the selected members This means you can apply this load to a number of members of different lengths simultaneously You can also enter more complicated expressions such as 2 L 3 or 1 35 L 4 2 The variable L is always available and contains the length of the member the syntax of the expressions is the same as that used in the CalcSheet Multiple loads of the same magnitude and direction may be added to the members by entering a comma separated list of load positions Local Moment A local moment is a bending moment that acts part way along a member and acts about one of the local axes To apply a local moment to a member gt Select the member or members to be loaded gt Choose Local Moment from the Load menu or the short cut
280. oints and Members Drawing in Multiframe will also automatically align to joints and members in your model Page 33 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 34 You can control which parts of the model the cursor will snap to when drawing via the Drawing Settings dialog from the Geometry menu This dialog gives you options to snap to e Joints e Members e Member quarter points e A customised number of points along members e Perpendicular point on member The option to snap to a perpendicular point on a member is only used to snap the second end of a line been drawn such that the line is drawn perpendicular to the existing member When drawing in a 3D view the drawing defaults to be located in the current working plane This plane is the plane oriented most perpendicular to the current viewing direction which passes through the current drawing depth The axes indicating the origin of the coordinate system highlight the axes that identify the orientation of the drawing plane When the cursor snaps to an existing item in the model the drawing will snap to this point in 3D space When drawing is a 2D view snapping to existing pasts of the model out of the current drawing plane can be a problem For example when trying to draw a planar structure in front of an existing part of the model the cursor may snap to existing objects which can move the drawing from the current working plane To avoid this problem all drawing can be forced to occur in th
281. om the Geometry menu or from the Geometry toolbar To move an opening gt Select openings gt Choose Move from the Geometry menu or icon button Page 62 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe i File Edit View Select Geometry Group Frame Load Display Case Analyse Time Design Window Help Debug Ose st melye St 8Qre BAA i tHe S OS 6 F III ek EH EU z is Vad E i vger a flot ei ei ai A A A mA A Inc A Rem m Aam Jif ll VC wl e n e aja o a dla aa aajt e Geometry ea o h y A A of Move selection Seen pen mp mg emm File Edit View Select Geometry Group Frame Load Display Case Analyse Time Design Window Help Debug PLESALA eg Aare 8 AA Be S OS SB t E e A D FE Py Ry E Glo m G Set alist Vda SEH D ll lo d ei ei ad d a A A 8 3 8 J BR Bo m Am oe J IZ t 7 VS i a t E 0 ole Dei Geometry el o 05 ng ale o M Move selection appa Opening Rotate Multiframe allows openings to be rotated in structural designing Rotate command is available from the Geometry menu or from the Geometry toolbar To rotate an opening gt Select openings gt Choose Rotate from the Geometry menu or icon button Page 63 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe ES Multiframe4D Frai Select Geometry Group Frame Load Display Case Analyse Time Design Window Help ai Is File Edit View A e Il fl CS QQ e amp El D susre Dat D
282. om the left hand end of the member gt Click on the number in the second column of the points row gt Type in a new distance of the point from the left hand joint gt Press the Enter key The row s values will be re calculated and re displayed to show the values at the new location Spring Actions To display a table of the actions in spring member gt Choose Spring Actions from the Results sub menu under the Display menu The table of spring member actions displays the number of each member the member labels and the members joints in the first three columns The remaining columns display the values of the six member actions in the spring members End Spring Actions To display a table of the actions in member end springs gt Choose End Spring Actions from the Results sub menu under the Display menu For each end spring in the model the first three columns in the table of end spring actions displays the number of member to which the spring is attached the members label and the end of the member at which the spring is located The remaining columns display the values of the six member actions in each end spring Patch Internal Forces To display the patch internal forces gt Choose Patch Internal Forces from the Results sub menu under the Display menu Chapter 2 Using Multiframe m 2 zl 8 200 2000 aooo oooi Am Am woo Am aara Am um 20 4 gt Patch Internal Forces A Patch Stresses
283. ome of the data describing the frame may be lost as this information is not supported in the old file format The results of analyses are also omitted from the exported file Time History Results The results of a time history analysis can be exported to a text file To export a frame saved in the Spreadsheet text file format gt Choose Time History Results from the Export sub menu gt Specify the name and location of the file to be exported using the Save File dialog Upon choosing a file the Export Time History Results dialog will be displayed Complete the option in this dialog as described above and press OK Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Export Time History Results x Format Time vs DOF Time 0 000 Time 0 010 Data Time 0 020 Time 0 030 f All Joints Selected Joints Time 0 040 Time 0 050 EI Forces Reactions Time 0 060 Time 0 070 Joint axes Time 0 080 Time 0 090 Ce Local C Global Time 0 100 Directions W x y Woz Cancel All Times gt Click OK The data to be exported can be controlled by the user who can select which joints degrees of freedoms and time steps to be saved in the text file The displacements and or reactions to be exported can be written to the text file in one of the following 4 formats e Time vs DOF data is exported as a single table with each row representing a single time step and each column representing a single degree of freedom e Node vs DOF d
284. on Delete a section from the sections library Section Colours Edit the colour associated with each section Materials Submenu The materials menu has commands for adding editing and deleting materials within the current sections library Add Material Add a new material to the sections library Edit Material Edit the data for material in the sections library Delete Material Delete a material from the sections library View Menu The View menu contains commands for controlling the appearance of the display in the graphical window Page 267 Chapter 3 Multiframe Reference Page 268 Zoom Ctrl W or mouse wheel Zoom in on part of the current display A cross hair will appear and the view to be viewed in close up may be selected by pressing the mouse button and dragging a rectangle surrounding the area of interest Release the button to draw the zoomed view Pan Ctrl E Pan across the structure displayed in the front window Press and drag in the window to move the frame Shrink Ctrl R or mouse wheel Reduce the size of the drawing in the front window to half its current size Size To Fit Ctrl T or Home Scale the drawing in the front window so that it just fits inside the window The Size To Fit menu is a sub menu of the View menu and is described in detail following this section on the View menu Clipping See Size To Fit Submenu Masking See Masking Submenu Current View
285. on engineering convention is to use Ix and Iy for the major and minor moments of inertia of a section for a member with a section orientation of zero Iz corresponds to the conventional Ix while Iw corresponds to the conventional Iy The Multiframe Sections Library uses the conventional Ix Iy notation for the two moments of inertia of the sections stored in the library Member Actions Multiframe computes member actions relative to the local member coordinate system When calculating an action at an intermediate point along a member Multiframe checks the free body diagram of the member to the left of the point of interest and uses the balance of forces at this point for the sign of the computed action As an example consider the shear force at a point on a simple beam subject to a central point load Page 303 Chapter 4 Multiframe Analysis Page 304 Following the above approach at the left hand portion of a beam the sum of the shear forces is therefore positive as shown in the diagram above For the common case of a beam with joint at the left hand end and joint 2 at the right hand end a load acting downwards will be negative in magnitude and the forces will be as shown below Shear Jeri Mament Deflection When you specify the loads applied to a structure it will not be necessary to enter the signs of the load magnitudes since Multiframe will offer you a number of icons to choose from to specify a direction Modal Analy
286. onal properties as well as the dimensional information about the sections This is particularly useful when copying information to a spreadsheet for further processing see Appendix E for more information Materials In Multiframe the materials properties used in the analysis and design of a member can be defined in number of ways In older versions of Multiframe materials properties for design i e E and G were stored as section properties and as such it was only necessary to allocate a section type to a member in order to define it s materials properties In the current version of Multiframe a material may now be assigned to members by the user However this is often unnecessary as a material will be automatically assigned to a member when a section type is specified as sections in the library now store a material which is used as the default material for members in Multiframe Note that this default material associated with the section will only be assigned to the member if a material has not been previously assigned to the member Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Note Older Libraries and Models When using older libraries and frames the elastic material properties required for analysis will still be obtained from the section properties Member Materials The Sections Libraries provided with Multiframe also have a list of pre defined properties for the most commonly used materials If you wish to use materials other than those pre de
287. ons in the Plot window Which data to display is controlled by two hierarchical menus and the deflection item under the Display menu To display a force diagram gt Choose the desired item from Actions sub menu under the Display menu To display a stress diagram gt Choose the desired item from Stress sub menu under the Display menu To display deflections Chapter 2 Using Multiframe gt Choose the Deflection item from the Display menu You can choose to display a number of diagrams simultaneously in the Plot window This applies to both structure and member diagrams Member Diagrams The diagrams of individual members can also display bending moments shear forces axial forces torque or deflections To obtain a diagram for an individual member gt Double click on the member you wish to view in detail aplot C BEE 5 29 kN m 5 29 kN m O OOKN Lg 2 30 kN 4 60 m i 4 60m Static Case Load Case 1 Member 1 200UB18 2 The local diagram for that member will then be drawn in the Plot window The maximum and minimum values on the diagram are displayed below the graph and below these two numbers indicate the value of the diagram at the position of the grey crosshair and the distance of that crosshair from the left hand end of the member You can drag the crosshair up and down the length of the member to determine the value of the diagram at any position The crosshair will remain in the position where you release the
288. ons to compute the deflections in the structure The internal forces and reactions are then computed from these deflections Multiframe does take into account deformations due to shear action in deep beams if the Member Shear option in the Frame menu has been turned on Multiframe does not take into account deformations due to warping deformation due to torsion Axes and Sign Convention Multiframe uses two coordinate systems for defining geometry and loading The global coordinate system is a right handed x y z system with y always running vertically and x and z running horizontally Gravity loads due to self weight are always applied in the negative y direction To distinguish between local and global axes Multiframe uses the suffix to indicate a local axis Page 301 Chapter 4 Multiframe Analysis Local Member Axes Joint 1 ma Joint 2 y Section S Global Axes Axes Each member in the structure is defined by the two joints at its ends The local coordinate system is a right handed x y z system with the x axis running along the member from joint 1 to joint 2 The direction of the y axis is specified by your setting of the section orientation The orientation is the angle between the y axis and a vertical plane passing through the ends of the member measured from the vertical plane towards the y axis as viewed from joint 2 looking towards joint 1 Multiframe uses six degrees of freedom at each joint when performing its
289. operties table in the Data window Applying Loads Changes to the loads that are applied to the structure may be made in the Load window Loads may be added to the structure or removed from it and can be applied as a number of different load cases These load cases may be factored together to produce combined load cases if desired Loads are entered in the current load units as controlled by the Units command from the View Menu All of the commands under the Load menu operate on the current load case The name of the current load case is displayed in the bottom left hand corner of the Load window Also the name of the current load case has a check mark beside it in the Case menu You can set the current load case by choosing the appropriate name from the list of load case names under the Case menu or from the pop up menu in the Load Case toolbar Loads are added by selecting joints or members and choosing the appropriate load command You can delete all the loads from joints or members by selecting the joints or members and pressing the Delete key Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Joint Load A joint load is a force that is applied at a joint in the structure Joint loads can be applied relative to the global coordinate system in which case the forces act in a direction parallel to one of the reference x y or z axes Joint loads may also be specified using the local orientation of a joint in which case the loads act parallel to the direct
290. option will be very useful for users to interact with mesh density along the edges to their adjacent patches Extrude Rider Bar Multiframe allows patches to be created surrounding a patch opening like a rider bar in marine design Extrude rider bar command is available from the Geometry menu or from the patch opening context menu To extrude rider bar of a patch opening gt Select patch openings in the Frame window and mouse right click Page 49 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe gt Choose Extrude Rider Bar Patch Opening Properties Add Opening Auto generate Patch Openings Convert Opening to Patch Convert Member to Patches Mask To Selection Ctrl M Mask Out Selection Ctrl Shift M gt Edit extrude properties 1 000 Page 50 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe gt Click OK Delete Patch Opening Edges Either patch or opening edges cannot be deleted unless their parent patches or openings have been deleted Meshing a Patch To change the mesh densities of patches gt Double click on the patch in the Frame window or Select a group of patches to be changed in the Frame window gt Right click and choose Patch Meshing from the pop up menu Patch Mesh Settings Meshing Uniform Mesh Side 1 Side 2 C Non uniform Mesh Mesh size O 000 Ir n OK em j Lx For uniform meshes specify the mesh density along each side of the patch For non uniform meshes type in a v
291. orey building that is often represented as a single line spaning the height of the building When this occurs it is necessary for the user to subdivide members in the model to ensure intersecting members are connected at a joint This is readily done in Multiframe using the Intersect Member command Page 235 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 236 When importing DWG DXF files as a model new members imported from the file will be labelled using the drawing layer from which the member originated When Multiframe imports a DWG DXF file as construction lines each line in the file is used to store a construction lines An arc will be store as multi line segments with bulge factors Import Construction Lines Multiframe can read in 2D and 3D DWG DXF files as construction lines This means you can create the geometry for a frame in a CAD program and then save it in DWG DXF format to be read into Multiframe When reading a DWG DXF file as construction lines Multiframe will extract all of the LINE LINE3D ARC and POLYLINE entities from the file and store each line segment as a Multiframe construction line In order to create patches based on construction lines it will be automatically broken into 3 pieces of construction lines if a construction line is closed Multiframe allows users to create members and patches based on construction lines To import a DWG DXF file dwg or dxf as construction lines gt Choose Construct line DWG DXF f
292. ose Spreadsheet Text from the Export sub menu gt Specify the name and location of the file to be exported using the Save File dialog gt Choose which load cases are to be exported gt Click OK Daystar Text Multiframe outputs a tabular summary of member actions in a format suitable for input to the Day Star Text AISC steel code checking program available from DayStar Software Inc To export a frame saved in the Daystar Text file format gt Choose Daystar Text from the Export sub menu gt Specify the name and location of the file to be exported using the Save File dialog More information about the Daystar s software can be obtained form their web site at http www daystarsoftware com Microstran Archive Files Multiframe supports exporting the Microstran archive file format version 4 While not all the features in Multiframe and Microstran are compatible the majority of the geometry topology and loading can be exchanged via this file format To export a frame saved in the Spreadsheet text file format gt Choose Microstran Archive from the Export sub menu gt Specify the name and location of the file to be exported using the Save File dialog Upon choosing a file the Import Export Options dialog will be displayed Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Import Export Options Units mn kN degrees T Section Name Mapping C None Automatic f Use Mapping File Browse i Manuali pie
293. ose on top of each other using this command Rotating Members You can use the Rotate command from the Geometry menu to rotate the selected joints in the Frame window gt Select the part of the structure to be rotated gt Choose Rotate from the Geometry menu A dialog box will appear with the rotation centres and angles Rotate a al Rotate About Angle foo ft Hu foo oo degrees H joo ooo ft Hu Wun ooo degrees EK oo ft Bz Io teres Ip gt Enter the coordinates of the axis you wish to rotate the selection about gt Enter the magnitude of the rotation for the appropriate axis gt Click the OK button Rotating is done relative to the axis you specify with the coordinates For example suppose you wanted to rotate the whole frame by 30 about a line parallel to the z axis passing through the point x 10 y 20 You would first select the whole frame and then you would enter x 10 y 20 z 0 x 0 y 0 z 30 in the Rotate dialog Multiframe will not create a connection between joints that you superimpose on top of each other using this command Chapter 2 Using Multiframe When rotating the selected joints you should enter only one non zero angle That is Multiframe can only do one rotation at a time Extruding Beams or Columns When you wish to add beams or columns to an existing frame you may find it easier to use the Extrude command rather than drawing the new members with the mouse The Extrude command al
294. osition If you enter this in a load dialog this expression will be calculated for all the selected members This means you can apply this load to a number of members of different lengths simultaneously You can also enter more complicated expressions such as 2 L 3 or 1 35 L 4 2 The variable L is always available and contains the length of the member the syntax of the expressions is the same as that used in the CalcSheet Local Distributed Load A local distributed load is a load which is distributed along all or part of the member and acts in a direction either normal shear or tangential axial to the member To apply a local distributed load to a member gt Select the member or members to be loaded gt Choose Local Dist d Load from the Load menu or short cut menu A dialog box will appear with icons to indicate the shape of the load and its direction relative to the member Local Distributed Load Shape Left Magnitude 1 000 KN Arr Right Magnitude H O00 KN rn Left Distance 0 000 m Right Distance 0 000 m Cancel gt Click on the icon which shows the shape of the load gt Click on the icon which shows the direction in which the load is to act gt Type in values for the magnitude of the load at each end gt Click on the OK button There is no need to enter or signs for your load magnitudes The directions are determined from the icon that you select When you enter positions of loads in the m
295. out which they provide rotational stiffness Springs acting in a local axis system are aligned to the local axis system of the node to which they are attached Springs may also be defined as tension or compression only As the behaviour of the spring is no longer linear only a nonlinear analysis considering tension compression only effects will correctly model these types of springs In all other analyses the springs will be treated as a normal spring with no tension compression only effects All restraints springs and prescribed displacements that are applied to a joint are specified in the local coordinate system at each joint The local coordinate system is typically the same as the global coordinate system but can be modified using the Joint Orientation feature described later in this chapter After you have added a spring to the frame you can change its properties by double clicking on the spring icon in the Frame window You can also edit the individual stiffness s of the spring in the Springs table in the Data window Page 106 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Editing Restraints Numerically You can display and edit tables of springs and restraints in the Data window You can use the commands from the Data sub menu under the Display menu to control which table is on display at any time To change the value of a restraint or spring gt Click on the number you wish to change gt Type in the new value gt Press the enter key W
296. perties in the sections library To view the names of these properties gt Choose Edit Section from the Sections submenu under the Edit menu Edit Section Properties Lancel 14 E 59000000 kei SCZ When you view the table of properties for a section the name of each property will be shown in the left hand column of the table For example if you wished to compute the shear stress in the web of a member you could enter a calculation such as Shear Stress V y D tw Where Vy is the shear force variable and D and tw are the section depth and web thickness taken from the properties for the section The constant Pi is also provided as a variable in the CalcSheet Page 229 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 230 Saving Calculations To save the calculations you have created gt Ensure the CalcSheet window is in front gt Choose Save As from the File menu You can then save the calculations file on disk The calculations in Multiframe are stored independently from the structure you are working on so you can use the same calculations on a number of different structures Printing Multiframe offers a number of options for controlling the output of data or results to a printer Multiframe can print text numbers and graphics Page Setup Before printing data or diagrams from Multiframe it is first necessary to set up the page size and the print quality The Page Setup command from the File menu can be used to
297. plates This data includes plate numbers label joint number and release details Plate Loads Display a table of plate data describing the loads of the plates This data includes plate numbers label load shape direction and magnitudes etc Analysis Settings Display a table summarizing the setting used in the nonlinear analysis of each load case Results Submenu The items in the Results sub menu allow you to specify which table of results should be displayed in the Results window Displacements Display the computed joint displacements for the current load case in the Result window Reactions Display the computed joint reactions for the current load case in the Result window Member Actions Display the computed member actions for the current load case in the Result window Max Member Actions Display the maximum actions on members for the current load case in the Result window Spring Member Actions Display the actions within spring members for the current load case in the Result window Member Stresses Display the computed stresses at the end of each member for the current load case in the Result window Max Member Stresses Display the maximum stresses on members for the current load case in the Result window Member Details Display the member actions and stresses at the number of points along a selected member Member Buckling Multiframe 3D and 4D only Display the results of buckling a
298. point must be defined inside the structure All the loads will be applied to from thus point depending whether the fluid is inside or outside of the structure As a first guess Multiframe uses the centre of gravity of the structure If this not correct the user can define a point themselves Copy settings from previous Hydrostatic Load Case If you have already defined a hydrostatic load case it is possible to copy the settings from that load case by ticking the check box at the bottom of the add Hydrostatic load case dialog Member Hydrostatic Individual member hydrostatic factors can be edited by using the Member Hydrostatic dialog To edit the member hydrostatic gt Select one or more members gt Choose Member Hydrostatic from the Case menu Chapter 2 Using Multiframe The following dialog will be displayed 6 Ignore Indude V Apply to all Hydrostatic load cases ma Members can be completely ignored no hydrostatic load applied or the direction of the hydrostatic load switched Patch Plate and Load Panel Hydrostatic A dialog similar to that for member hydrostatic can be used to edit individual patch plate or load panel hydrostatic factors Plate selection must be turned on and one or more plate selected to access the plate hydrostatic dialog Evaluating Expressions Many of the dialog fields in Multiframe allow you to enter a math expression instead of a real number The mathematical expressio
299. ported using drawing layers each layer representing an item in the legend VRML VRML is a format used to view 3D models in an Internet web browser You can also embed these models in web pages to provide online display of your projects The VRML export option is only available when the frame is rendered m the active window To export a frame saved in VRML format gt Choose VRML from the Export sub menu gt Specify the name and location of the file to be exported using the Save File dialog More information on VRML can be found at http www web3d org Multiframe Text Multiframe has the capability of saving files in a text format This facility is designed to allow pre and post processing programs to transfer information to and from Multiframe The file may also be used as a convenient summary of the data in a human readable format To export a frame saved in Multiframe s text file format Page 241 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 242 gt Choose Multiframe Text from the Export sub menu gt Specify the name and location of the file to be exported using the Save File dialog This format of the Multiframe s text file is described in Appendix D of this document Spreadsheet Text The Spreadsheet text output is a summary of maximum actions for each member in the frame and is in a format suitable for input to a spreadsheet such as Excel or Lotus To export a frame saved in the Spreadsheet text file format gt Cho
300. pter 3 Multiframe Reference Delete Case The Delete Case command allows you to delete one or more load cases Linear Results This command displays the linear results of the current load case Nonlinear Results This command displays the nonlinear results of the current load case Mode Shapes submenu Multiframe 4D The submenu contains items to select each of the modes shapes computed by a modal analysis The results associated with selected mode shape will be displayed within the application This affects the display of deflections in the Plot and Result windows EE Display and allow editing of loads associated with the selected load case in the Load and Data windows Display results for the selected load case in the Plot and Result windows Load Case Ctrl L Dialog box that allows you to choose a load case Add Case Submenu The Add Case submenu allows you to enter load factors if desired Self Weight Adds a Self Weight Load Case Static Adds a Static Load Case Static Combined Combines and factors several load cases Envelope Adds an Envelope Load Case Time History Multiframe 4D Adds a Time History Load Case Seismic Multiframe 4D Adds a Seismic Load Case Analyse Menu Linear Linear Analysis Nonlinear Nonlinear Analysis Page 295 Chapter 3 Multiframe Reference Page 296 Buckling A new type of analysis has been added for analysing frames which are used for lifting calculations
301. r Toolbar allows you perform functions such as Add Member Delete Member and Sub divide Member Geometry Toolbar Makes the Geometry toolbar visible or invisible in the Frame Window The Geometry Toolbar allows you perform functions such as rotating duplicating and shearing part of a frame Drawing Toolbar Makes the Drawing toolbar visible or invisible in the Frame Window The Drawing Toolbar allows you perform functions such as adding and deleting members It also allows the user to control various settings related to snapping and drawing Drawing load panel Toolbar Makes the Drawing load panel toolbar visible or invisible in the Frame Window The Drawing Load Panel Toolbar allows you perform functions such as adding and rotating support edges Load Panel Symbol Toolbar Makes the load panel symbol toolbar visible or invisible The Load Panel Symbol Toolbar allows you perform functions such as displaying axes numbers labels support edges tributary areas panel loads and simulated member loads etc Drawing patch Toolbar Makes the Drawing patch toolbar visible or invisible in the Frame Window The Drawing Patch Toolbar allows you perform functions such as adding rotating and flipping local axes Load Patch Symbol Toolbar Makes the patch symbol toolbar visible or invisible The Patch Symbol Toolbar allows you perform functions such as displaying internal meshes edge nodes internal nodes colour fill edges axes numbers
302. r Se aa r a Saz Ge l EE EE 77 004 Ti Fa a Geen 2 ane S Soo SE i SE 4606 Ge TAIE ETERN S SA E Sr ce eae SEN a tee Sa Seng EE ere 55507 EE e i vale ie ie S FoF ENTEN pee 5507 E EEN Ee 3 BT Tis G ES ER angie me peg m GE z Saz Ss 7 EE eg 53304 D EN ode a S G Se ae S ec e EE GE oe sear Em ITT GCTTTTTTTTTTTTHTTTTTTTTTTTOTTTOTTTTTTTTTTHTTTTTTTTTTTTOTTTOTTTTTTTTTHTTTTTTTTTOTTTTTTTTTOTTTTTTCTTTTTTETTTTTTTTUTTTTOTOTTTCTUTTTCTTTNTTTTTTTTTCTTTTOTTTTTTTTTTOTTTTTCTTTTE You can copy this table to a spreadsheet for calculations of quantities and or costs If you copy the whole table you can easily calculate the total weight of the structure by summing the values in the Total Weight Column Total Mass L xeeS 6 L vedeS 8 L d g Srectere Weight ZA F If you want to calculate the cost of structural painting you might use the values in the Length D B tf and tw columns to find the total surface area and use this as a basis for your costing ees J Bri ce Ares wg 9 906 d A 9 906 oe 9 906 oe L rda i 15 875 fie Lae de S 8 15 875 Za L rda 15 875 Za LU r Example 4 Finding Maximum Forces After you have analysed a structure Multiframe displays a table of the member actions in the Result window You can copy this table to a spreadsheet and then sort it to find for example the members with the greatest axial force Aerie S Ascending e Ascending e Ascending Ch Descending O Descending O D
303. r of the Frame Load and Plot windows can be used to display a range of two and three dimensional views of a structure Each window has its own view and is controlled separately by its view button Front Ri i fear Ld Bottom You can change the view by clicking on the View button and then clicking on the icon of the view you require You can also change the view by using the View3D toolbar EE The view may also be changed via the Current View submenu in the View menu Page 7 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Rotating a 3D View When you have a 3D view displayed in the Frame Load or Plot windows you can control the angle of view by using the rotation controls at the bottom and right sides of the window The axes indicator indicates the current angle of view Frame 0 The control at the bottom controls the rotation about the y axis while the control on the right hand side controls the rotation about the x axis You can click in the control to move the angle of rotation to the position of the mouse If you hold down the mouse button after clicking in the control you can rotate the structure back and forth until you have the desired angle of rotation If your structure is too large to draw rapidly as you rotate it Multiframe will draw a partial outline of the frame 3D Rotation There is a Rotate command in the View menu and a corresponding Rotate button on the View toolkbar This allows for arbitrary 3D rotation of the cu
304. rawn Page 9 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe If the mouse you are using has a wheel it can be used to dynamically zoom the view Pan Pan allows you to shift the display of the structure within the window upwards downwards to the left or right gt Choose Pan from the View Menu The cursor will change to a four arrowed cursor gt Press inside the window and hold down the mouse button i Fle Edt View Flame Low Display Case Time Window Help sl View gt Drag the drawing to its new location gt Release the mouse button to re draw the contents of the window Page 10 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe You can use the Ctrl E keyboard shortcut to use the Pan command If not enough memory is available to move the image a rectangle the size of the window will be moved around as you move the mouse Shrink Shrink allows you to decrease the size of the drawing on the screen by 50 gt Choose Shrink from the View Menu The drawing will shrink down to 50 of its current size and be re drawn Frame OI View 16 659 y 68 411 2 0 000 dx 65 327 dy 75 46 Frame If the mouse you are using has a wheel it can be used to dynamically zoom or shrink the view Page 11 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 12 Size To Fit Size To Fit automatically resizes the drawing in the front window so that the structure just fits inside the window in the current view This is most useful after you have been
305. rc Convert the selected members in the Frame window into a number of equally sized smaller members in the shape of an arc Add Rect Load Panel Add a rectangle load panel to the structure in the Frame window Position the first joint of the load panel to do a mouse click and then position the second joint to do the second mouse click Add 4 node Load Panel Add a quadrilateral load panel to the structure in the Frame window Position the first joint of the load panel to do a mouse click and then position the second joint to do the second mouse click and then position the third joint to do the third mouse click and then position the last joint to do the fourth mouse click Add 3 node Load Panel Add a triangle load panel to the structure in the Frame window Position the first joint of the load panel to do a mouse click and then position the second joint to do the second mouse click and then position the last joint to do the third mouse click Deleted Load Panel Delete the selected load panels in the Frame window from the structure Add Rect Patch Add a rectangle patch to the structure in the Frame window Position the first joint of the patch to do a mouse click and then position the second joint to do the second mouse click Add N node Patch Add an N node patch to the structure in the Frame window Position the first joint of the patch to do a mouse click and then position the second joint to do the second mouse
306. rc Segment Length 200 000 Ip efault Multitrame Add Delete gt Set the XYZ orientation of the data in the file You can use the radio buttons in the middle of the dialog to specify the orientation of the points in the file relative to the Multiframe coordinate system gt Set the units of the data in the file Click on the radio button corresponding to the units of the data in the file gt Optionally set the arc segment length If you are importing arcs from the file these will be converted into line segments before importing This field can be used to specify the length of the line segments along the arc Note that you can only import ARC objects in the DXF file Arcs within polylines will not be imported you should explode the polyline first before importing gt Optionally save the configuration You can use the Add button at the bottom left of the dialog to add a configuration and save the setting for future usage For example if you frequently import from AutoCAD you might like to set up a configuration named AutoCAD to save your import settings gt Click OK to import the data When Multiframe imports a DXF file each line in the file is used to specify a member in the frame A common problem of importing models from CAD programs is that the each line in the DXF file does not represent a member but rather a number of members A typical example is a column in a multi storey building that is often represented as a single
307. re are no moments shears or other forces associated with the buckling results Modal Results After a modal analysis has completed successfully each mode is stored as a separate case The mode shapes are normalised and stored in the same way as displacements in a static analysis To view the natural frequencies and mode shapes gt Choose the mode shape from the Mode Shapes menu in the Case menu The frequency and period are printed in the bottom left corner of the Plot window To view the mode shape Chapter 2 Using Multiframe gt Select the Plot window gt Choose Deflection from the Display menu There are no moments shears or other forces associated with the modal results Calculations As well as carrying out an analysis of your structure Multiframe allows you to prepare your own design calculations by making use of the CalcSheet facility Design calculations can be prepared and evaluated in the CalcSheet window The calculations may be entered line by line terminating each line by pressing return or enter The calculations should follow the same general syntax as the Basic programming language however only simple calculations are supported There is no support for looping or IF Statements or comparison lt 4 gt operators If the member diagram for a member is currently displayed in the Plot window the section properties and results of analysis for the member will be automatically included as variables in the CalcShe
308. re are two techniques for items The first is by using a rectangular box as described above An alternative to this is to use a line selection in which the user drags the end of a straight line across the screen In this case all opening edges that intersect this line are selected Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Symbols The information displayed in the graphical windows may be modified by the user via the Symbols Dialog This dialog is accessed via the Symbols command in the Display menu Symbol Display x Flot M Plot Values E Force Reactions Member W Numbers T Labels Joint Iw Restraints I Joints Lengths Moment Reactions IW Releases Aves Reaction values IW Masses IW Releases Je Reaction Shading M Links Shrink Members Jh Original Structure IT Labels Masses I Plot Legend Jh Axes Iv Offsets lw Show Enveloped Cases Type E Release Labels sl E Type sl Design Member Iw Design Members Labels Loads Section I Numbers Jh Loads T Names E Length M Load Values Group Name Jh Load Shading Shapes Fene Self weights Axes visible Section Marks Numbers Colour Labels Members Erou sl KE Lecend Aces Support Markers Load 4rea Markers Loads Loads Default Colour sl LH Legend lw Save Settings Corner Edge Loads LKE Cancel This dialog has options to display information related to the joints members and panels in the model For joints t
309. rent along the x axis Positive angles of water current direction represent a rotation anti clockwise Fluid Density Enter a value of fluid density Gravity Enter the value of gravitational acceleration Fluid is Inside the Structure Tick this check box if you are modelling a tank or similar that contains a fluid ie the pressure is pushing out Leave it un ticked if you and modelling a structure that is submerged in a fluid ie a boat Only apply loads to selected items Tick this check box if you only want to apply hydrostatic loads to the patches panels and elements that you had selected in the Load window before opening the Add Hydrostatic Load Case dialog If you leave this check box un ticked Hydrostatic loads will be applied to the whole structure Model Type The hydrostatic load case is intended for two different types of model 1 A ship hull cross section made up of members only In this case the tributary area width is required that the fluid pressure is applied over This would typically be the length of one frame spacing 2 A 3D patch load panel model where the fluid pressure is applied to the patches panels ie a whole ship or a tank Multiframe will detect if there are any patches or load panels in the model and choose the appropriate model type accordingly If this selection is wrong the user can override it Define an Internal Point In order that the loads are applied in the correct direction a internal
310. restraints and springs that are applied to a joint are specified in the local coordinate system at each joint The local coordinate system is typically the same as the global coordinate system but can be modified using the Joint Orientation feature described later in this chapter See the Prescribed Displacement description in the Loads section for information on applying non zero displacements You can modify the restraint or spring on a joint by double clicking on the restraint or spring icon at the joint and not on the joint itself Joint Restraint To specify a restraint at a joint gt Select the joint or joints to be restrained gt Choose Joint Restraint from the Frame menu A dialog box will appear with a range of icons for the various types of restraint xi Restrained displacements OK c y T wy Gr MEMECO Geet gt Click on the appropriate restraint icon gt Click on the OK button Selecting the no restraint icon the first icon in the list will remove all joint restraints from the selected joints Selecting any other icon will remove any prescribed displacements or springs from the selected joints and replace them with the selected restraint Each of the possible restraints is indicated by an icon As you click on the icons the check boxes at the bottom of the dialog will display the degrees of freedom that will be restrained if you select that icon You can also click on the check boxes directly to choose which d
311. rge you can use the Jacobi method This will usually be with smaller frames The Jacobi method is slower but will find modes which are very close together No of Modes The number of natural frequencies and mode shapes required This number must be between 1 and 50 Convergence The minimum value required for the Convergence Error When the convergence error falls below the Convergence the solution has completed successfully The convergence error is calculated at the end of each iteration The convergence error is defined as j K 2 Max Modes oi Q i k 1 Lk Convergence Error i l i k where O Natural Frequency i after iteration k Typically values for the convergence error from 1 0e 3 will give adequate results Max Iterations The number of iterations carried out before the analysis fails The number must be greater than 0 Mode Shape Scaling Specifies the technique used to scale the mode shapes You can choose to scale mode shapes such that the maximum displacement is unity or so that the modal mass 1s unity Mass Matrix Type When performing a dynamic and or time history analysis the buttons Lumped and Distributed allow the user to decide on whether to use a distributed or lumped mass matrix when doing the modal analysis Both matrices are valid so the choice is left up to the user If you are short of memory the lumped mass matrix uses far less memory for storage This is because the matrix is
312. rmore if the mouse is moved in the direction of a member attached to the joint then drawing will be constrained to the direction of that member in 3D space Many of these options can be access via the Drawing Toolbar Page 279 Chapter 3 Multiframe Reference Page 280 Group Menu The Group menu provides commands for organising the members in the structural model into groups or assemblies Create Design Member Group the selected members together to form a multi member design member Remove Design Member Delete or split the selected members from multi member design member s Add Group Adds a new group to the current group set using the selection within the window Edit Group Edits the properties of a group Delete Group Delete a group from the current group set Add to Group Adds the selection as part of a group within the current group set Remove from Group Removes the selection from a group within the current group set Add Group Set Adds a new group set to the model Edit Group Set Edits the properties of a group set Delete Group Set Delete a group set from the model Current Group Set submenu The submenu contains items to select the current group set The current group set is the set displayed in the user interface Frame Menu The Frame menu provides functions for editing the properties of a frame and it s components Joint Restraint Restrain all the joints selected in the Frame
313. rom the Import sub menu If a frame already has construction lines you will be asked if you wish to delete or append the DWG DXF file to the existing construction line list gt Select the file to be imported using the Open File dialog Upon choosing a file the DWG DXF Import Options dialog will be displayed pe Import Configurations Import parameters for DF File Default Maxsurt Cancel Default Multitrame l G Gue Fight see eg E ve Units Up Z eo ow ue fe Front ewe o we Dat Import Options Are Segment Length 200 000 D efault Multiframe Add Delete gt Set the XYZ orientation of the data in the file You can use the radio buttons in the middle of the dialog to specify the orientation of the points in the file relative to the Multiframe coordinate system gt Set the units of the data in the file Click on the radio button corresponding to the units of the data in the file gt Optionally set the arc segment length Chapter 2 Using Multiframe If you are importing arcs from the file these will be stored as line segments with bulge factors gt Optionally save the configuration You can use the Add button at the bottom left of the dialog to add a configuration and save the setting for future usage For example if you frequently import from AutoCAD you might like to set up a configuration named AutoCAD to save your import settings gt Click OK to import the data To create patches selec
314. rrent view in the 3D views of the Frame Load or Plot window The short cut to access this command is Shift MiddleButton click same as Autocad The 3D rotation uses the virtual trackball found in most CAD systems Zoom Pan Shrink and Size To Fit The Zoom Pan Shrink and Size To Fit commands in the View Menu may be used to control the scale of the graphics displayed in the Frame Load and Plot windows Each view within a window has its own scale and centre of interest This means you can have a close up plan view and a far away 3D view in the same window and simply switch from one to another using the View button You can also select these commands from the View toolbar vew E QQ A Ait I I Vi I I Vi I I Vi Zoom Zoom allows you to increase the size of the drawing in the front window gt Choose Zoom from the View Menu gt Move the pointer to the top left hand corner of the area you wish to view in close detail Page 8 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe CR Multi amed D Frame i Fie Edt View Flame Load Display Case Time Window Help k View x 04 772 p27 022 220000 d 798 dy 0 203 geet DIE Lene Dap 228 gt Drag a rectangle down and to the right which encloses the area of interest and release the mouse button S Fie Edt View Flame Load Display Cane Tine Window Help D Canar The window s contents will be re drawn to display the part of the structure contained in the rectangle you have d
315. rties or loads of an individual plate or plates within a patch Changing properties of any plates directly will not affect its parent patch properties Patches and Beams If you add a patch which has beams running along one or more of its edges then the edge beams are assumed to be connected to the patch As you set the density of the mesh of the patch the edge beam s will be subdivided to match the internal nodes of the beam to the edge nodes of the patch This ensures full load and moment continuity between the plate elements in the patch and the beam s Recommended Workflow We recommend that you create your beam model first and then add patches between the beams as required This ensures continuity between beams and patches Of course you are not required to create patches adjacent to beams you can draw them standalone In addition you can add beams to your model after you have added patches Conventions Plate local coordinate system internal forces and stress symbols are shows in the following Z axis points toward to the viewer r Joint 3 Plate Element Joint 1 Joint 2 X The plate element stresses are the forces per unit area that act within the volume of the element to resist the loading These stresses are e In plane direct stresses Sxx and Syy e In plane shear stress Sxy Page 308 Chapter 4 Multiframe Analysis e Transverse shear stresses Sxz and Syz e Transverse direct stress Szz always
316. s There are a number of different load cases that can be added in Multiframe These include a self weight static load case a normal static load case a factored combination of static load cases a Time History load case which can contain dynamically varying forces at one or more joints and a seismic case which applies up to three orthogonal ground accelerations to any restrained joints To create a Time History Load Case gt Select Time History from the Add Load Case sub menu A dialog will appear allowing you to enter the name number and duration of the time steps for this load case along with other relevant information Time History Load Case Analysis Time No of steps jo 8 Start Time oan seconds Increment ano 0 seconds End Time loo second Calculate Envelope Cases Rayleigh D amping Alpha faon Beta joo Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Applying Dynamic Loads To add a dynamic load to the current Time History load case gt Go to the Load window gt Select the joints to which you want to add the load gt Choose Dynamic Load from the Load menu This command is only available when a Time History loadcase has been created and selected A dialog will appear allowing you to specify the direction of the load a factor which will be multiplied by the values in the load series and a pop up to select the load series from the library Dynamic Load r Dynamic Load To Load Factor foo Gees Ho
317. s being measured from a zero angle on the horizontal plane passing through the lower joint Joint 1 will be the leftmost joint in the case of a horizontal or sloping member as viewed in the front or right side views or the bottom most joint in the case of a vertical member You can also change the length and slope of a member by double clicking on it in the Frame window and typing in the new values in the dialog that appears If you change the length of a member Joint 1 will be held fixed and Joint 2 will be moved to give the member the required length The slope will not be changed Similarly changing the slope of a member will move Joint 2 and will leave Joint 1 in the same position while leaving the length of the member unchanged Joint and Member Numbers As you add members and joints to a structure Multiframe will automatically assign numbers to them If you wish to renumber the joints and or members you can do so using the Renumber command from the Geometry menu Renumbering 1s performed by sorting the joints by their coordinates Three levels of sorting are used to perform the renumbering The primary sort is used to first sort joints along a specified direction All joints with the same location in the primary sort direction are then sorted using a secondary sort Finally all joints having the same location in both the primary and secondary sort directions are then sorted using the tertiary sort In 3D the primary sort can be vis
318. s have been implemented in a general sense and changing a member to tension or compression only does not alter the member end releases If a tension or compression only member is not required to resist moments then the appropriate member end releases should be applied Page 127 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Tension only and compression only members are taken into account by a nonlinear analysis These types of members are removed or reinstated to the structure at the end of each iteration based upon the axial deformation of the member The Tension only and compression only aspects of members are ignored in static linear modal or time history analyses they are treated as normal members in these cases To set the member type gt Select the member or members to be modified gt Choose Member Type from the Frame menu A dialog box will appear with radio buttons indicating the types of members Member Type Tension Only C Compression Only gt Click on the radio button corresponding to the type of member you require gt Click on the OK button Member Offsets When modelling a structure there are situations in which members do not extend directly between two joints but are instead offset from the joints In other situations the intersection between two members may be relatively large and can be considered as a rigid link In all these instances the geometry of the model can be specified to more accurately model the structure by
319. s of linear and nonlinear analyses separately The user can swap between the linear and nonlinear results for a particular load case by either choosing the type of results from the Case menu or by clicking on the Linear Nonlinear Results button in the Load Case toolbar The nonlinear results associated with a particular load case are identified by the name of the load case and an appended list of the nonlinear effects used to generate the results The nonlinear effects are abbreviated as follows Ped PSeffect PD P Aeffect Axial shortening Tension only members Compression only members For example the results of a nonlinear analysis considering both the P 6 and P A effects would be named as Load Case 1 P d P D This name is displayed when nonlinear results are present in the Plot and Results windows It is also used when selecting results in the Report or Design dialogs Natural Frequencies In Multiframe4D you can display a table showing the results of a modal analysis Chapter 2 Using Multiframe gt Choose Natural Frequencies from the Result sub menu under the Display menu Each row shows the frequency and period for that mode shape In addition the table displays the participation factors and participating mass ratios for each direction as well as the modal mass for each mode shapes The units for each quantity are shown underneath the title of the column in the table Member Buckling In Multiframe3D and Mul
320. s the adding of wind loads from a defined to direction to the whole structure To create a Wind Load Case gt Choose Wind from the Add Case menu in the Case menu A dialog will be displayed which allows you to enter details of the wind strength and direction and which variables you would like to be automatically calculated Multiframe converts this information loads on the structure Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Wind Load case Name Wind 1 Wind Profile Height Velocity Air density rho o x Wind direction theta deg Z Indude Member Factors Members Auto calculate Patches E Kar aspect ratio correction factor Load panels Ki inclination factor Friction Drag Cf section drag force coefficients Date doa Panel Factors User Defined O Internal Pressure Auto calculate Cp e external pressure coefficient Ka area reduction factor Cp e values Set Pressure Coeffs Ave roofheight h 10 000 rT Ke combination factor 1 000 Copy settings from previous Wind Load Case Wind Profile Define the wind velocity profile as pairs of height and velocity values A height of zero is equivalent to the global axis origin ie y 0 Use the Add Row button to increase the number of points that defines the profile Select a row and press Delete to remove a row The wind profile is shown graphically as you enter the values It is possible to enter negative heights if the origin is not at the base of your structure The
321. s to be specified gt Choose Section Type from the Frame menu A dialog box will appear with a list of the groups and sections available in the Sections Library Select Section Group Section 0 Sq Tube Rect Tube x z Cancel gt Click on the name of the group you wish to choose from gt Click on the name of the section you wish to choose gt Click the OK button You must specify the section type for every member in the structure before carrying out the analysis You can display the sectional shapes on the members m the Frame window by using the Symbol command from the Display menu and turning on Section Shapes Adding a Standard Section If the structural section you require is not contained in the Sections Library you can define your own section and store it in the library or store it with the structure If the shape of the section is one of the standard shapes supported within Multiframe then the section can be added by specifying the dimensions of the shape and Multiframe will compute the properties of the section Adding sections with non standard shapes is described in the next section Page 115 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe The sections are arranged in the library in groups Each of the groups usually consists of a range of sections of a similar type This corresponds to the various tables of sections found in engineering handbooks At the end of the list of groups are a number of groups labelled
322. sect or are contained inside the selection rectangle When performing a drag selection there are two techniques for items The first is by using a rectangular box as described above An alternative to this is to use a line selection in which the user drags the end of a straight line across the screen In this case all patch edges that intersect this line are selected Page 21 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 22 Select Opening Edges There are many techniques and commands that are used to selecting opening edges like selecting a opening edge within a graphical window The most common way of selecting items is by using the mouse To select a single opening edge gt Click the area inside the opening edge The selected opening edge is drawn with the current selection colour to make it appear highlighted A different colour for drawing the selection can be set via the Colour command in the View menu To extend or reduce the selection gt Shift click on an unselected opening edge to add it to the current selection gt Shift click on a selected opening edge to remove it from the current selection gt Shift drag to invert the selection in the selection rectangle To select a group of items gt Drag from left to right a rectangle which encloses the opening edges to be selected gt Drag from right to left to select all opening edges which intersect or are contained inside the selection rectangle When performing a drag selection the
323. see Local Axes between joints below Note that this is distinctly different from the true local member axes which are aligned with the actual position and orientation of a member after the member offset has been applied Ay Local Member Axes Ay Local Axes between nodes If the offset is the same along the length of the whole member then tick the Same offset at both nodes checkbox and the offsets at the right hand node will be copied across Member End Springs Modelling of semi rigid connections in Multiframe is performed using Member end springs Each member end spring is modelled as an individual item within the structural model Furthermore each end spring is associated with only a single member and then only with one end of the member This distinction is important as an end spring should not be considered to be properties of a member Whenever a spring is specified at an end of a member a new end spring is added to the model To add Member or edit end springs to a member Page 129 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 130 gt Select the member or members to be modified gt Choose Member End Springs from the Frame menu Member End Springs i xX Major Bending Minor Bending Major Shear Minor Shear Axial Torsion Model Spring Stiffness sl 0 000 Keni irad For each component of the member end forces that you which to make semi rigid gt Click on the tab corresponding to the component
324. ses L IM Frequencies IY Modes 4 lt 1 lt 1 lt 1 lt 1 lt 1 4 41 ais Print selected members and E joints only Cancel gt Turn on the Print selected members only check box if you only want output for selected parts of the frame gt Click the OK button The Print Preview dialog will then appear You can use the Titles button in this dialog to set optional header and footer information such as file name date time etc e Click the Print button to print out the report Printing Diagrams You can print out a list of member diagrams for the members selected in the front window To print member diagrams for a range of members gt Select the members in the front window gt Choose Print Diagrams from the File menu Page 231 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 232 Print Diagrams x Diagrams Load Cases Jh Fy kW Ma hd Mu Jw Tr h Mu Jw Val Jw Sy M Gu Jw Gs M Sbe top Jk Sby lett M Sbz bottom M Sby right W Se 4Sbe top Iw Sx Sby left h Se 4Sbe bottom W Ss Sby right Jw du Jw dz Cancel gt Choose the actions and load cases that you wish to print gt Click the OK button The Print Preview dialog will then appear You can use the Titles button in this dialog to set optional header and footer information such as file name date time etc e Click the Print button to print out the report Print Window To print out the contents of the front window gt Choose Print W
325. set up the page size you will be using in the printer This set up need only be done once and all subsequent printing will use this format Setting up the Printer First ensure that your printer is attached to your computer with an appropriate cable and that it is switched on and has sufficient paper loaded Refer to your computer s owner guide or your printer manual if you have any problems gt Choose Page Setup from the File menu A dialog box will appear which allows you to choose the paper size and orientation set the size of margins for printing and type in text to appear at the head and foot of each page of paper printed Select the paper size you have installed in your printer You can also choose to enlarge or reduce the printout and adjust the output with a number of other options Colour printing is supported on Postscript printers that provide colour output Printing Reports When printing a report summary of Multiframe data you can print data for the whole frame or restrict the output of results to just the members selected in the front window To print a report gt Optionally select the members in the front window gt Choose Print Summary from the File menu Chapter 2 Using Multiframe print Al Group By Member By Load Case Static Load Cases Report Items Project Properties Structure Load Case Summary Loads Deflections Reactions Member Actions Design Members Design Data Dynamics M Joint Mas
326. shear forces plus the max amp min bending moments along the principal axes and three membrane direct forces shear force plus max amp min membrane forces along the principal axes Patch Stresses To display the patch stresses Choose Patch Stresses from the Results sub menu under the Display menu Result SEE A z Tresca S Sxx Syy Szz Shear Syz Shear Szx Shear Sxy Von Mises foo SE MPa MPa MPa MPa MPa MPa MPa oe 1 1 6 0 096 0 973 0 000 0 002 0 002 0 319 1 081 1 085 2 1 7 0 850 0 850 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 089 0 864 0 939 3 1 26 0 450 0 450 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 369 0 782 0 820 4 1 2 0 973 0 096 0 000 0 002 0 002 0 319 1 081 1085 5 1 1 0 117 0 117 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 549 0 957 1 097 6 2 g 0 850 0 850 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 089 0 664 0 939 7 2 10 0 096 0 973 0 000 0 002 0 002 0 319 1 081 1 085 8 2 27 0 450 0 450 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 369 0 782 0 820 9 2 5 0 117 0 117 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 549 0 957 1 097 10 2 4 0 973 0 096 0 000 0 002 0 002 0 319 1 081 1 085 11 3 11 0 009 1 368 0 000 0 001 0 001 0 058 1 368 1 371 12 3 12 0 789 1 525 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 065 1 326 1 530 dE 3 28 0 383 1 190 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 071 1 060 1 197 14 3 7 0 780 0 943 0 000 0 001 0 001 0 099 0 890 0 990 dE 3 6 0 045 0 925 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 221 1 023 1 067 16 4 14 0 789 1 525 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 065 1 326 1 530 17 4 15 0 009 1 368 0 000 0 001 0 001 0 058 1 368 1 371 18 4 29 0 383 1 190 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 071 1 060 1 197
327. shrink the rendered length of the members back from their actual end locations This can help to visualise the orientation and position of members at a joint The OpenGL check box allows you to turn on and off the use of OpenGL rendering This provides high speed rendering with most graphics cards and also allows use of transparency with clipping and masking You will need to run off OpenGL rendering to print a rendered view to a printer gt Click the OK button The structure will be drawn using rendering until you turn rendering off To turn off rendering choose the Render command and turn off the Hidden Lines check box Page 17 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 18 If you have clipping or masking turned on rendering will only render the visible members If you have drawn custom sections using Section Maker rendering will display the actual shape of the custom section Circular sections are displayed approximately as octagonal shapes Selecting Joints and Members There are many techniques and commands that are used to selecting joint and members within a graphical window The most common way of selecting items is by using the mouse To select a single item gt Click on the item The selected item is draw as using a thicker line size to make it appear bold Typically this will be drawn in black but a different colour for drawing the selection can be set via the Colour command in the View menu To extend or reduce the select
328. sing continue as long as the mouse button is held down Pressing on a scroll arrow results in continuous scrolling Pressing on a menu title pulls down the menu and keeps it down until you release the mouse button To Drag Position the pointer on something Press and hold down the mouse button and move the mouse Release the mouse button To Shift Click Shift click is used to extend or reduce the selection of joints and members Hold down the shift key and click on the joints or members you wish to add to the selection or which you wish to remove from the selection To Ctrl Click Ctrl Click is used to extend or reduce the selection of joints and members Hold down the Ctrl key and click on the joints or members you wish to add to the selection or which you wish to remove from the selection To double click Double click is used to get information about a joint or member in the Frame window Point to the item you wish to double click and then click twice quickly in succession without moving the mouse Summary of Keyboard Techniques Tab You can use the Tab key to move horizontally within a table or to move from one field in a dialog to the next Enter The Enter key can be used to confirm the entry of numbers into a table and is the same as clicking OK in a dialog Arrow Keys The T lt V keys may be used to move the selection in their respective directions in the Data or Result tables or in tables in dialog boxes Delete Backspace T
329. sis Multiframe4D allows you to perform a modal analysis of a frame This analysis will determine the natural frequencies and mode shapes of the frame These frequencies and mode shapes will reflect the interaction between the stiffness of the frame and the inertial effects of its mass and any joint masses you have applied to it Multiframe4D determines the natural dynamic response of the frame by using the subspace iteration method This method solves the equation m k u 0 Where m is the mass matrix is the vector of joint accelerations k is the stiffness matrix and u is the vector of joint displacements The solutions of this equation of undamped free vibration of which there are a number represent the natural responses of the frame Multiframe will calculate the solutions corresponding to the longest periods of vibration i e the lowest frequencies The local member mass matrix used by Multiframe4D varies according to whether a lumped or distributed mass model is chosen in the Analysis dialog Chapter 4 Multiframe Analysis The mass matrix for a lumped model is as follows mL O O O O O LU O O O O O 2 D mL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 mL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 O O O mLIo O O O O O LU O O 2A 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 mL 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 mL 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 mL 0 0 0 2 O O O 0 O O O 0 O mLIo O 0 2A 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
330. ss gi l pltseaAb ell Ja D Ieikal EE Imes Aa ai ei ei ai il 2 A A A3 A les ze FA a sl Aa Ile ll vie IooGsosieomolpeoaleeeeel e oi el e vi M o E d Rotate selection t rotate axes and angle Click OK button gt Draw or inpu abc See 123 e ae HA e m SIR a e amp Bl A A Osea smeel oe Se E a Multiframe4D Fra Malate B Bits Ge B a fei ei ei ei oi ea A 6 A3 Det A Bo EH Lu AIST ll si el el ir ES 3 po ole aaaaj s a a try 0s F eil 3 oF Geome Rotate selection Zeen Patch Opening Edge Extrude Multiframe allows both patch edges and opening edges to be extruded in structural designing Extrude command is available from the Geometry menu or from the Geometry toolbar To extrude a patch opening edge gt Select the patch opening edge gt Choose Extrude from the Geometry menu or icon button Page 64 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe WE Multiframe4D Frame lt File Edit View Select Geometry Group Frame Load Display Case Analyse Time Design Window Help JO ae melee Sell aQe28 FA Ee a D Ey R ey E ms Ow Group Sai Jalil 7 aare mAs ama a amaaa No RAB m en on ls Uleies ll A fee a na aile ee eelz E si vi el e Geometry
331. ssor or drawing program However you may not be aware that you can also copy tables of data from Multiframe into a spreadsheet or copy and paste information from a spreadsheet into Multiframe The basics of copying data in Multiframe are to select the area of the table to be copied by dragging the mouse or shift clicking in the usual way see the Multiframe manual for more details and then copy the data to the clipboard using the Copy command from the Edit menu You can then switch to or start up your spreadsheet click at the location where you want to paste the data and then use the Paste command to place the data into the spreadsheet You can copy data from any of the tables in the Data and Result windows To paste data into Multiframe you reverse the procedure selecting the data to be copied in the spreadsheet choosing the Copy command in the Edit menu and then switching to Multiframe selecting the area to paste it into and then using the Paste command You can paste data into the Joint Member Joint Load and Member Load tables in the Data window Example 1 Generating An Arch As one example of generating data in a spreadsheet and pasting it into Multiframe consider the problem of analysing a parabolic arch To draw or type in the geometry would be very time consuming and difficult to modify if you wanted to consider several options for the shape of the arch You can however use a spreadsheet to generate the geometry of the arch an
332. t Choose a patch stress such as Sxx Syy Szz Sxy Syz SZx Von Mises or Tresca stress from the Patch Stresses sub menu under the Display menu 0 000 MPa Static Case Load Case 1 Sxx Page 219 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 220 Plot ary gora da ele TO d amp Select Member Stress K Select Patch Internal Force Mon Mises Von Mises 0 000 MPa Static Case Load Case 1 Yon Mises Rendering Patch Results Multiframe allows the rendering of the display of the frame in the Frame Load and Plot windows as an aid to visualising the relative sizes and orientation of the sections in the structure Rendering can only be done in the 3D view in a window All the patch diagrams such as patch bending moments shear forces deflection and stresses can be shown To render a diagram for the patch results gt Switch to 3D view from the Current View sub menu under the View menu gt Switch on rendering mode from the Display menu or Click on rendering icon gt Choose a patch diagram to display from the Actions or Patch Stress sub menu under the Display menu ai Plot d VS i e lt d t Select Member Stress Moment Mad Select Patch Stress 0 000 kN m m Static Case Load Case 1 Mxx Q Add Patch Cross Section Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Multiframe allows patch results to be displayed on cross sections Cross sections can be added through Plot Window after a
333. t y 7 A Mxy Myy Mmax ME e L X Y plane eee oeren gt xX Mxy Mxy Mxx E Myy Mxy PLATE BENDING AND TWISTING MOMENTS Page 309 Chapter 4 Multiframe Analysis Transverse Shear not shown Positive transverse shear forces and stresses acting on positive faces point toward the viewer Relationships among global coordinate system patch local coordinate system and joint positive actions are shows below Page 310 Result Symbols Chapter 4 Multiframe Analysis Mxy 9 Mxx Vxz Multiframe provides structural results at all plate nodes In plate local coordinate system MF also gives results at Gauss points and plate centroid Items and their symbols are described in the following table Vxz Vyz Max Myy Mxy Mmax Mmin Fxx Fyy Fxy Fmax Fmin Mx My Mz SZ Syy Szz Syz SZX Sxy Von Mises Tresca Node displacements in the linear dimensions of the model Node rotations in radians Transverse shear forces in patch local coordinate systems Plate bending moments in patch local coordinate systems Plate bending moments in principal axes Plate in plane direct forces in patch local coordinate systems Plate in plane direct forces in principal axes Plate moments in global coordinate systems Normal stresses in plate patch local coordinate systems Shear stresses in plate patch local coordinate systems Von Mises stress Tresca stress Page 311 Chapter 4 Mul
334. t construction lines and mouse right click Add Node N Add Member Insert Add Connected Members Ctrl Insert Add Spring Member Ctrl I y L Draw Rectangular Load Panel Draw 4 sided Load Panel Draw 3 sided Load Panel Add Patch gt Split Patch Merge Patch Auto generate Patches Auto generate Patch Stiffeners Auto generate Patch Hot Spots Add Opening b Select Auto generate Patches command and will get Page 237 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 238 In a similar way users can generate members based on construction line selection Multiframe Text This format of Multiframe s text files 1s described in Appendix D of this document To import a Multiframe text file txt gt Choose Multiframe Text from the Import sub menu gt Select the file to be imported using the Open File dialog Microstran Archive Files A Microstran archive file arc can be opened within Multiframe Frames imported from Microstran cannot be appended to an existing frame To import a Microstran archive file gt Choose Microstran Archive from the Import sub menu gt Select the file to be imported using the Open File dialog Upon choosing a file the Import Export Options dialog will be displayed Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Import Export Options Units E Section Name Mapping C Use Mapping File Emwee W Manually pick missing sections M Add missing sections to Frame group
335. t hand corner of the window as you drag If you have turned on the Grid option the member will move in increments of the grid spacing as you move If you drag a joint on top of an existing joint Multiframe will create a connection between the members that meet at the common point Disconnecting Members When moving part of a frame it is sometimes necessary to disconnect that part of the frame from the rest of the structure To disconnect members from a model gt Select the members to be disconnected from the rest of the frame gt Choose Disconnect Members from the Advanced submenu in the Geometry menu Chapter 2 Using Multiframe The command creates new joints at all the joints that connect the selection to the rest of the model These new joints are then used to define the topology of the disconnected parts of the frame Resizing a Member You can change the length or slope of a member in the Frame window by typing in new values To change the length or slope of a member gt Double click on the member A dialog box will appear with the members name end joint numbers section type length slope and orientation Member 4 Properties Ei steel Grade Constraints serviceability Member Bending Tension Compression Geometry Joints Joint S Joint 4 Length 16 404 tt Slope on 000 deg Orientation Io mp deg Section Group Section me Hee gt Type in new values for the properties you wish
336. t load case in the Plot window Shear Sz Display the computed shear stress in the local z direction for the current load case in the Plot window Axial Sx Display the computed axial stress for the current load case in the Plot window Tensile Sx Display the computed axial tensile stress for the current load case in the Plot window Compressive Sx Display the computed axial compressive stress for the current load case in the Plot window Comb Sx Sbz top Display the combined axial stress and bending stress about the local z axis at the top of each member Comb Sx Sbz bottom Display the combined axial stress and bending stress about the local z axis at the bottom of each member Comb Sx Sby left Display the combined axial stress and bending stress about the local y axis at the left of each member Chapter 3 Multiframe Reference Comb Sx Sby right Display the combined axial stress and bending stress about the local y axis at the right of each member Patch Internal Forces Submenu The items in the Patch Internal Forces submenu may be used to control which type of internal force is displayed in the Plot window Moment Mxx Display the computed plate bending moments about the local xx axis for the current load case in the Plot window Moment Myy Display the computed plate bending moments about the local vw axis for the current load case in the Plot window Moment M
337. t used in the CalcSheet Page 140 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Local Patch Distributed Load A local distributed load is a load which is distributed along all or part of the patch and acts in a direction either normal shear or tangential axial to the patch To apply a local distributed load to a patch gt Select the patch or patches to be loaded gt Choose Local Dist d Load from the Load menu or short cut menu A dialog box will appear with icons to indicate the shape of the load and its direction relative to the patch Local Patch Dist d Load P vil Direction Left Magnitude km Corner 1 Node 3 Corner 2 Node 4 Corner 3 Node 2 Load Positions Left Distance Lx non m LeftDistance Ly on Right Distance Rx on m Right Distance Ry 0 0 gt Click on the icon which shows the shape of the load gt Click on the icon which shows the direction in which the load is to act gt Type in values for the magnitude of the load at each end gt Click on the OK button Note that when working in dialog boxes you can use the Tab key to move from one editing box to the next There is no need to enter or signs for your load magnitudes The directions are determined from the icon that you select When you enter positions of loads in the patch loading dialogs or the Data window you can enter calculation expressions for the position For example if you want a load to start at one third patch sides you can enter L 3 for th
338. tch Openin eege 48 Delete e BR e 49 Edit Patchy Opening Pde eege 49 Paud R de D ee A E E AEE N 49 Delete Pateh Opening BOGGS isccacicscesstecs sivsnsvaseseenssectassedeenstacschusaevisetvavaseetens 51 IVS SA AGC scree ninco cincerenseeers 51 Pateh Mesh PAUL E 52 Display wie a Pae kor Plae casa hee ce cee he teense adeaaacoen 53 Attach Member Pateh to Pate eciec nics tes erer eg 54 Detach Membet Patch to Pate hipaa 55 Align Member to Patch or Load Panel 56 Automatically Align and Offset Member to Patch Load Panel 57 Member EE 57 Add Rounded Corner Rectangular Opening essesssssssssssseeeeressssssssssssssse 58 Convert BER to Pate esia nocedeorysuseenadsciascesuanessa cecdbesessasveneanaues 59 EE 60 EE 61 Eeer EE 62 ME 63 Patch Opening Edge Extrude cccccccsssssssssssseeecccceeeeeceeecaasaaasssssseseeeeeeeeess 64 Generate N sided Patch amp Openng 65 EE 67 Eeer 69 A t senerite Patch SUM EE 70 Allto cenetate Patch HOS DOS eca ar a T2 Connections Between Members 74 SO E 74 EE 76 Converting a Member into an Ac 78 eebe 79 eelere 79 Delete a IMCD EN 80 Automate Genera E 81 Eupen 87 Cylindrical ee reg EE 89 SPHe Cal COOrdindlES seese tence watnsot samen E 91 Movino a Toini EE 91 Typing Joint Coordinates sssessicscic EE EE 92 ee rer erte 93 Alsnine Te jcc ideation saa tice walneal tie eden 93 Moving a Group of Joint i3cc ith eee eet aes 94 MOVIN eege See Eet ee r erste 95 Disconnectine
339. tch intemal Force er Mises If the grid is turned on while you draw the cross section the position of the points will snap to the grid The depth of the member will depend on the setting of the depth for the current view See Depth above for an explanation of how to set this depth Deleting a Cross Section gt In the Plot window select the cross section or cross section s to be deleted gt Choose Delete Cross Section from the Plot menu or gt Press the Delete key D tiers Aver File Edit View Select Geometry Group Frame Load Display Case Analyse Time Design Window Help Debug PELES LEAFA 9aee8 AA Ho S se 4 2 3 EE A D T Pes Ra es E oot elle ss pi zl SF AAD Cll amp RBS S SA SR Serene 1 Seto eee Select cross sections to be deleted Page 222 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Le Ge Et View gt Select Geometry Group Frame Load Display Case Analyse Time Design Window Help Debug jOsa seeloe Set O 8Q 2R8 FA BoB s 4 2 2 fei Ele Bs R Ce Es ot mt OS leet FF Vd AD oll A SEH EO S amp B DEI S A Also Member gen v Select Patch intemal Force v Non Mises After choosing Delete Cross Section from the Display menu Page 223 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 224 Envelope Case Plots The diagrams of actions and stresses for envelope cases can be customized to display the enveloped actions in two different ways A plot displa
340. ted starts up the PDF document If Learning Multiframe is not detected Multiframe will start up the online version of Learning Multiframe in your web browser Learning Multiframe can be installed directly from the installation CD or from a download from our website More information can be found at http www formsys com support learning centre learning multiframe About Multiframe Tells which version of Multiframe you are using and how many joints members and forces etc there are in the structure Page 299 Chapter 4 Multiframe Analysis Chapter 4 Multiframe Analysis This chapter describes the analysis methods used in Multiframe Method of Analysis This section describes the methods and conventions that Multiframe uses e Matrix Stiffness Method e Axes and Sign Convention e Member Actions e Modal Analysis e Capacity e Nonlinear Analysis e Plate Analysis Matrix Stiffness Method Multiframe uses the matrix stiffness method of solution for solving a system of simultaneous equations to determine the forces and deflections in a structure Multiframe carries out a first order linear elastic analysis to determine these forces and deflections You should be familiar with the concepts and application of the matrix stiffness method before using this software The matrix stiffness method forms a stiffness matrix for each member of the structure and given a list of applied loading solves a system of linear simultaneous equati
341. ter calculation expressions for the position For example if you want a load to be at mid span you can enter L 2 for its position If you enter this in a load dialog this expression will be calculated for all the selected members This means you can apply this load to a number of members of different lengths simultaneously You can also enter more complicated expressions such as 2 L 3 or 1 35 L 4 2 The variable L is always available and contains the length of the member the syntax of the expressions is the same as that used in the CalcSheet Multiple loads of the same magnitude and direction may be added to the members by entering a comma separated list of load positions Global Moment A global moment is a bending moment that acts part way along a member and acts about one of the reference x y or z axes To apply a global moment to a member gt Select the member or members to be loaded gt Choose Global Moment from the Load menu or the short cut menu A dialog box will appear with icons to indicate the direction of the moment Page 147 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 148 Global Moment a Global Moment lee cag Magnitude Do kip ft OREA Left Distance Lie ft Cancel In a two dimensional view there will be two icons indicating the two possible moments which can be applied In the 3D view all six possible icons will be displayed with the direction of the arrows in the icons showing the direction of the action of the l
342. the Sections table in the Data window As of Multiframe v14 the Centre of Gravity calculation now includes Joint Masses Page 27 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 28 DXF Background It is now possible to load a DXF file and display it in the background behind your Multiframe model The command can be accessed from the Import sub menu under the File menu A DXF Background menu item in the View menu and a corresponding icon at the end of the View toolbar can be used to turn the display of the DXF background image on and off You can control the colour of the DXF background image using the View Colour command and selecting the item at the end of the list Before importing a DXF file you should be aware of some pre processing that you should do before loading into Multiframe e Only lines linear polylines and arcs will be loaded e All blocks should be exploded prior to import e All polylines containing arcs should be exploded e Units in the DXF file should match units in the Import dialog which appears in Multiframe when loading the file A Section Library C Documents and Settings phil Desktop SectionsLibrary slb Total Total Section Group ade Humber Us Length massi Mass m kg m m kg 125x75x10 Unequal An 7 214 4 2389855 14 200 409 744 250UC72 9 UC 5 657 2 41314 72900 624 769 Total 1713 303 90080 922 CGx 17 828 cGy 11 408 CGz 23 709 AJA Spring Members E Joint Masses A Sections Materials A Step Load ALi A CG ico
343. the section will be automatically be computed Only the groups in the library that are not locked will be shown in the list of groups If you wish to store the section in the library and have it available for use in other structures store the section in one of the groups other than the group named Frame Sections stored in the Frame group will be stored with the structure and will not appear in the list unless you are using this structure You will probably find it convenient to store most of your sections in the Frame group to avoid cluttering up your library with sections that are only used in one or two structures Adding a Custom Section If the structural section you require is not contained in the Sections Library and is not one of the standard shapes supported by Multiframe you can define the section by specifying all the key cross section properties Although you may find it easier to use the Section Maker application to create and install your section this section describes how you can add a section by simply typing in the key sectional properties To add a custom section gt Choose Add Section from the Sections submenu under the Edit menu A dialog box will appear with a list of group names a table of section properties a field for the section s name and a list of icons to indicate the sections shape Hame New Section Properties Group Custom S D 106mm Shape Unknown Section a i v TTT o a DEI
344. tiframe 4D you can display a table showing the results of a buckling analysis gt Choose Member Buckling from the Result sub menu under the Display menu Each row shows the axial force in the member and the effective length of the member for buckling of the member about both the major and minor axes of the member In addition the table displays the effective length factors for buckling about the major and minor axes of the member Time History Results The time history results are stored on disk in a file called lt Filename gt mth Do not delete this file while Multiframe4D is running and the associated frame is loaded To view the results for each time step in a dynamic or seismic load case gt Choose the step from the Time menu To best see the results gt Choose Animate from the Display menu gt Select Steps Page 205 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 206 Mavmmum Envelope Minimiun Envelope Absolute Envelope 1 Initial Structure Step 1 t 0 100s 3 Step 2 t O 200s 4 Step 3 t 0 300s 5 Step 4 t O 400s 6 Step 5 t 0 500s Step 6 t O 600s 6 Step t O 700 9 Step 8 t O 800s 10 Step 9 Le 900s Step 10 t 1 000s Step 11 t 1 100s Step 12 t 1 200 Step 13 t 1 300s Step 14 t 1 400s Step 15 t 1 500s Step 16 t 1 600s Step 17 t 1 700 Step 18 bel DUU Step 19 t 1 900 Time History Animate GH Animate C View Angle SE C Diagram C Load Cases K ta EEA fe
345. tiframe Analysis Page 312 References You may find the following books useful to refer to if you need information on the matrix stiffness method of structural analysis Matrix Structural Analysis R L Sack PWS Kent Boston 1989 Computer Methods of Structural Analysis F W Beaufait Prentice Hall New Jersey 1970 Matrix Methods of Structural Analysis R K Livesley The MacMillan Co New York 1964 Matrix Analysis for Structural Engineers N Willems amp W M Lucas Prentice Hall New Jersey 1968 Structural Dynamics Theory and Computation Mario Paz Van Nostrand New York 1991 Structural Dynamics An introduction to computer methods R R Craig J Wiley amp Sons New York 1981 Matrix Structural Analysis Meek J L McGraw Hill New York 1971 Theory of Matrix Structural Analysis Przemieniecki Dover Publication New York 1968 Structural Analysis A Unified Classical and Matrix Approach Ghali A and Neville A M 3 edition Chapman and Hall London 1989 Matrix Structural Analysis McGuire W Gallagher R H and Ziemian R D 2 edition John Wiley and Son New York 2000 Appendix A Troubleshooting Appendix A Troubleshooting This appendix describes some solutions to commonly encountered problems that may occur with Multiframe Troubleshooting Most Multiframe users at some stage will experience an error message that indicates that some of the degrees of freedom are unrestrained or that The solut
346. to change gt Click the OK button Joint 1 will stay at its original location joint 2 will be moved to match the entered length and slope Rescaling the Structure You can use the Rescale command from the Geometry menu to rescale the selected joints in the Frame window This command is useful for investigating structural alternatives where you may wish to change the overall aspect ratio of a structure or part of a structure gt Select the part of the structure to be rescaled gt Choose Rescale from the Geometry menu Page 97 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 98 A dialog box will appear with the scaling factors in each of the axis directions Hescale Jo Ea OF y Factor E z Factor Dn Lancel gt Enter the scaling factors for the x y and z directions gt Click the OK button Rescaling is done relative to the origin of the axes so you may wish to use the Move command to move the origin prior to rescaling to ensure that rescaling occurs from the correct point Coordinates are rescaled by multiplying their value by the scaling factor For example a joint with coordinates x 2 y 2 z 2 and rescaled using scale factors of 1 5 2 0 and 3 0 for the x y and z directions respectively would move to the new location of x 3 y 4 z 6 Using a scaling factor of 1 will reflect the selected joints about the appropriate axis Multiframe will not create a connection between joints that you superimp
347. to the whole structure To create a Buoyancy Load Case gt Choose Buoyancy from the Add Case menu in the Case menu A dialog will be displayed which allows you to enter details of the buoyancy load case Buoyancy Load Case Flat Waterline Height of water level 10 000 Sinusoidal Waveform Waterline 10 000 2 000 0 000 0 000 Water density 1025 000 Gravity g 9 807 Flood hollow members Copy settings from previous Buoyancy Load Case Flat Sinusoidal Waterline Select either a flat or a sinusoidal wave fluid surface Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Height of Water Level For a flat waterline enter the height of the water level above the origin Any part of the structure that protrudes above the surface of the water will not have a Buoyancy load applied to it Wave Length For a sinusoidal waterline enter a value for the wave length Wave Height For a sinusoidal waterline enter a value for the wave height Trough Co ordinates For a sinusoidal waterline enter values for the wave trough co ordinates Wave Direction For a sinusoidal waterline enter the wave direction The wave is applied horizontally in the x z plane A value of zero applied the water current along the x axis Positive angles of water current direction represent a rotation anti clockwise Water Density Enter a value of water density Gravity Enter the value of gravitational acceleration Flood Hollow Members
348. traints or the properties of a joint Multiframe can evaluate expressions that include variables representing the coordinates of a joint These variables are as follows Variable Description Units X x coordinate of joint Length Y y coordinate of joint Length Z z coordinate of joint Length When the dialog is accepted each joint in the current selection is considered in turn the above variables substituted by the location of the joint and the appropriate values set for the load restraint or joint property The following dialogs currently support evaluation of these variables e Joint Spring dialog e Joint Displacement dialog e Joint Orientation dialog e Joint Load dialogs e Joint Moment dialogs e Dynamic Load dialog Member Variables Multiframe can evaluate expressions that contain variables which represent the geometric properties of a member or it s section properties These variables include Variable Description Units L Length of member Length Al x coord of joint at start of member Length Y1 y coord of joint at start of member Length Z1 z coord of joint at start of member Length X2 x coord of joint at end of member Length Y2 y coord of joint at end of member Length Z2 z coord of joint at end of member Length B Width of section Displacement D Depth of section Displacement Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Tf Flange thickness Displacement Tw Web thickness Displacement A Area of section Area theta Member Orientat
349. ts can be applied relative to the global coordinate system in which case the moments act about axes parallel to one of the global x y or z axes Joint moments may also be specified using the local orientation of a joint in which case the moments act about axes parallel to the direction of the local degrees of freedom at a joint Page 133 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe To apply a moment to a joint gt Select the joint or joints to be loaded gt Choose Global Joint Moment from the Load menu to apply a moment relative to the global axes gt or gt Choose Local Joint Moment from the Load menu to apply a moment relative to the nodal axes A dialog box will appear with icons to indicate the direction of loading dommt Moment ei Joint Moment Wee eas Magnitude fi kip ft Cancel In a two dimensional view there will be four icons indicating the four possible moment directions In the 3D view all six possible icons will be displayed with the icons showing the direction of the action of the moments about the global axes in the current view The line through the centre of each icon indicates the direction of the axis the moment is acting about gt Click on the icon which shows the direction in which the moment is to act gt Type ina value for the magnitude of the moment gt Click on the OK button There is no need to enter or signs for your moment magnitudes The directions are determined from the icon that you sel
350. ts for load case Al5 Load case name DISPLACEMENTS amp Start of displacements and reactions REACTIONS 16 F12 4 F12 4 F12 4 F12 4 F12 4 F12 4 F12 4 F12 4 F12 4 F12 4 F12 4 F12 4 Joint 3 x disp y disp z disp Ox Oy z Px react Py react Pz react Mx react My react Mz react repeat line for each joint MEMBER ACTIONS Start of local member actions 16 F12 4 F12 4 F12 4 F12 4 F12 4 F12 4 F12 4 F12 4 F12 4 F12 4 F12 4 F12 4 Member Fx1 Fy1 Fal Mx1 My1 Mal Fx2 Fy2 Fz2 Mx2 My2 Mz2 repeat each line for each member repeat for results for each load case END End of file Following is a summary of the various flags and codes used in the text file Page 324 Appendix D Text File Format SECTIONS Section Shape is an integer representing the shape of sections in the group EI Channel 2 Equal Angle 3 Unequal Angle 4 Tee 5 Rectangular Tube RHS 6 Square Tube SHS 7 Circular Tube 8 Circular bar 9 Rectangular bar 10 Folded Cee 11 Folded Zed 12 RESTRAINTS and SPRINGS xflag yflag zflag Oxflag Oyflag Ozflag One of these should be 1 and the others zero to indicate which degree of freedom is being restrained Only 1 degree of freedom can be set at a time for non zero restraints LOADS Global load codes Local load codes Point loads Point loads Px 3 Px 3 Py 13 Py 13 Pz 23 Pz 23 Distributed loads Distributed loads Wx 4 Wx 4 Wy 14 Wy 14 Wz 24 W7z 24 Moments Moments Mx 5 Tx 5 My 15
351. ts or nodes that define the corners of the patch Page 43 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe a waer pen a Soa File Edit View Select Geometry Group Frame Load Display Case Analyse Time Design Window Help Debug ex JO su e2 es t Oea eem Fale RER er CR LeaAbkellm Ja mAs 4 eO B aqaacHaAasaad 5A m Amm m ECH I2 18 N EERE a w a o v esa a a aar gg Sections E No Section Patch Material O No Material BE gt Choose Add Patch Openings from the Geometry menu or icon button gt Click in anti clockwise order the N points or nodes that define the corners of the patch opening Page 44 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe tumor TM File Edit View Select Geometry Group Frame Load Display Case Analyse Time Design Window Help geng i alx Den rees Oee et Ml FA 2 AGOA H Hl z d ml A D T R Rs Ce E la m lee 2 F VIA oll A JS mas mma ai ol a a A A 35 NO RAB ew m Am lei J IIZ 1B VS a w Hov aoeallaodayte Sections E No Section Patch Material O No Material View x 7 583 y 7 228 z 0 000 dx 3 412 dy 3 839 dz 0 000 L 5 136 G 48 366 oO Ready CAP NUM 3D amp Curved Patch Support Multiframe allows 3D and or curved patches to be created Patch curved edges will be defined by its edge design members Users can use the
352. ttons for selecting the level of reporting to be output to the Report Window during an analysis Reporting is only used for a nonlinear analysis for which convergence and iteration data are output to the Report Window in addition to any warnings and error messages in relation to the analysis The Full report also includes the displacement and force norms at the end of each iteration Page 185 Ki Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 186 Cancelling Analyses A progress indicator is displayed while analysis is in progress To cancel analysis gt Hit the escape key or gt Press cancel in the progress dialog The cursor will change to a watch and analysis will be terminated You can switch from Multiframe to another program while analysis is in progress Linear Analysis To perform a linear analysis gt Choose Analyse Linear from the Analyse menu or press the F2 function key on your keyboard Multiframe will immediately display the progress dialog and proceed with the analysis of all load cases Nonlinear Analysis Nonlinear Analysis Concepts Nonlinear analysis considers second order elastic nonlinearities that are due to the ba P A and flexural shortening effects The nonlinear analysis also accounts for the influence of any tension or compression only members within a structure Nonlinear Analysis Procedures To perform a nonlinear analysis gt Choose Analyse Nonlinear from the Analyse menu If this is not avai
353. u In a similar way you can select a row by clicking on the row number at the left hand end of the row or you can select the whole table by clicking in the box at the top left corner of the table Joint Displacements To display the joint displacements gt Choose Joint Displacements from the Results sub menu under the Display menu Page 197 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 198 Result mfe Static Case Load Case A dx dy dz fx by jaz aoe in in in deg deg deg At o oomo 00 0024 208 0 087 zZz J 2 Dm ors 0021 0026 0013 0 005 3 ooo ooo ooo ooo oomo 0 000 Ao 4 om ooj mp zt D 003 Bo 5 mmm 0022 Dm 0025 0011 0 011 eE J 6 om mm oooo oo00o 0005 000 IP Displacements Reactions amp Me gt The table of joint displacements displays the number of each joint at the left of each row and the deflections and rotations in the direction of each global axis appear in the six columns The units for each variable are shown underneath the title of the column in the table The displacements in this table are displayed in the directions of the local degree of freedoms at each joint These are defined by the orientation of the joint Joint Reactions To display the joint reactions gt Choose Joint Reactions from the Results sub menu under the Display menu Result Static Case Load Case 1 The table of joint reactions displays the number of each joint at the
354. ualised of as sorting all the joints into planes of joints the planes being aligned perpendicular to the sort direction The secondary sort then takes the joints in each of these planes and sorts them into lines of joints the lines being aligned perpendicular to the secondary sort direction The tertiary sort then performs a simple sort to order the joints along each the lines of joints in each of the planes To renumber the structure gt Choose Renumber from the Geometry menu Renumber BE x DK Primary Sort Options so GC E ie x lw Benumber joints we he Renumber members Secondary Sort Ce S e C C ve Tertiary Sort e tye Ox s ez ew Cancel Page 103 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 104 gt Choose the Primary Secondary and Tertiary sort directions gt Click on the OK button Note that you can renumber after analysis and your results will be preserved but displayed using the new joint and member numbers You can display the joint and member numbers on the members in the drawing windows by using the Symbol command from the Display menu and turning on Joint Numbers and or Member Numbers Joint and Member Labels Joints and members within in structure may be labelled with a text string of up to 15 characters Labels can be used for many purposes such as identifying the position of a member by floor or grid location identifying section types with a legend that would be used on a marking plan or to pro
355. ubdividing beams for the insertion of angle bracing The intersection member command can be used to rapidly draw grillages and multistorey building Continuous lines of beams or columns within the building can initially be drawn as a single member without regard for where they intersect tC XI Note that no joints exist at member intersections View 2 35 314 y 34 755 7 0 000 dx 2 144 dy 15 483 dz 0 000 L The Intersect Member command can then be used to correctly subdivide all the members in the model such that all intersecting members will be connected by a joint All members now intersect at a joint View 2 28 452 y 34 013 7 0 000 dees H 268 dy 19 463 dz 0 000 L Deleting a Member gt In the Frame window select the member or members to be deleted gt Choose Delete Member from the Geometry menu or gt Press the Delete key Frame 0 Select members to be deleted Page 80 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe After choosing Delete Member from the Frame menu Automatic Generation Multiframe includes capabilities for automatically generating commonly used frames The four facilities provided are for standard bay and storied frames such as those found in multi story buildings portal frames as used in many buildings with sloping roofs continuous beams and curved structures Generating a Portal Frame To generate a portal frame gt Choose Generate from the Geometry menu A dialog box will
356. ue y value z value 2 4 repeat line above for each restraint SPRINGS Start of data for springs I6 No of springs 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 F12 4 F1 Spring Joint x flag y flag z flag x flag y flag z Page 323 Appendix D Text File Format Sch flag x value y value z value x value Oy value z value F12 4 F12 4 F12 4 F12 4 repeat line above for each spring LOADS Start of loads I6 Number of load cases LOAD CASE Start of load case Al5 Name of load case JOINT LOAD Start of joint loads for this load case I6 Number of joint loads in this load case 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 F12 4 F12 4 F12 4F12 4 F12 4 F12 4 Load Joint x flag y flag z flag Ox flag Oy flag z flag x value y value z value Ox value y value z value repeat line above for each joint load m this case MEMBER LOAD Start of member loads for this load case I6 Number of member loads in this load case 16 16 16 F12 4 F12 4 F12 4 F12 4 Load Member Load Type Left dist right dist left magnitude right magnitude repeat line above for each member load in this case THERMAL LOAD Start of thermal load for this load case 16 Number of thermal loads in this load case 16 16 F12 4 F12 4 F12 4 F12 4 Load Member top temp bottom temp thermal coeff depth repeat line above for each thermal load in this case repeat for each thermal load in this case RESULTS Start of results of analysis LOAD CASE Start of resul
357. umber of members No limit Number of restraints and prescribed displacements No limit Number of springs No limit Number of load cases 500 Number of joint loads No limit Number of member loads No limit Number of thermal loads No limit Number of members connected at one joint 18 In practice some of the above limits may be reduced by the amount of memory available at the time the program is running You can increase memory by modifying virtual memory settings if required The amount of memory required is independent of the order in which the joints are numbered Multiframe will automatically optimise the internal numbering of the joints to best use the memory available Chapter 4 Multiframe Analysis The actual size of the structure you will be able to solve will depend on the number of load cases and the geometric configuration of the structure The more load cases you use the smaller structure you will be able to analyse If you do not have enough memory to analyse a structure try setting up the different load cases as separate files and analysing each load file separately Nonlinear Analysis Nonlinear analysis considers second order elastic nonlinearities which are due to the Pa P A and flexural shortening effects The nonlinear analysis also accounts for the influence of any tension or compression only members within a structure P delta effect The implementation of the P delta P d effect is based on the derivation presented by Gh
358. users to determine proper convergence tolerances for their design model or even for each load case when the nonlinear analysis doesn t converge Type of Convergence Norm Convergence of the solution within each increment is tested using a Residual Force or Displacement The Residual Force norm is computed by dividing the maximum unbalanced force at the end of an iteration by the maximum force applied in the current increment The Displacement norm is determined as the maximum change in displacement in an iteration which is normalised by the maximum total displacement at any joint in the structure The user may choose whether to use a either or both of these norms to test convergence Unless analysis time is an issue we suggest that both norms be used to test convergence as it is desirable for the value of both norms to be small at the end of an analysis Also see Patch Internal Forces To display the patch internal forces gt Choose Patch Internal Forces from the Results sub menu under the Display menu Page 188 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe m 2 zl 8 200 2000 aooo oooi Am Am woo Am aara Am um 20 4 gt Patch Internal Forces A Patch Stresses Natural Frequencies K Buckling H Design le el Ready E Auto test examples GDIplus bug mfd NUM The table of patch internal forces displays the number of each patch its label all joint numbers within the patch and the five plate bending transverse
359. using rigid connections between the joints and the members In Multiframe these rigid connections are applied using Member Offsets Member Offsets are rigid links between a joint and the end of a member They are infinitely stiff and do not deform in bending shear or axially Loading on members with rigid offsets is applied to the flexible portion of the member only see Member Length on the diagram below and distances used to specify the position of loads are measured from the ends of the rigid offsets Member Length xl ee 8 Member Offsets When Member Offsets are specified Multiframe considers the length of the member to be the length of the flexible portion of the member Member Length in the diagram above Page 128 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe To set the Member Offsets on a member gt Select the member or members to be modified gt Choose Member Offsets from the Frame menu Member Offset Connections Global O Local between modes Node 7 0 000 0 000 Same offset at both nodes gt Click on the radio button corresponding to the axes from which the offset connections will be measured gt Type in the size of the offset connections at both ends of the members gt Click on the OK button The size of the offset connections may be specified using global or local axes If local axes are Selected the offset connections are measured relative to the local axes as defined by the joints at the end of the members
360. ut we re not Perfect We make every effort to ensure that our software will meet our users needs and perform accurately However as with all complex software systems it is possible for errors to occur If you suspect a problem with Multiframe please contact our technical support staff by email at support formsys com and explain what you believe the problem to be In the unlikely event of a problem being found we will correct it as soon as practicable and send you a new corrected version of the program To get accurate results from Multiframe it is necessary for you to model the problem correctly and to correctly interpret the results produced This requires structural engineering experience combined with an understanding of matrix structural analysis It is the users responsibility to correctly model the structure and assume responsibility for the results Index 2 KR A E 260 3 STESR KEE 260 A About Multiframe cccessseseeeeeees 296 Absolute Envelope cccccccccccsssssseeeeeees 294 Actions Sub Menu 256 257 284 289 291 292 Actions Toolbar ccceeceeceeceeceees 250 271 Add Custom Section ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 117 INV AVC a l EA E E Ka Standard Section ccccceeecceeeeeeeeeeeees 116 PRC Ee 154 155 292 Add Case Sub Menu cccccccessssseeseeeeees 293 Add Connected Members nosooseeeeeeeeeeen 273 Add Gt OUD ssc cissccsasesserssniancinsasaresesdensee
361. uted load acts parallel to one of the global x y or z axes Local Plate Load Add a local pressure load to each of the selected plates in the Load window A dialog box will appear which allows you to specify the pressure magnitude and direction of the load A local distributed load acts parallel to one of the local x y or a member axes Display Menu The Display menu contains commands for controlling which data is displayed in the different windows Symbols This command brings up a dialog box that allows you to specify which symbols will be displayed in the Frame Load and Plot windows You can turn on or off the display of joint and member numbers loads restraints member axes masses and names of sections Legend The Legend menu contains commands to control the appearance of legends e Top Left Display the legend in the top left hand corner of the window e Top Right Display the legend in the top right hand corner of the window e Bottom Left Display the legend in the bottom left hand corner of the window Page 285 Chapter 3 Multiframe Reference Page 286 e Bottom Right Display the legend in the bottom right hand corner of the window e Title Font Sets the font size and style used display the title of the legend e Item Font Sets the font size and style used display the items listed within the legend e Item Colour Specify the colour associated with the items listed within the legend Data See the
362. vide an alternative numbering scheme that remains unchanged as the structure is modified To set the label on a joint or a member gt Select the joint s or member s to be labelled gt Choose Joint Labels or Member Labels from the Frame menu A dialog box will appear with a field in which to type the label Joint Label Label Di Cancel gt Type in the text for the label gt Click on the OK button You can display the joint and member labels on the members in the drawing windows by using the Symbol command from the Display menu and turning on Joint Labels and or Member Labels Restraints A structure must be sufficiently restrained for analysis to be carried out A minimum requirement is that the structure be restrained against movement in each of the x y and z directions and that it should not have any mechanisms caused by collapsible pinned structures The restraints on the structure are specified by first selecting the joint or joints to be restrained and then selecting the appropriate type of restraint The restraint may take the form of a zero displacement restraint or a spring A joint may have either a restraint or a spring for each degree of freedom but not combinations of these restraints for any degree of freedom Thus a joint could have a vertical restraint and a horizontal spring but not a horizontal restraint and a horizontal spring or a vertical restraint and a vertical spring Chapter 2 Using Multiframe All
363. viewing a global diagram of the structure The reactions are drawn as arrows with the tail of the arrow scaled according the size of the reaction A minimum tail length is enforced so that small reactions are always visible The reactions are displayed aligned with the local orientation of the joint and may also be drawn shaded so that smaller reactions are shown in lighter shades of colour Chapter 2 Using Multiframe The user can choose to display either or both the force and moment reactions using the Symbols dialog A convenient shortcut button is provided in the Plot Toolbar to turn on or off the display of these reactions The Symbols dialog also provides options for displaying the label associated with each reaction and for choosing whether to display the reactions is shades of colour Structure Diagrams The diagrams of the whole structure can display bending moments shear forces axial forces torque or deflection When you have a diagram of the whole structure drawn in the Plot window and forces on display the force diagram for each member will be superimposed on the member With deflections on display a diagram of the exaggerated deflection of the whole structure will be drawn If you have performed a modal analysis and you are currently viewing a modal case the deflected shape will represent the mode shape for that case For all diagrams Multiframe will choose a scale which best suits the size of your structure and the magnitude of t
364. w The load will be aligned with the global coordinate system A dialog box will appear allowing you to specify a direction and magnitude for the moment Local Joint Load Add a point load to each of the selected joints in the Load window The load will be aligned with the local orientation of the joint A dialog box will appear allowing you to specify a direction and magnitude for the load Local Joint Moment Add a point moment to each of the selected joints in the Load window The load will be aligned with the local orientation of the joint A dialog box will appear allowing you to specify a direction and magnitude for the moment Prescribed Displacement Prescribe a displacement at all the joints selected in the Frame window A dialog box will appear which allows you to specify the direction and magnitude of the displacement Unload Member Remove all loads from the selected members in the Load window Global Dist d Load Add a distributed load to each of the selected members in the Load window A dialog box will appear which allows you to specify the magnitude direction and position of the load A global distributed load acts parallel to one of the global x y or z axes Global Point Load Add a point loads to each of the selected members in the Load window A dialog box will appear which allows you to specify the magnitude direction and position of the load A global point load acts parallel to one of the global x y or z axes
365. waeaens 278 Add Group SOC ensss sisters sscouweanctneavaccthindecsiater 278 PROC OM Miss sccnscasitanvnaterunstusdeanntaheeosmebietannanes 276 Add JOMIS seeren aE 276 Add Material cccccceecceececcescees 122 265 Add Member 36 273 274 275 Add SECOM EE 117 265 Add Standard Section eee eee 116 265 Add to Group 278 Adding a combined load case 0000nneeennn 155 Adding a envelope load case 155 Adding a Static load case 154 Adding eessen gegen eege ie 93 Adding Seismic Load Cases 000000n0eeeen 162 Adding Time History Load Cases 160 Advanced ccccsasecesesoerceneicacsacanaszesecsaeeeass 276 283 EE 93 EE 183 297 Analysis Parameters eennenesesseeeeeeeeeeee 186 Analysis Settings Table 288 HEET 284 EE 245 Applying Dynamic Loads 000000e 161 Applying Loades 132 Arrange ICONS ce swseteaececeeceretcusiesdectecnewseuedveces 294 Ree IS CVS T 6 Automation Help 295 Automation Reference ccccceesseseeeeeeees 295 Ee 266 Axial Compresston 289 Index RN E 289 Axial Shortening eeeeeeeeeeessessseee 186 303 PE a E 290 AXial TenSiOt EE 289 B PACKS ACC serseri eien n e 6 Batch Analysis ccccccccccssssssssssssssseeeeeeeees 194 Bending Sby Jet 290 Bending Sby geht 290 Bending Sbz bottom 290 Bending SBZ AOD ME 290 Deta ang lessenaar aas 113 Peta ee 336 Bitmap Image 243 261 Buckling Analvag 190 Maxi
366. will be asked if you wish to append the file to the existing frame You may also be prompted to save the existing frame gt Select the file to be imported using the Open File dialog Upon choosing a file the Import Export Options dialog will be displayed Complete the settings in this dialog as described above and click OK The SDNF file will now be imported into Multiframe While not all the features in the SDNF file are represented in Multiframe ever attempt is made when importing the frame to map the members within the SDNF file to appropriate representations within Multiframe Struclink Multiframe can import files from STAAD and Prosteel using the Struclink struclink data format To import a Struclink file gt Choose Struclink from the Import sub menu Upon choosing a file Multiframe will automatically detect if it originated from STAAD or Prosteel If sections saved in that file are from a country section library different from the Multiframe section library a prompt will appear asking to continue or not Even with the correct section library open it is possible that not all sections will be successfully mapped If this is the case a warning message will be shown Chapter 2 Using Multiframe File Export Multiframe can export frames in a number of file formats Each file format that can be exported by Multiframe is described in the following sections DXF 2D 3D Multiframe can export 2D or 3D DXF files which c
367. wind profile chart in the dialog will be updated accordingly and wind pressures applied to members with a negative height Air Density Enter a value of air density The wind pressure is calculated by P 0 5 Par VW C Where C is a combination of the user and shape factors Page 167 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 168 Wind Direction Enter the wind direction The wind is applied horizontally in the x z plane A value of zero applied the wind along the x axis Positive angles of wind direction represent a rotation anti clockwise Include Members Patches Load Panels Tick the include check boxes to include ignore any type of element from having a wind load applied Include Friction Drag Tick the Friction Drag button to include friction drag force to sidewalls and roofs that run parallel with the defined wind direction If Patches or Load Panels are not included the Friction Drag force will not be applied to them The Friction Drag Force is calculated by P 0 5 pair V CC Where C is the user coefficient default 1 0 The default value of C Friction Drag Coefficient is taken to be 0 01 To change the value of Cp use the Patch Load Panel Wind Factors dialog as described below Member Factors Tick the check boxes to define which member factors are automatically calculated If the boxes are not ticked the default value is applied The member factors are e K Aspect ratio factor As defined by AS1170 Appendix E
368. window A dialog box will appear allowing you to specify which type of restraint to apply Joint Mass Multiframe 4D only Additional mass added to a structure to add inertia for dynamic analysis Joint Spring Prescribe a spring at all the joints selected in the Frame window A dialog box will appear which allows you to specify the direction and stiffness of the spring Chapter 3 Multiframe Reference Joint Type Set the selected joint type as rigid or pinned Rigid joints transmit moment and pinned joints do not Joint Linking Links a group of joints together so that they move together in response to static or dynamic loads Joint Labels Allows you to edit the user defined label associated with each joint Joint Orientation Set the orientations of the local axes at the selected joints Section Type Set the section type for all the members selected in the Frame window A dialog box will appear which allows you to choose the section to use for the members selected Member Releases Set the type of the selected members in the Frame window members can be fixed or pinned at either or both ends Member Shear Area Allows you to turn on or off the use of the optional calculation of deflection due to shear deformation Member Orientation Set the orientation of the section for all the members selected in the Frame window A dialog box will appear which allows you to rotate the section to the desired orientation
369. xy Display the computed plate twisting moments in x y plane for the current load case in the Plot window Shear Vxz Display the computed plate transverse shear force about the local z axis in x z plane for the current load case in the Plot window Shear Vyz Display the computed plate transverse shear force about the local z axis in y z plane for the current load case in the Plot window Moment Mmin Display the computed minimum plate bending moments about the principal axis for the current load case in the Plot window Moment Mmax Display the computed maximum plate bending moments about the principal axis for the current load case in the Plot window Force Fx x Display the computed membrane direct forces about the local xx axis for the current load case in the Plot window Force Fyy Display the computed membrane direct forces about the local xx axis for the current load case in the Plot window Force Fxy Display the computed membrane shear forces in x y plane axis for the current load case in the Plot window Force Fmin Display the computed minimum membrane forces about the principal axis for the current load case in the Plot window Page 293 Chapter 3 Multiframe Reference Page 294 Force Fmax Display the computed maximum membrane forces about the principal axis for the current load case in the Plot window Patch Stresses Submenu The items in the Patch Stresses submenu
370. y menu gt Click on two nodes at diagonally opposite corners of the panel Page 37 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe BER e aor Groups Group Set1 E Ungrouped ADe KK A Ein View x 4 360 y 5 543 z 0 000 dx 4 426 dy 4 195 dz 0 000 L 6 098 43 464 Oo To add a triangular load panel gt Choose Add 3 node Load Panel from the Geometry gt Click in anti clockwise order the three nodes that define the corners of the load panel ER L zep gesloanlls IT A Tl leis Groups Group Set1 E Ungrouped View x 5 000 y 5 000 z 0 000 dx 5 119 dy 5 036 dz 0 000 L 7 181 44 532 To add a quadrilateral load panel gt Choose Add 4 node Load Panel from the Geometry menu gt Click in anti clockwise order the four nodes that define the corners of the panel EE L zecs geeloanlls fJ eja joy e Groups Group Set1 E Ungrouped eo p 4 me S RN EI To automatically add load panels between all of the members in a planar region eg a floor or frame Page 38 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe gt Select the members which define the planar region Load Panel R IT movema sy Peet e et oe Dt DDD aan sakaani ea ot a pee ee Se gt Choose Auto generate Load Panels from the Geometry menu iL Adding a Patch There are several ways to add a patch The types of patches that can be added are rectangular patches triangular patches quadrilateral patches and automatically created
371. y number of self weight load cases with different acceleration factors You should make sure that you have set all of the section types for the structure before you use the self weight command If any of the sections used in the structure have zero mass Multiframe will prompt you with a dialog to go ahead with or cancel the use of self weight If you wish to use self weight with custom sections make sure you enter an appropriate value for the mass when adding the section to the library Member Self Weight If you add a self weight case you can specify whether or not an individual member s weight is to be included by using the Member Self Weight command from the Load menu To specify whether a member s weight should be included in self weight gt Make sure a self weight load case is the current load case gt Select the member s to be changed in the Load window gt Choose Member Self Weight from the Load menu Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Member Self Weight x Static ignore Include iY Apply to all self weight load cases Cancel gt Click the Ignore or Include radio button as appropriate gt Click OK If you have more than one self weight load case you can turn on the check box to have the same self weight settings used for all self weight cases otherwise the settings may be different for each self weight load case The Member Self Weight command only affects the self weight for static analysis If you ar
372. y typing in new coordinates for its position gt Double click on the joint A dialog box will appear with the joint s coordinates Joint 1 Properties X Cancel gt Type in the new values for the coordinates gt Click the OK button You can also change a joint s location by typing or pasting new values in the X Y and Z columns of the Joint table in the Data window Page 92 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Adding Joints As joints are automatically added to the model when members are drawn there is generally no need to add individual joints to a frame However in some circumstances it can be more convenient to add joints at specified locations and later draw in the members connected to the joint To add a new joint to the model gt Choose Add Joint from the Advanced submenu in the Geometry menu A dialog box will appear prompting for the coordinates and properties of the new joint Add Joint Cancel gt Type in the values for the coordinates gt Optionally enter an label for the joint gt Select the joint type gt Click the OK button Upon successful exit from the dialog a new joint will be added to the frame at the specified location Aligning Joints Joints in the model can have a single component of their position set to a specified value so as to align the joint to a specific location To align a number of joints to the same position gt Select the joints to be aligned in the Frame window
373. ying only the positive and negative envelopes of the actions can be specified by gt Choose Symbols from the Display menu The symbols dialog will appear gt Choose Symbols deselect the Show enveloped cases option gt Click OK The diagrams for enveloped cases will show just the outline of the positive and negative envelopes View Case Envelope Load Case 1 Mai kM m The alternative method for displaying the envelope case is to plot each of the individual load cases that are used to construct the envelope Plots can be displayed in this way by checking the gt Choose Symbols from the Display menu The symbols dialog will appear gt Choose Symbols select the Show enveloped cases option gt Click OK Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Plot O OOOO lol xi Load cases E i250L 15LL E iE D LACPE E 125D0E SCY E oD LALAN PLY B 1250A S L View Case Envelope Load Case 1 Mz kM m A feature of envelope load cases is that they can be edited without needing to re analyse the model Joint Reactions The diagram of a joint s reactions shows the direction and magnitudes of the reactions at the joint Joint reactions are displayed relative to the local coordinate system of the joint To display the reactions for a joint gt Ensure the moments shear torque or axial forces are on display gt Double click on the original position of the joint in the structure diagram Rx 37 001 kN Ry 66 753 KN Rz 3 483 k
374. you can select it using the Joints command from the Select menu If more than one joint lies under the point where you click Multiframe will select the joint closest to you Selecting Members To select a member gt Click on the member away from its ends A selected member is drawn with a heavy black line A selected member always has the two joints at its ends selected Page 75 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe Page 76 N This member is selected If you know the number of the member you wish to select you can select it using the Members command from the Select menu To select a group of members gt Drag a rectangle which encloses the members to be selected If you drag from top left to bottom right all of the members enclosed will be selected If you drag from bottom right to top left all of the enclosed members and all of the members intersecting with the rectangle will be selected To select all the members gt Choose All from Select menu To extend or reduce the selection gt Shift click to add a member to or remove a member from the current selection gt Shift drag to add a group of members to or remove a group of members from the current selection When performing a drag selection there are two techniques for selecting a group of members and joints The first is by using a rectangular box as described above An alternative to this is to use a line selection in which the user drags the end of a straight l
375. you model a frame like this you will often get the error message Solution does not make sense The lifting analysis function automatically adds additional spring restraints to the model to provide sufficient horizontal restraint to allow the model to be analysed This eliminates the need for you to apply your own manual spring restraints Chapter 2 Using Multiframe The stiffness of these restraints 1s automatically set by Multiframe so as to have a minimal effect on the actions within the frame They are set at a small proportion of the other stiffnesses in the frame While you are creating your structural model you should review the location of the centre of mass and ensure that the lifting point is located as near as possible to a location directly above the centre of mass of the structure and its loads Note also that when modelling slings or lifting cables you should release both moments and torsion at the ends of those members If you release all of the sling members connecting to the lifting point be sure to applied a fixed restraint to the lifting point to prevent that node from rotating A lifting analysis is performed via the Lifting command in the Analysis menu A lifting analysis is in fact a special type of linear analysis and as such the results of the lifting analysis are stored as the results of a linear analysis If your sling members are set to Tension Only then a dialog will appear allowing you to take those effects int
376. ype in values for the magnitude of the load at each end gt Click the axes in which to apply the load The axis of the load determines how the load is distributed along the members With Global or Projected axes the magnitude of a global distributed load refers to its load per length where the length is measured perpendicular to the direction of the load This means a vertical distributed load applied to an inclined member will apply a total load equivalent to the magnitude of the load times the horizontal projected length of the member For loads applied in local axes the magnitude of the distributed load refers to its load per length where the length is the actual length of the load measured along the member gt Click on the OK button Note that when working in dialog boxes you can use the Tab key to move from one editing box to the next If you do this in this case the right hand end magnitude will automatically be set to the same value as the left hand end magnitude You may type over this second value if you wish to have a non uniform load There is no need to enter or signs for your load magnitudes The directions are determined from the icon that you select Page 136 Chapter 2 Using Multiframe When you enter positions of loads in the member loading dialogs or the Data window you can enter calculation expressions for the position For example if you want a load to start at one third span you can enter L 3 for its start p
377. ysis Time History Analysis Batch Analysis xx xX x Also see Viewing Results on page 195 Chapter 4 Multiframe Analysis on page 297 for information on the calculation methods used in Multiframe and sign conventions etcetera Precision and Memory Requirements The solver will automatically switch from double precision to single precision arithmetic if there is not enough memory Single precision arithmetic is less precise than double it has about 7 digits of precision as opposed to 15 digits for double but has the advantage of requiring less storage space for the stiffness matrix This allows you to solve larger problems or have more load cases for the same amount of memory The only problem that can arise from the use of single precision arithmetic is that if the stiffness matrix is badly conditioned round off errors may accumulate during analysis and may make results less accurate Multiframe will warn you if it switches to single precision and give you the option of analysing using single precision or cancelling the analysis The solver includes error checking routines to detect problems with the structure If you have drawn any members that are not connected to the rest of the structure Multiframe will alert you to this fact The section properties of all the sections will also be checked to ensure that they are non zero where appropriate Reporting The Reporting group at the bottom of the Analysis dialog contains three bu

View - Daystar Software, Inc.

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents